Physical Science FET PDF

Further Education and Training
Grade 12 (FET)
Bright Ideas
Physical Science
Revision Booklet
Physical Science
Grade 12
REVISION BOOKLET
1
1 Foreword 5
2 How to use this Revision Booklet 6
2.1 For every topic you need to: 6
2.2 General strategy for problem-solving in Physics 6
3 Key Physics Concepts 7
3.1 Newton’s Laws 7
3.2 Momentum and Impulse 8
3.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 9
3.4 Work Energy and Power. Work-Energy Theorem. Law of Conser- 10

vation of Mechanical Energy.
3.5 Doppler Effect 11
3.6 Electrostatics 12
3.7 Electric Circuits 15
3.8 Electrodynamics 16
3.9 Photoelectric Effect 18
4 Revision Questions- Set 1 19
4.4 Work Energy Power 29
2
5 Revision Questions - Set 2 (master an additional 20%) 46
6 Check your answers - Set 1
6.2 Solutions: Momentum and Impulse 58
3
Chemistry
1 How to use this book 89
2 Key subject Concepts 89
3 The Representation Model 89
4 Tips on specific topics 90
5 Study and examination tips 90
6 Message to Grade 12 learners from the writers 90
7 The Mole Concept 91
8 Stoichiometry 91
8.1 Excess and Limiting Reagents 92
9 Practice activities from Grade 10 93
10 Dynamic Chemical Equilibrium Graphs 93
11 Concentration-time graphs 94
12 fertilizers 96
13 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 101
13.1 BASIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 101
13.2 NOMENCLATURE OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 102
14 ELECTROCHEMISTRY 124
4
1 Foreword
Message from the Minister of Basic Education
Message to Grade 12 Learners from the Minister of Basic Education
Matric (Grade12) is perhaps the most important examination you will

prepare for. It is the gateway to your future; it is the means to enter
tertiary institutions; it is your opportunity to pursue the career of your
dreams.
It is not easy to accomplish but it can be done with hard work and
dedication, prioritising your time and effort to ensure that you cover as
much of the curriculum content as possible in order to be well-prepared
for the examinations.
I cannot stress the importance and value of revision in preparing for the
examinations. Once you have covered all the content and topics, you
should start working through the past examination papers, thereafter
check your answers against the memoranda. If your answers are not
correct, go back to the Mind the Gap (MTG) series and work through
the content again. Then retest yourself, and continue with this process
until you get all the answers right.
The Bright Idea… getting exam ready booklet will allow you to do this in a systemic way. It has been
developed to assist you to achieve a minimum of 40% in the examinations – if you work hard and follow the
advice and guidance provided. I also urge you to continue with the next section in this booklet that deals with
an additional 20%, which will ensure you have covered the basics required to achieve at least a 60% pass.
Use this valuable resource which has been developed especially for YOU. Work hard, persevere, work every
day, read and write every day to ensure that you are successful.
I have faith that you can do this. Remember ‘SUCCESS’ depends on the second letter, ‘U’.
Best Wishes
MRS AM MOTSHEKGA, MP
MINISTER OF BASIC EDUCATION
DATE: 24/02/2017
5
2 How to use this Revision Booklet
2.1 For every topic you need to:
• Learn the content.
• Study the strategy you need to use to answer questions on that topic.
• Study the worked examples. First try to answer the worked examples yourself by writing down your
own solution. Then compare your solution with the solution given in the book.
• Do the exercises without looking at the solutions.
• Compare your solutions with the given solutions and identify what your mistakes were (if any).
• Go back to your answer and correct any errors.
• Do another exercise. You can find more exercises in this book, previous NSC question papers, Mind
the Gap (MTG) study guides, the Grade 12 Siyavula textbook and many other sources.
2.2 General strategy for problem-solving in Physics

(a) Read the whole question as many times as you need to, in order to understand what is given and what
you need to find out or calculate.
• If a diagram is given, look at the diagram while reading the question and try to understand the
diagram.
• If a diagram is not given, represent the problem in a rough sketch and put all the information given into
the diagram, e.g. if the velocity of a car is given, write it down, e.g. car = 2 m∙s-1 to the left
(b) Write the given information in symbolic form (data) using the correct scientific symbols, e.g. i for initial
velocity, net for net force, etc.
(c) Select /choose the appropriate equation /formula /principal /law /theorem /concept.
(d) Substitute the given data in the selected equation and do the calculations where calculations are
required.
(e) Check that your answer makes sense and that:
• the numerical value is reasonable
• the correct units are used
• magnitude and direction (if it is a vector quantity)
6
d) Substitute the given data in the selected equation and do the calculations where calculations are required.
e) Check d) that Substitute your answer thee) given makes
Check datasense in the
that your and
selected that: equation
answer makes sense
and doand thethat: calculations where calculations are required.
d) Substitute
 thethe given
numerical d) Substitute
value the the
selected
d) given Substitute data
equation in the the and selected
given do the data equation
calculations
in the andwhere
selected calculations
thecalculations
do equation and are where
the required. calculations where are required. Commented [U10]: Formatting: pse standardise alignme
e) Checkdata that Commented [U10]
inyour answer
is reasonable makes sense and that:
d) Substitute e) Check the given
that the
your d)
data numerical
Substitute
in
answer the value
selected
makes the is
given reasonable
equation
sense data
and in
and
that:the do selected
the calculations
equationwhere and do do the calculations
calculations calculations are where calculations
required. calculations are are required.
required. and indentation of all equivalent items, including bullet poin
e) Check d)that
d)
the your
Substitute
Substitute
correct answer
the units the
theare
numerical makes given
given used
value sense
data
data e) is in and
inCheck the
the selected
reasonable that:
selected
that your equation
equation
answer and
and
makes do
do the the
sense calculations
calculations
and that: where calculations
where calculations are required. are required. Commented [U10]: Formatting: and indentation of all e
pse standard
e) Check that
the your answer
Substitute
d)numerical thee) value Check
correct
makes
the isgiven that
units
sense
reasonable datayour
are and answer
used that: makes sense and that:
equation and do the calculations where calculations are required. lists,
Commented [U10]:and
etc. Commented
Formatting: [U10]: Formatting:
lists,alignment
etc. pse
 the numerical
 e) e) Check
magnitudeCheckvalue  thatthat
and is your
your
reasonable
direction answer
answer (if it makes
makes
isthe a numerical
vector sense
sense and
and
quantity) that:
inthat:
value theisselected reasonable indentation pseofstandardise
all equivalent items,
Commented including
 the correct
numerical units
value
Check aremagnitude
that used the
reasonable your numerical and direction
answer value (if
makes reasonable
it
issense is a and vector that: quantity) and indentation Commentedof Commented
all equivalent
lists,[G11]:
etc.and [U10]:
indentation
items, including
Missing Formatting:
word ofbullet Commented
pse standardise
all equivalent
points, items, in
 the correct the the
units numerical
thenumerical
are
 used thee)correct value
value
 units
is is reasonable
isreasonable are used Commented
Commented [U10]:
[U10]: Formatting:
Formatting: Commented pse
pse and indentation
standardise
standardise
[G11]: al
ali

direction the correct
the(ifcorrect units
units are
arequantity) used
used lists, etc. and indentation of
lists, etc. all equivalent items, and
lists,
indentation
including bull
 themagnitude
correct units andare used valueit is aisvector reasonable and
andindentation
indentationofofall
Commented all equivalent
[G11]:Commented
equivalent items,
items, including
[U10]:
including
etc. Formatbulle
 magnitude Commented [G12]: Better in thisMissing
way word lists, etc. bullet
 direction vector quantity)
 magnitude  and the
thecorrectcorrect
direction units
units (if the are
itare used
used
is numerical
aand vector
 quantity) lists, etc.
magnitude Commented [G12]:
(if itand is adirection (if it is a vector quantity)
direction  magnitude vector and quantity)direction (if it is a vector quantity) Commented [G11]: lists,
lists,etc. etc.
MissingCommented
word and indentation
[G11]: Missing equivalen
of all word
the correct used Commented [
magnitude
 magnitude and direction (if(ifunits vector quantity) Commented Commented [G12]: [
magnitudeand anddirection (if itititisisisaaare avector quantity) Commented [U13]:[G11]: Incomplete. Better
Missing
lists, etc. wordin Commented
this way
Commented [U13]:
3 Key Physics Concepts  magnitude and direction (if it is a vector quantity) Commented Commented
Commented
[G12]: Better in [G11]:
[G11]:
Commented
this way Missing
Missing [G12]:word
wordBetter in this way
Commented [
Key Physics Concepts Key Physics Concepts Commented Commented
Commented [G14]:[G12]: [U13]:
Commented
I moved up,Incomplete.
Better space
in this Commented
[G11]:
was way too bigMissing[
Commented [U13]: Commented
Commented Incomplete. [G12]:
Commented
[G12]:Better Better [U13]:
inCommented
inthis
thiswayway
Incomplete. [G14]:
Physics Concepts Commented [
Newton’s KeyLaws
Key Physics Concepts Commented
Commented [G14]:
[U13]: Commented I moved up,
Incomplete. Commented
[G12]: spaceBetter
was to[i
Commented
Commented [U13]:
[U13]:
Commented Incomplete.
Incomplete.[G14]:
3.1 Key Physics Concepts Key Physics Concepts Commented [G14]: I moved up, space was too big Commented I moved up, space
Key Physics Concepts Key Physics Concepts [
3.1 Newton’s Key
KeyLaws Physics
Physics Concepts Concepts Commented [G14]: Commented
I moved up, Commented
[U13]:
space was too bi[
Incompl
3.1 Key Newton’s Laws Commented
Commented [G14]:
[G14]: I I moved
moved up,
up, space
space was
was too
too big
big
Newton's
Newton’s First LawLaw ofNewton's Newton’s Physics
Second Second Concepts
Law of Law ofNewton's
Motion Newton’s motion of Motion Newton’s Universal Gravitation Commented [G14]: I moved
3.1First Newton’s LawsNewton's Law Newton's SecondThird Law Law of ofThird Newton's Law Third Law of Newton's motion Law of universal Newton's Law Lawofofuniversal
3.1 MotionNewton’s
of motion Laws 3.1 Newton’s motion Laws First
3.1 Newton’s Laws Gravitation
Newton's Newton’s First Laws Law of motion 3.1 Newton's Newton’s Laws Second Law of Newton's Third Law of motion Newton's Law of universal
Gravitation
Newton's A body 3.1
3.1
First
3.1 Law
will Newton’s Newton's
Newton’s
remain Newton's in Laws
Laws First
When Second Law
a Law
resultant/net
Newton's Newton's ofFirst Second
Law
motionLaw of
Newton's Newton's Third one Law
Second body Newton's
of exertsmotion
Law of aThird
forceNewton'sLaw on aofsecond motion Newton's
Third Law Law
of body
motion of universal Newton's
the universe Law attracts universal
ofNewton's Law of
A body willof
Newton's motion
remain First in Law
its body
When motion
Newton's
Newton's will
a remain First
Second
resultant/net inforce
Law Law When forceof aWhen
Newton's resultant/net
acts Newton's
on Second When force Law
Third one of
Law When
body of motionone
Newton's
exerts body a exerts
Third
force onLaw aEach
a forceof
second motionGravitation
on
Newton's a in second
body, Law the of Each
universal
Each body
Newton's
body ininthe Law
the universe
of universal
universe universal attractsattracts every
of motion its state Newton's
Newton's of rest of motion
motion
First
First
or 3.1 Law
Law acts
ANewton’s
Newton's
Newton's
on of an motion Laws
motion
object, Second
Second the Law
Law
object ofof motion body, Newton's
Newton's the second Third
Third body Law
Law of
exerts of motion
motion a force of Gravitation
equal every Newton's
Newton'sother Gravitation
body Law
Law withofof universal
universal
a force that
Gravitation
of body will remainitsinstate
Amotion of
motion When of
motion a resultant/net
rest or acts force
on
motion an object, When the one
object body exerts body, athe force second on a body second exerts a Each
force
Gravitation body
of equal in the universe every other attracts
is body
Gravitation with a force that is
state
A body will motion of
ofof
remain rest
motion
motion
at constant or A
in Whenmotion
body Newton's
will willremain an motion
motion
resultant/net
accelerate
AFirst
object,in
body Law
When the
force
in
will Newton's
object
a
remain resultant/net
direction When inwill Second
Whenacceler-
one force
body
magnitudea Law exerts
resultant/net of
second
When
the a force Newton's
one
opposite
forcebody body exerts
second
adirection Third
exerts
When a a
onLaw
force
one force
the of
Each
body of
firstmotion
on equal
a body second
directly magnitude
Gravitation
Gravitation
in
a the
force Each
universe
proportional
on a in the
second Newton's
body
attracts
to the other
in the
product Law
body
universe of
body universal
with a
attracts force universe that direct-
isattracts
A its
body state will of restaor
remain in motion When A acts at
body a on
constant
will anthe
resultant/net object,
remain the
will
in force object
accelerate
When a body,
in
resultant/net
When the in the
one direction
body second
force
onbody
exerts magnitude
a Whenexerts
force in
one
on atheaforce
body opposite
second ofexerts
exertsequal direction
a force
Each every on
body other
athe second
in body
first
the universewith
directly aEach
Eachforce that in
proportional
body
attracts is the
in theto the
universe product attracts
at constant
its state of rest
velocityAAbody or
body velocity
unless will
will state
acts
itsremain
aremain of
un-
on motion
an
in
ofinof rest ate
object,
the When
When orforce
itsin state athe
the actsdirection
object
resultant/net
resultant/net
at an
of on an motion
acceleration or object,
of
body,force
force the acts the
force
the body.
onobject
secondWhen
When an body
object,one
one body,
opposite exerts
body
bodythe the direction
asecond
exerts
exerts
object force ofbody
force
aaforce body, on
equalonon exerts
the
the first
every
second
aasecond
second force
a body. other
body oftheirequal
body
Each
Each
exerts masseswith
body
body a every
ain
force inforce
and the
theof Gravitation
other that ly
universe
universe
inversely
equal body with
isproportional
attracts
attracts
every forceto
aother that
bodytheis product
with of theiris
motion at constant
rest velocity acts will
its on
aaccelerate
unless
state an of arest
rest or
inthe the thedirection
acts force onat
atmagnitude
anan
body, acceleration
object, the second the
object body opposite body,
exerts direction
theforce second onequal the body
offirst
exerts directly force
aother proportional
body equal
with of their
toforce the
every product
other
that is and
body inversely
with a a force
force that that is
motion less at constant
aits
non-zero its state
itsstate
non-zero stateof motion
of will
rest
ofrest
resul- orA at
orbody
accelerate
or constant
directly will
acts
acts
an inremain
on the
on
acceleration
proportional
motion ananwill
direction
atobject, accelerate
inobject,
object,
constant When
to thethe
directly
the magnitude
objectin
ofaobject
object the
resultant/net
propor-
will direction
inbody,
body,
accelerate the force
opposite
the
the inmagnitude
second
the
theinWhen
second direction
body
body
direction inbody.the
one on
exerts
exerts opposite
body
theaafirst
magnitude exerts
force
aforce direction
directly
of
in ofaofthe force
equal
equal on
opposite onthe
proportional aevery
every
every first
second other
other
direction directly
to the
body
body
on
ofEachproportional
product
square
the with
with body
masses
first aaof force
aforce
the to
in masses
the
directlythat
that
and the
universe
isis product
inversely
proportional attractsproportional
to the product to
motionvelocity at unless
constant a non-zero will of
motion the
accelerate force
at constant atin an
the acceleration
directly
directionwill proportional
accelerate body.
magnitude into thethe
in direction
the opposite magnitude
direction in
on thethe opposite
first of their
direction
directly masses
on
proportional the and
first to inversely
proportional
the directly
product to the
proportional square to of the the product
velocity unless motion
motion
resultant/net
tant/net a at
force velocity
of the
constant
constant
force
atacts on itsunless
state
force
it. force at
willof
will
tional aand rest
an acceleration
accelerate
accelerate
velocity inversely
to ofunless
orthe the force force
acts
inin the
the a andon at
body.
direction an
direction of acceleration
object,
inversely the magnitude
magnitude
force at body.ininthe the
acceleration body,opposite
opposite the second direction
body. body ononofthe exerts
thetheir first
first a force
masses
distance directly
directly of
and equalof their
inversely
proportional
proportional
between their masses
every totoother
centres.
the the
the and bodyinversely
product
product
of
square their with
masses
of the a force and
distance that
inversely isbetween their
non-zero unless resultant/net directly
velocity force proportional
force
unless an force
aacceleration to the
and
of the inversely
force
body. at an body. proportional
their masses to and the square
distance
inversely of the
between
their masses their and centres.
inversely
non-zeroactsvelocity velocity
velocityunless
it. unless non-zero
directly aa
amotion proportional at
ofofofthe constant
thetheforce
non-zero force directly
to the
at atat ananwill
mass proportional
accelerate
acceleration
acceleration of inthe the
body.
body. direction
proportional to the in the opposite proportional direction of
of to on the
their
oftheir the proportional
square
masses
masses ofdirectly
the
and
and inversely the
toproportionalofsquare of
to theto
thethe product
square of
𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 object
onresultant/net force acts proportionalonforce and to the
inversely massproportional of tothe to the mass of distance between theirproportional
centres.
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
non-zero non-zero
directly to the directly proportional proportional the square proportional
the to the of thethe
⃗ ⃗
𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭the ⃗⃗an
resultant/net velocity force unless force

it.aproportional and
of the inversely force at an acceleration body. distance of between
their masses their centres.
and inversely
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭 ⃗direction
resultant/net force
non-zero
non-zero force and inversely
directly
directly
object. proportional
proportional to to the
the distance between proportional
proportional their centres.
toto the
tothe square
square of
of the
ofthe
⃗𝑭𝑭 ⃗ ⃗
on resultant/net
proportional force
to the mass force of and A inversely B distance between their centres.
𝑭𝑭
𝟏𝟏 𝟐𝟐centres.
theobject. the object.
resultant/net force forceresultant/net and inversely force force and inversely A B distance between their distance
centres. between their centres.
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝟐𝟐
first 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝒎𝒎inversely
resultant/net acts on
proportional
force it.
non-zero force the and proportional
inversely to the
proportional mass of the distance between proportional
their centres.
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨acceleration
acts on it. resultant/net force force and inversely distance their

𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
toacts on it. proportional to of
𝑭𝑭 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝟏𝟏 𝒎𝒎square
𝟐𝟐
the object.
⃗to
⃗⃗⃗magnitude
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
⃗directly
⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
acts on it. proportional toA mass

𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
acts proportional
𝟏𝟏 𝟐𝟐 𝟐𝟐
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ ⃗ ⃗
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
the 𝑭𝑭
𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
force the object. force inversely centres.

⃗⃗ it. 𝑭𝑭 𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
⃗⃗acts
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
acts
acts ononit.it.it. the object. to totothe the mass
mass andof of A B
⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭 𝒓𝒓 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝒎𝒎
𝑭𝑭 = 𝟎𝟎 ⃗ ⃗
A the object. B
to 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨the
⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭 ⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭 ⃗ ⃗
𝟏𝟏
⃗ ⃗
A B
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭
𝟐𝟐
𝑭𝑭 = 𝟎𝟎 ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ 𝑭𝑭 𝒓𝒓 the 𝟐𝟐
the object.
𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝒎𝒎
the object.
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗
B
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎between𝒎𝒎𝟐𝟐 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 = centres.
dIFFERENT TyPES OF FORcES proportional A of B A

𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 to𝟏𝟏the𝟐𝟐 square of𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎
𝟏𝟏 𝟐𝟐
⃗mass
the
the object.
object.
⃗⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 ⃗⃗ ⃗𝑭𝑭 = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 of ⃗directly
⃗the mass 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝒎𝒎 𝒎𝒎𝟐𝟐
𝑭𝑭 𝟎𝟎 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝒓𝒓=between
𝒎𝒎
𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
=⃗resultant/net ⃗proportional of ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 ⃗⃗the mass ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 B =of−𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 ⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 = =
𝟐𝟐
𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎
𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
⃗⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝒓𝒓𝟐𝟐 their𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭
Force weight object. Frictional

𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = ⃗𝟎𝟎proportional
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 = −𝑭𝑭 𝒓𝒓 𝟐𝟐 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭distance = 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
B
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗ on
A
⃗⃗
NormaldIFFERENT TyPES FORcES
⃗ ⃗ ⃗ ⃗
𝟏𝟏 𝟐𝟐
𝑭𝑭 = 𝟎𝟎
Normal weight Frictional force

⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭 ⃗ ⃗ = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 ⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
DIFFERENT TYPES OF FORCES

⃗ ⃗ 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 FORcES
⃗⃗ 𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
TyPES OF FORcES
𝑭𝑭 = 𝟎𝟎 𝒓𝒓 𝑮𝑮𝒎𝒎 𝒎𝒎
Commented [U17]: P|se check/complete/ re-write to en

𝑭𝑭 = 𝟎𝟎 ⃗⃗OF ⃗⃗
dIFFERENT TyPES FORcES

⃗dIFFERENT
⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 ⃗to
⃗ the mass ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 = −𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭
Weight (𝑤𝑤 is the gravitational

⃗⃗ acts on 𝑭𝑭 = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂
the dIFFERENT This is force that opposes the of an object and which acts parallel to the
⃗⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
dIFFERENT TyPES OF FORcES Commented [U17]:

𝟐𝟐
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑭𝑭 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏=
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏=⃗𝟎𝟎 ⃗𝟎𝟎 𝑭𝑭 it. = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 ⃗⃗ 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
orNormal OFForce weight Frictional force
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
⃗𝑭𝑭 = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 ⃗⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 =
ForcedIFFERENT TyPES Force or the
dIFFERENT
FORcES TyPES Weight (𝑤𝑤
FORcES opposes
⃗B⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
legibilityto–the see example below in this block and elsewhere. (T

⃗TyPES
⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 the ⃗⃗ ⃗A
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗A ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗force
== 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 −𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗⃗⃗B 𝑭𝑭 = −𝑭𝑭
Normal Force weight Frictional force

𝑭𝑭 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
Normal Force dIFFERENT

dIFFERENT weight TyPES
TyPES OF OF OFFORcES FORcES Frictional force Commented [U17]: P|se legibility – see example
check/complete/ re-
⃗ ⃗ 𝒓𝒓
component of a surface.
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏OF = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗Force ⃗ ⃗
force that the Earth exerts on

⃗⃗⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 = −𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗⃗⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
Normal Force Weight Normal Force weight Frictional force

⃗ ⃗
Frictional
⃗ ⃗
force
𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭 = = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂
=𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂 ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ 𝑭𝑭 = −𝑭𝑭
Force or the Weight (𝑤𝑤 is the gravitational This is force that opposes the motion of an object and which acts parallel to the
𝑭𝑭 = −𝑭𝑭
𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
component Normal
weight of a
Force force that
weight the Earth
Frictional exerts force on surface. Frictional force author cannot always determine
Commented what is being said and re-wri
check/compl
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 ⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩
⃗⃗⃗motion
Commented
OF𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
P|se check/complete/ re-write
author to ensure
cannot always
⃗⃗𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨=
𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨=−𝑭𝑭 −𝑭𝑭
Force
Forceor dIFFERENT
the TyPES Weight OF FORcES
(𝑤𝑤 is gravitational This force that opposes motion object which acts parallel to the [U17]:legibility – see example [U17]: below in P|se
this block
Commented and els d[
⃗⃗⃗) ⃗ ⃗
Normal
theNormal Force Weight (𝑤𝑤 is
weight the gravitational This theis force Frictional
that opposes force isthe motion of an object theand which acts parallel andto the
NormalForce weight Frictional force s
⃗⃗
f ) is the force that opposes of the tendency of motion of a

𝑭𝑭 = 𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂
Force orforce which a the object of mass m. Weight Static (𝑤𝑤 frictional
is the force
gravitational ( not done as part of editing.)
𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
component Force or the surface. This is force that opposes an the motion of an object and which acts parallel Commented to the [U17]: P|se Commented
check/complete/ re-writ [
⃗⃗⃗) is the gravitational
force that the Earth exerts on  legibility – see example below in this block
⃗⃗that ⃗⃗𝑩𝑩𝑩𝑩 the motion of an object and which acts parallel
Force or the compo- of a force which

Force ora the the object
Weight of mass
(𝑤𝑤 is m.
the
This gravitational
is force Static
that This frictional
opposes is force force
the that motion (
opposes f s ) is ofthe the
an forcemotion
object that ofopposes
and an object
which the and
acts tendency legibility
which
parallel of–
acts motion
see
to example
parallel
the of
surface. a
below
to in
the
author cannot this block
always and elsewhere.
not
determine donewhat (The
as part
is beingof editi
This is force𝑭𝑭 = −𝑭𝑭
component of Force
Force a or or the
component
the Normal of a
Weight Weight
Force
Weight
Weight ( (𝑤𝑤
(𝑤𝑤
(𝑤𝑤 force is is)is is
the the
weight
that
the the gravitational
the gravitational
surface.
gravitational
gravitational Earth exerts This
This on is is force
surface.
force thatthat opposes
Frictional
opposes thethe
force motion
motion of of anan object
object andand which
which acts
acts parallel
parallel toto the
the Commented
Commented [U17]:
[U17]: P|se
P|se check/complete/
check/complete/ legibility – seesaid
re-write
re-write ext
Force or
exerts the force that the Earth exerts on This
stationary is force
object that
relative opposes to a surface. the motion of an object and which acts parallel to the legibility – see
authorexample belowalways this legibility
block and
determine what seeisexb
⃗⃗⃗)
surfaceforce whichon ana surface component

theexerts object on ofof an a
mass m. force that the
Static Earth exerts
frictional on
force
stationary ( fs) isobject the force relative thatto opposes
a surface. the tendency of motion of aauthor cannot always legibility determine
– see aswhat being
partcannot
example said
editing.)
below in
inand
this re-writing
author
block and
–iselsewh
cannot
elsewhe al
component of a component of a force that the Earth exerts on surface. legibility not–donesee example Commented
isofbelow in this [U17]:
block and elsewher
P|se ch
nent of a force which force that the Earth exerts on surface.
⃗⃗⃗)
force which
Force or the the object Weight of (𝑤𝑤
mass is the gravitational  force f )
opposes is the force motion that opposes an object the tendency
and which acts of motionparallel of a cannot al
⃗⃗⃗)
force which component

component the
of object offorce mass
force that
that m. the
the Earth
Earth exerts
Static
exerts frictional
on surface.
onsurface. force Static frictional
) This
is theis force forcethat (
thatopposes motion not done as part author
editing.) cannotnot always
done as determine whatauthor
of editing.) is being said an
⃗⃗⃗)
object a with surface which ofitaa

exerts on -an force
acceleration
force that the
which Earth
due a to exerts the on m.object of
thestationary mass ( m. fsobject 
relative a frictional
surface.
ofofthe a opposes the tendency toCommented
theofmotion
author
author [G18]:
of
cannot
cannot a
always
always like
partthis
determine
determine
legibility what
–what isnot
isbeing
see example done
being said
said part
as and
below and
inr
⃗⃗⃗) ⃗⃗⃗)
object with which acceleration Commented [G18]:

ffs)) is
force which the object ofdue mass m. fStatic
Static s is force that the tendency motion
force which the object mass m. Static frictional force  (frictional to the force
frictional
force that (forcefopposes
) is((the the thetendency
force opposes motionthe tendency ofof
ofmotion not done as ofpart of
aa Better editing.)
station- not done as part
a surface exerts surface an exerts
component on an
of stationary surface. object relative to a surface. s
⃗⃗⃗)
aforce that the Earth exerts toon Static
⃗⃗⃗)

⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 = 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗

surface exerts on an stationary object relative surface. )sis)isis the
the force
force that
that opposes
opposes the
the tendency
tendency of motion ofofofaaa
force which
which aon the
the object
object ofof mass
ofmass m.m. Static
Static frictional
frictional force
aforce done as part of editing.)
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
is inforce
contact,
object and
with aa which gravity.
it object of mass
exerts m. on an Kinetic frictional toforce (f k()(fis the
sfs)stationary force that
object opposesrelative theto amotion
surface. of a moving object not
Commented
notdone as
Commented part of editing.)
author
[G18]: cannot always determine
⃗⃗⃗
- acceleration due to
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 = 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈
 [G15]: Better Better like this

like this
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 of
is in contact,
surface and
exerts on gravity.
an Kinetic stationaryfrictional object force (f ) is the force that opposes the motion of a moving object
𝒔𝒔force
surface exerts on an stationary object relative to a surface. relative a surface. Commented

⃗⃗⃗)
with which object with

force
is which the object due ary object
frictional relative to a
( fs) is the opposes a [G18]: as part Betterof editing.)
like[G15]:
this
𝒔𝒔 that
of𝒔𝒔 motion
⃗⃗⃗ a 𝒇𝒇s𝒔𝒔 = the 𝝁𝝁the 𝑵𝑵tendency
Commented
motion of[G18]:
𝒈𝒈
objectobject
with which
surface
thatsurfaceis perpendicular exerts
it exerts on anan
acceleration itadue to close relative stationary
to stationary m.to a surface. object
object relative
relative to surface. Better Commented
like this not done Commented [
⃗⃗⃗
with which
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 it=
 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈

of -mass acceleration  toStatic
is in contact, and motion object

𝒇𝒇force =that 𝝁𝝁of 𝑵𝑵opposes
frictional force
⃗⃗⃗
𝒈𝒈
object with which that objectperpendicular

-gravity.
acceleration with which acceleration todue
due the relative to
k)a surface. Commented Commented
Commented [U16]:[G18]: [G15]:
P|se Better
check/complete/
Better likelike Commented
this this
re-write. [
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 =- 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗
𝒔𝒔surface. k𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒔𝒔 to
in surface and exerts on an object relative is aforce that opposes the motion object
⃗⃗⃗a
Kinetic force
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 =surface
𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈
gravity.  Commented [U16]:

k )stationary
is in contact, and to isfrictional
the force that opposes the motion of a moving
in contact, object
object and with
with which
which
isthat is Kinetic frictional force (f Commented
Commented [G18]:
[G18]:
⃗⃗⃗
gravity. acceleration
acceleration due
due dueto to Commented Better like
[G15]: this
⃗⃗⃗⃗
 Better like this Better like this

2
k
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 the tendency of
itititsurface --is of in
acceleration contact,
the Earth. and due to gravity. ) is the force that opposes the motion of a moving object
⃗⃗⃗ 𝒇𝒇 = 𝝁𝝁 𝑵𝑵
Kinetic (ffrictional force (f Commented

𝒈𝒈
to the surface.
that is perpendicular close gravity. relative to a surface. like this Commented [
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 = 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗
⃗⃗⃗⃗
2 Kinetic to𝒔𝒔aa(fsurface.
in and the force the moving Betterobject
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 that𝒔𝒔opposes
contact, and the surface theof Earth.

Kinetic frictional force  (f k ) is the
Kinetic force
frictional forceopposes isthe motion of object
⃗⃗⃗
𝒈𝒈 𝒇𝒇 force = 𝝁𝝁that 𝒔𝒔 𝑵𝑵the
that is perpendicular
object towith which it relative  Kinetic to a surface. Commented
Commented [U19]: [U16]:
[G15]: Commented
Formatting: P|se
pse Commented
check/complete/
check [G18]:ad hoc use re-
of
𝒇𝒇 =isforce
𝝁𝝁the
𝒔𝒔 𝑵𝑵 force
- acceleration due to ) is (fthe force opposes the motionmotionofCommentedofa[G15]:

amoving object rela-
Better like this
⃗⃗⃗ it- on to⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗the
Better [lii
-𝒘𝒘
⃗⃗⃗⃗acceleration
𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈

𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒘𝒘 == 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈
close  to the k frictional

k force (f
perpendicular contact, and ) ) isis the

the force
force that
that thatopposes opposes the
the motion
motion ofof a a moving
moving
movingobject object
⃗⃗⃗which
𝒔𝒔 object
isisisininincontact, and relative to athe surface.

𝒈𝒈 ≈ 𝟗𝟗,is 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
Kinetic frictional force (f

𝒇𝒇 =
of 𝝁𝝁 𝑵𝑵
Kinetic frictional force (f

𝒔𝒔the
gravity.
⃗⃗⃗
gravity. close to the

𝒈𝒈
that isperpendicular to that is perpendicular You need to know

close to thatthe a frictional relative force: a Commented
Commented [G15]:
Commented
[G15]:Better Better Commented
[U16]:
like
likethisthis
P|se check/compl [U19]:
2
surface of
itit𝒈𝒈
⃗⃗⃗to≈ 𝟗𝟗, 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠 𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝝁𝝁a𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔moving
𝑵𝑵of a moving
[U16]:
𝒈𝒈 𝒇𝒇𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒔𝒔 𝑵𝑵
𝒔𝒔 𝒔𝒔
the surface.
⃗⃗⃗-object
𝒔𝒔 𝒔𝒔
You need to to know that force:

𝒈𝒈
that perpendicular P|se check/complete/ re-write.

𝒌𝒌 𝒌𝒌
that to is perpendicular close the relative close surface. the relative to a surface.
surface. in text and standardise usage throughout. Commented [
⃗⃗⃗𝒘𝒘
⃗⃗⃗⃗𝟖𝟖-= 𝒎𝒎𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗ close
)𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
contact, and toKinetic frictional force the that opposes a moving object
2 to gravity.
⃗⃗⃗ k )𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 to= = 𝝁𝝁
=𝝁𝝁surface.
𝝁𝝁𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵
gravity.
⃗⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝒈𝒈
of the Earth.
⃗⃗⃗ contact,
𝒌𝒌 that
𝒇𝒇 = 𝝁𝝁 𝑵𝑵
that
that the surface.
perpendicular
isisperpendicular relative to surface. tive to a surface. Commented [U19]: in text and
Commentedstandardise
2gravity.
toaaa surface.
to surface to the Commented [U16]: Commented Formatting: [G15]: pse check ad
is inof the Earth. close to tothe
P|se check/complete/ re-writ
𝑵𝑵
surface. Better [li

2
⃗⃗⃗surface.
is𝒈𝒈 ≈ contact,
𝟗𝟗, 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
to thesurface. surface of the Earth.

𝒔𝒔 𝒔𝒔
to surface. You need to know that a frictional force:

= 𝝁𝝁𝒌𝒌that
𝑵𝑵a opposes
close surface Commented

Commented [U16]:
[U16]:
𝑵𝑵
surface
to the Earth. to thesurface the Earth. Commented [U19]: Commented P|se check/complete/
[U19]:
check/complete/ Formatting: re-write
re-write.
pse c
⃗⃗⃗ 𝒈𝒈 ⃗⃗⃗ k𝒇𝒇 = 𝒇𝒇𝝁𝝁 𝑵𝑵
pse check ad use of italics

⃗⃗⃗
𝒈𝒈 ≈ 𝟗𝟗, 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
(fk )𝒌𝒌is
that close ofto the You need relative to know a that surface. a frictional force: inFormatting:
text and standardise P|seusage hocthroughout.
Commented [
⃗⃗⃗
𝒈𝒈 ≈ 𝟗𝟗, 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
You need to know that a frictional force:

22 close
surface ofsurface.
the Earth.
⃗⃗⃗
surface theof ofthe theEarth.

2the Earth. 𝒈𝒈 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
the surface.
⃗⃗⃗
tototothe thesurface.
𝒇𝒇 a=kfrictional 𝝁𝝁𝒌𝒌 𝑵𝑵
to You need to that a frictional force: Commented [U19]: Commented Commented
[U16]: [
the 𝑵𝑵
in text and Formatting:

standardise pse
usage check ad
P|se
throughout. hoc
ch
𝒌𝒌 𝒌𝒌
⃗⃗⃗ ≈
of the Earth.
𝒈𝒈 ≈ 𝟗𝟗,𝟗𝟗,relative
𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠 2 to
6in text and standardise usage throughout.

⃗⃗⃗ ≈ 𝟗𝟗, is𝟖𝟖surface
𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
need that You

frictional needforce: to know that a frictional
⃗⃗⃗
Commented
Commented [U19]:
[U19]: text and stand
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 force
= 𝝁𝝁𝒌𝒌 𝑵𝑵
Formatting:pse
6 Formatting: pseincheck adadhochocusu
⃗⃗⃗ 𝑵𝑵
2
𝒇𝒇 = 𝝁𝝁 𝑵𝑵
surface of the Earth.

𝑵𝑵 𝒈𝒈⃗⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
⃗⃗⃗𝒈𝒈 ≈≈ 𝟗𝟗,
𝟗𝟗, 𝟖𝟖𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
You need know that frictional force:

⃗⃗⃗
You Youneed to
totoknow knowthat aaafrictional
𝒇𝒇 = 𝝁𝝁
the𝑵𝑵motion of Commented
You need to know that aforce:

frictional in text and standardise usage throughout. in check
text and stand
⃗⃗⃗ 𝑵𝑵 𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌𝒌𝒌 = 𝝁𝝁𝒌𝒌𝒌𝒌 𝑵𝑵
6 in text and standardise

in text and standardise usage usage
Commented throughout.
throughout. [U19]: Formatt
⃗⃗⃗
𝒈𝒈 ≈⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝟗𝟗, 𝟖𝟖 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
You need to know that a frictional force:

surface.⃗⃗⃗ 𝑵𝑵⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵 is perpendicular 𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇know
𝒌𝒌𝒌𝒌=
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌==𝝁𝝁 𝝁𝝁𝒌𝒌𝝁𝝁 𝒌𝒌𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵
𝒌𝒌𝑵𝑵
equation 6 6 in text
to the surface. ⃗⃗⃗ force: 𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 = 𝝁𝝁force: 𝒌𝒌 𝑵𝑵
UseUse thisthis equationtotocalculate to the normal

𝑵𝑵
calculate the is • proportional 6 66 and standardise usage thr

is proportional to the force normal force 66
acceleration the acceleration of anyofother any other planet:  is independent of the area of contact
6
planet:  is • independent
is independent of the velocity of the area of motion of contact Commented [U20]: Formatting: pse insert bull
Use this equation to calculate  is proportional to the normal force lists.
NOTE:
o the If a acceleration
force• is ( Findependent of any other
) applied to aof body the parallel is independent
velocity to of themotion surface of thedoes areanot of contact
cause the object to Commented [U21]: Formatting: pse standardis
planet:  is independent of the velocity of motion with all equivalent items, including in tables and Com ot
𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮
move, F is equal in magnitude to the static frictional force. lists.

𝒈𝒈 = 𝟐𝟐
Use this equation to NOTE:

calculate NOTE: to the normal force
𝒓𝒓
) just before the object starts to move

the acceleration other of the ( F area ) applied of contact to a body parallel to the surface does not cause the object to Com
Commented [U22]: Pse check/complete.
o If a force
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
across of anythe
with
𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮  is proportional
planet: o surface. If a force  is independent ( F ) applied move, of F to is

the aequal bodyinparallel
velocity magnitude
of motion to the to the surface
static does not
frictional cause the
force. object to Commented [U20]:
), a resultant force accelerates the movement of
o The static𝒈𝒈frictional = 𝟐𝟐 force is a maximum (𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
lists.
𝒓𝒓  is independent
move, NOTE: F is equal o The in staticmagnitude frictional toforce the static is a maximum ) just before the object starts to move
o If the applied force exceeds (𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
Commented [U21]: Com
o If a force ( F across ) applied thetosurface. a body parallel to the surface does not cause the object to
𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮 frictional(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠force.
The move,
static F is
frictional
o equal If thein applied
force magnitude is force
a maximumto exceeds
the static ( ),) ajust resultant
force.
before force
the accelerates
object starts thetomovementmove ofwith all equivalent items
𝒈𝒈 =the𝟐𝟐object.
3.2 Momentum and Impulse o 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

𝒓𝒓
across
o The the static frictional
surface. the object.
(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠frictional
Physical quantities Newton's
Impulse- across the surface. Commented [U22]:
force is a maximum (𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) just before the object starts to move
momentum and 3.2 Momentum second and Impulse law in If the applied force exceeds resultant force accelerates the movement of
momentum If applied force Law exceeds of conservation ( lineal momentum
resultant force accelerates the movement of the
7
o o the
change in Impulse Physical quantities terms of object.
theorem object. theNewton's
(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ),),aaof
momentum momentum Impulse-
momentum and second law in
Momentum is the 3.2 Momentum
The impulse and of Impulse
a The resultant/ An isolated momentum (closed) system in Law physics of conservationis a system of lineal momentum
change in Impulse terms
product of an object Physical force quantitiesis the net force acting on which theorem
the resultant/net external force is zero.
momentum Newton's
Impulse-
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
mass and its product of the

𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗of
momentum and
Momentum is the
on an object is second
The impulse law in OR An isolated (closed) system in physics is a system
⃗
⃗⃗
∆𝒑𝒑
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 momentum
= 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣⃗
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛of ∆𝑡𝑡a The resultant/ ⃗
𝐹𝐹 = ⃗⃗
0 = ⃗⃗
𝟎𝟎
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
the acceleration planet:
of any other  is independent  is of independent
the area of the velocity of motion
contact Commented [U20]: Formatting: pse inse
the acceleration planet:of other  is independent  isof independent
theofarea of of contactthe velocity of motion lists. Commented [U20]: Formattin
 is independent NOTE: of the velocity of motion Commented [U20]: Formatting: pse insert bullet points with
NOTE: Commented [U20]:
lists.Formatting: pse insert bullet p
planet:planet:  is independent of the velocity of motion
o If a force ( F ) applied to a body parallel to the surface does not cause the object lists. to lists. Commented [U21]: Formatting: pse stan
NOTE: If a force ( F ) applied to a body parallel to the surface does not cause the object to Commented [U21]:
with all equivalent items, includingFormattin
in tables
any𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮
o
F )move,
applied F to is equal
a body magnitude
inparallel to the the static
to surface does frictional not cause force.the object to Commented [U21]: Formatting: allpse standardise
equivalent spacing
lineincluding
𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮
Commented [U21]: withFormatting: pseitems,

standardise lin
𝒈𝒈 = 𝟐𝟐
o If aoforce If a( force ( F ) move,applied F to is aequal bodyinparallel magnitude to thetosurface the static does frictional
not cause force. the object to with all equivalent items, including in tables and other inserts.
= 𝟐𝟐
𝒓𝒓 𝒈𝒈NOTE:
Theinstatic magnitude frictional to force

the is a maximum
static frictional force. ) just before the object starts to move with all equivalent items, including in tables and other i
𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮 𝑮𝑮𝑮𝑮
F isoequal
𝒓𝒓
move, move, F isoequal Theinstatic magnitude frictional to force
the is
static a maximum
frictional (𝑓𝑓
force. ) just before the object starts to move
𝒈𝒈 = 𝟐𝟐𝒈𝒈 =
Commented [U22]: Pse check/complete.

the surface.
𝒓𝒓
acrossforce maximum just before the object starts to move Commented [U22]: Pse check
8
(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝒓𝒓𝟐𝟐
o Theo static Thefrictional
static frictional across athe
isforce surface.
is a maximum ) (𝑓𝑓 ) just before the object starts to move
𝑠𝑠
resultant force accelerates the movement of Commented [U22]: Pse check/complete.

3.2 Momentum and Impulse theosurface. Commented [U22]: Pse check/complete.

acrossacross If the applied force exceeds (𝑓𝑓 ), a resultant force accelerates the movement of
(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
theosurface.
o If the the
force object.
exceeds resultant force accelerates the movement of
If the applied force exceeds (𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ),𝑠𝑠 a𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
If the applied
o applied force
the object. exceeds ), a resultant force accelerates the movement of
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑠𝑠
the object.
),(𝑓𝑓a𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
the object.
(𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠
Physical quantities 3.2 Momentum and Impulse

3.2 Momentum and Impulse
3.2 Momentum Physical and quantities
Impulse Newton’s
Newton'ssecond
3.2 Momentum Physical and Impulse quantities Newton's Impulse-momentum
Impulse-
Physical
Momentum quantities
Physical momentum
and quantities
change and Newton's law in terms
second law in of Impulse- Law of conservation of lineal momentum
momentum and
Impulse Newton's second
Impulse- law in theorem
momentum Law of conservation of lineal momentum
momentum
in momentum andchange in Impulse second terms
momentum of Impulse- momentum Law of conservation of lineal momentum
momentum change in
and Impulse second
law in law interms of
momentum theoremLaw of conservation of lineal momentum
change in momentumImpulse terms of momentum momentum theorem Law of conservation of lineal momentum
change in momentum Impulse terms of momentum
theorem
momentum momentum Momentum is the The impulse momentum momentum An isolated (closed) system in physics is a system
Momentum is theMomentum The is the impulseThe of impulse The The resultant/
of aresultant/ net AnAn isolated isolated (closed) (closed) system systemin physics is a system
in physics is a system on
Momentum is product
the ofThe an object impulse force
of a isThe theresultant/ An isolated on
(closed) the resultant/net in physics external
is a system force is zero.
product Momentum
of an object isproduct
the ofaTheanforceobject
impulse is the force
of a isThe theresultant/
force net force
acting on an An onsystem
(closed) which
which the
system resultant/net
in physics
resultant/net external
isexternal force
a system is zero.
force is zero.
and its product on an object is
of a The resultant/theorem 𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = ∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗
product of anmass object force is net offorce

the acting which the resultant/net
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
product of anmass object force

itsthe is the product net offorce
the acting an is the zero.is zero.
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗ which
mass its velocity. andproduct of the object is OR external

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
velocity. force acting on equal to equal

the rate
∆𝒑𝒑⃗ ⃗
mass and andits product of the object is

net force 𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰
acting = ∆𝒑𝒑
acting⃗𝐹𝐹 ⃗⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣 ⃗ isolated
OR
on𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
mass and itsvelocity. product of the force

on anacting on an on
object equal
is to the rate OR
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ⃗
∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗
𝐹𝐹 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣 ⃗
Momentum is a vector force acting

⃗⃗ OR external ⃗⃗ ∆𝒑𝒑⃗⃗force isforce
velocity. force acting an object

on onand
equal anto thethe of rate
rate change
⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛object ⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = resultant/net
0 𝟎𝟎
∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗
on 𝐹𝐹 ∆𝑡𝑡to 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣
𝐹𝐹
Momentum is a vector Momentum is a vector

⃗⃗ =
an object of change of
∆𝒕𝒕
velocity. force acting on equal andto the rate
⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
⃗
∆𝒑𝒑⃗
𝐹𝐹= ∆𝑡𝑡 ⃗=∆𝑡𝑡𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
⃗ ∆𝑡𝑡 on which 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =∆𝒕𝒕0 = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗
quantity. object and

the timethe time
the of momentum
momentum
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛change
Momentum is a vector
⃗ ⃗⃗ ⃗⃗
an object of change of
⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 𝐹𝐹 = 0 = 𝟎𝟎
Momentum is quantity.
a vector an objectand andthe time of thechange
∆𝒕𝒕
quantity.
𝐹𝐹of ∆𝑡𝑡
of 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣
⃗𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹⃗ = ∆𝒕𝒕0
⃗𝑓𝑓 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛⃗𝑖𝑖
⃗⃗ OR =∑ 𝟎𝟎
⃗⃗ 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔/𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓/𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
quantity. the force acts acts on

momentum on the the theobject
objectin in thethe
∑ 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔/𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓/𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
quantity.
of momentum 𝑓𝑓of 𝑖𝑖
the time the force acts
momentum onofthe ofthe object in the Then
= 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝑓𝑓of −of 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣
when When
= 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 ⃗⃗𝑖𝑖 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗
∑ when 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
SI acts on
] object. object. the object in direction
direction of the when Then
∑ 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔/𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓/𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
∑𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔/𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓/𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗
SI units [𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘force acts ] the the object the in direction

the of the of the
⃗ ⃗
Then
𝒑𝒑
⃗⃗ = the 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗 ⃗⃗ time when ∑ 𝑭𝑭𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗
Impulse is a
−1
Change ] object. direction of resultant/net

the Then Then
𝒑𝒑
⃗⃗ =the 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗 ⃗⃗force ⃗
is aresultant/net force.
−1theonobject.
resultant/net
∑
SI unitsSI[𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 Change momentum Impulsedirection of the
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = ⃗ ⃗𝟎𝟎
⃗ ⃗⃗
∑ 𝑭𝑭 𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = 𝟎𝟎
object. is a vector
∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠the
vector quantity. force.

𝒑𝒑
⃗⃗ = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
is a
−1 in momentum
Change in momentum resultant/net

⃗𝒑𝒑
⃗⃗⃗ = units⃗⃗[𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘force
𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗 ∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 ⃗⃗
Change in momentum is a vector quantity. resultant/net force.

∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 ⃗⃗
∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 ∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0
quantity. force.
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
units [𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 ] in Impulse
𝑓𝑓
⃗⃗ ⃗⃗
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓 − 𝑝𝑝⃗Impulse ∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗ = 0
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑝𝑝⃗ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇= 0 𝑝𝑝
⃗ − ⃗⃗ 𝑝𝑝
⃗ = 0 ⃗⃗
SI
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓 − 𝑝𝑝Impulse ⃗𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0
SI units [𝑁𝑁
⃗⃗ ⃗⃗
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑓𝑓 − ⃗= ⃗ −vector 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗ quantity. ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ⃗𝑭𝑭force.
⃗∆𝒕𝒕 ∆𝒑𝒑 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 =−0 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ∆𝒑𝒑⃗⃗ ⃗⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
units
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑝𝑝⃗∆𝑝𝑝⃗ =𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓∆𝑝𝑝− 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣
∆𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 −vector 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 quantity.𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗∆𝒕𝒕 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = ⃗⃗
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ∆𝒑𝒑⃗⃗ 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 =
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣∆𝑝𝑝 𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝑓𝑓 −𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = ⃗𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ⃗
∆𝒑𝒑⃗ 𝑭𝑭∆𝒕𝒕 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=+𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
of
⃗∆𝒕𝒕units⃗⃗ [𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠]
states: The
∆𝑝𝑝
⃗⃗𝑓𝑓 =
− 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 ⃗⃗𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 =− 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 ⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 ) 𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 = 𝑭𝑭 ∆𝒕𝒕 ⃗⃗ ∙ 𝑠𝑠] ∆𝒕𝒕 𝑝𝑝⃗ + 𝑝𝑝
⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
∆𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓⃗ = 𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 − 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 )
of states: The
𝑭𝑭𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗ =
𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣 𝒎𝒎∆𝒗𝒗 ⃗⃗ SI[𝑁𝑁units ∆𝒕𝒕
] of an isolated (closed)
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖⃗ =+𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + = 𝑚𝑚𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖++𝑝𝑝⃗𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
The law of conservation

total linearofmomentum momentum states:
∙ 𝑠𝑠] [𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠]
The
∆𝑝𝑝⃗⃗𝑓𝑓=−𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓⃗) −∆𝒑𝒑 𝑣𝑣
⃗⃗⃗)= SI
∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗ = 𝒎𝒎∆𝒗𝒗 ⃗⃗ ∆𝒕𝒕 𝑚𝑚 𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣
⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
The law of conservation states:

𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
SI unitsSIofunits of [𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ] total linearofmomentum momentum of an isolated
The (closed)
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
⃗⃗ 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣The
⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 + 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖conservation
= 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑚𝑚
system remains (is conserved).

∆𝒑𝒑
⃗⃗ = 𝒎𝒎∆𝒗𝒗 SI⃗⃗units of ∆𝒑𝒑
total linear momentum of an isolated

constant(closed)
𝑚𝑚law
𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣
𝑚𝑚⃗The
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 +law 𝑚𝑚 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐴𝐴𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑣𝑣⃗conservation
= 𝑚𝑚 𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣
⃗of𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗momentum
∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗ = 𝒎𝒎∆𝒗𝒗 SI⃗⃗−1 units of ∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑚𝑚of 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣
⃗momentum
total linear system

momentum remains of an isolated constant(closed) (is conserved).
⃗⃗[𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
∆𝒑𝒑 ∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
system remains constant

∆𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗ ∙ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
system remains constant conserved).

[𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑚𝑚[𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
is the total momentum before collision

∙ 𝑚𝑚
] ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 ]
is the total momentum

∑ ⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃
𝒑𝒑 = 𝒑𝒑 ∑ ⃗(is
⃗𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
the total The of conservation

collision ofbefore
momentumcollisionstates: The total
∑ 𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 =conserved).
∑ 𝒑𝒑 ⃗(is
⃗𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
∑ is is themomentum total momentum before before collision

𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 ∑𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
∑ 𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 ∑∑ ⃗⃗𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
𝒑𝒑
linear momentum of an isolated (closed) 7 system

∑ 𝒑𝒑 ⃗⃗= 𝑝𝑝⃗=before∑ ⃗
𝒑𝒑⃗ 𝑝𝑝⃗ beforelaw
7
∑ 𝑝𝑝⃗ before
remains constant (is conserved). 7

𝑝𝑝⃗ before
∑ before is the total momentum before collision

∑ after is the total momentum after collision
3.3 Vertical Projectile Motion
3.3 3.3Vertical Projectile
Vertical 3.3 Motion
3.3
Vertical
Projectile Vertical
MotionProjectile
Projectile
3.3 Motion Motion
Vertical Projectile Motion VERTICAL PROJECTILE MOTION
Vertical
Vertical
3.3 Projectile 3.3
3.3
Projectile
Vertical
3.3VERTIcaL Motion
Motion
Projectile
VerticalPROjEcTILE Motion
Projectile Motion mOTION
Projectile VERTIcaL VERTIcaL
PROjEcTILE VERTIcaL PROjEcTILE
mOTION PROjEcTILE
VERTIcaL mOTION
Equations mOTION
PROjEcTILE
of motion mOTION
Projectile
Projectile Projectile Projectile Equations Equations of motion
of Equations
motion Equations of motion of motion Equations of motion
Projectile is an object upon Position Projectile VERTIcaL
VERTIcaL
Displacement PROjEcTILE
VERTIcaL
PROjEcTILE VERTIcaL
PROjEcTILE mOTION
mOTION PROjEcTILE
Velocity mOTION mOTION Acceleration
Projectile
Projectileis isan Position
an
Projectile Position
Projectile andisplacement
Position Position
displacement displacement Velocity
displacement Velocity acceleration
Velocity acceleration acceleration Commented [U23]: [U23]: Commented
Formatting: pseComment
Formatting: [U23]
ensure
pse all
ens
Projectile
Projectile
is anisProjectile
Projectile Projectile is an Position Velocity displacement
Equations
Equations of
Equations
of motion
motion Equations
of motion Velocity
of motion
acceleration acceleration Commented
Magnitude constant: Magnitude constant: equivalent,
appearappear including
equivalent, capital
including letters
appear
appearcapital or not.
equivalent, equi
lettersincl
o
Magnitude constant:Magnitude Magnitudeconstant: constant:
Magnitude constant:
objectobject uponupon which object
which object
Projectile
Projectile upon is
Projectile which
is upon an
an which
is an
Position
Position
Projectile
object upon displacement displacement Velocity Velocity acceleration acceleration Commented
Commented [U23]: Comm
[U23]
force of gravity. appear equivalent,appear
appear equivalent, inclincl
𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖 Position 𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑖 2 𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
Magnitude
Magnitude constant:
constant: Magnitude
constant: constant:
which the only force acting is the 𝑦𝑦⃗𝑓𝑓 =𝑦𝑦⃗𝑦𝑦𝑓𝑓⃗𝑖𝑖 =+ 𝑦𝑦∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ ⃗+ ∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ 𝑦𝑦
⃗ = 𝑦𝑦
⃗ 𝑦𝑦
⃗+ =∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗𝑦𝑦
⃗ 1
+ ∆𝑦𝑦⃗ 1 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑣𝑣1
𝑣𝑣 = + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
𝑣𝑣 + 1 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣+ =
𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡𝑣𝑣 + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
the only
the onlyforceforceacting acting
object only upon force acting
force
which acting
𝑖𝑖 1
object upon object which upon object

2 𝑦𝑦 ⃗𝑓𝑓 = 2 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑓𝑓 ∆𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓acceleration
= 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡acceleration
Displacement,
Displacement, the only force
Displacement, Displacement,
𝑓𝑓 ∆𝑦𝑦 Position
= 𝑣𝑣which
is𝑖𝑖∆𝑦𝑦 𝑖𝑖 ∆𝑡𝑡
=an𝑣𝑣+ 𝑖𝑖 ∆𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
+displacement ∆𝑦𝑦
𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 = ⃗𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖∆𝑦𝑦 ∆𝑡𝑡 =+⃗ 𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
∆𝑡𝑡 displacement
+𝑖𝑖2 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
which Displacement,
2 2 2 2 ∆𝑦𝑦Velocity
= 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 ∆𝑡𝑡 + Velocity 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 2
which the
2 2𝑓𝑓
which is change
the which
change which
is the is
change change
𝑖𝑖 +
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
⃗⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = = 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
⃗⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ++ ∆𝑦𝑦∆𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦⃗⃗𝑓𝑓⃗ = 𝑦𝑦⃗𝑖𝑖 + ∆𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦⃗𝑓𝑓⃗ = 𝑦𝑦⃗𝑖𝑖 + ∆𝑦𝑦⃗2 11 2 2 22 2 1 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2= = 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖1 +2 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
𝑣𝑣 2 = 𝑣𝑣2𝑖𝑖 + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 =−2 𝑣𝑣 + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 Magnitude
is theisforce
the is the
of gravity.
the
the only
only isthe the
force
force
the force
gravity.
acting
only
isofchangeacting offorcegravity.
thein only
position. force which change
2is 2 2 2 2 2
The motion of force

aof gravity.
projectile isforce the Displacement,of
Displacement, gravity.
2
∆𝑦𝑦 == 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖∆𝑡𝑡 ∆𝑦𝑦
+ = 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 ∆𝑦𝑦 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 ∆𝑡𝑡 9,8 =𝑚𝑚 9,8 ∙ 𝑠𝑠𝑚𝑚2∙ 𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 −22𝑔𝑔⃗ = 9,8𝑔𝑔⃗𝑚𝑚=∙ 9,8
Commented [U24]:
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
the ∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ the
−
Commented [U24]: Commented

Formatting: pseComment[U24]
standardis
∆𝑦𝑦⃗ only
− Displacement, ∆𝑦𝑦⃗which
−upon ∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ − which ∆𝑡𝑡𝑣𝑣+ = 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖+
Formatting: pse stan

𝑖𝑖𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓+=
𝑣𝑣𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖2=
∆𝑡𝑡𝑣𝑣2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
𝑖𝑖 +
+ =2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦 𝑔𝑔⃗2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
=𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑔𝑔
⃗+ 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
in position. always
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 −𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 −𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 −𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 −𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖
in position. in position. in position. isDirection Direction is always

acting 2 ∆𝑦𝑦⃗ −∆𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑣𝑣 + 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦 𝑠𝑠 −2𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −2𝑔𝑔⃗ = 9,8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −2
𝑣𝑣 2 −𝑣𝑣
in position. isDirection always is always

𝑓𝑓 2 2 2 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2+=2𝑣𝑣𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
22 𝑖𝑖 2 2 2 −2
−2 −2
motion motion of isisa

The
ofthe motion
theaforce
force
Theisof ofthe motion
of
gravity.
gravity.
forceaisof which
which
of
thegravity.
3.3 force is the
which
ofthe gravity.
isVertical change
change which change Motion change including in tables,
including in tables, etc.including inincluding
tables, etc
in
2
downwards (towards the
2
The amotion of Projectile
isa the
2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗Displacement,
calledThe downwards downwards

(towards downwards
the (towards
Direction (towards
the is the
always downwards etc.(to-
222𝑔𝑔 ⃗⃗22
freeThe fall.
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓
∆𝑦𝑦 = ∆𝑦𝑦 = the ∆𝑦𝑦is= the ∆𝑦𝑦 = 2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗
downwards (towards the

9,8
2𝑔𝑔 2⃗⃗ Direction
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
⃗⃗ == 9,8 𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑔𝑔
∙⃗𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠= 9,8 𝑚𝑚 𝑔𝑔 ∙⃗𝑠𝑠= 9,8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −2
Commented
Commented Comm [U24]:
[U24]
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
is∆𝑦𝑦 −
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
∆𝑦𝑦⃗⃗acting
−force ∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗acting
− 2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ − Displacement, ∆𝑦𝑦 = 2 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 = + 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
= 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2𝑖𝑖2Direction
+ 𝑣𝑣 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖is+ 𝑣𝑣 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦= 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2always
+ 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦
𝑣𝑣 −𝑣𝑣
in Direction is always
𝑣𝑣 −𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣 −𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣 −𝑣𝑣
in position.
position.in position. centre of the Earth). Direction Direction is always
Direction
is always is always
projectile
projectile is called
is Theprojectile
called
The projectile
motion
motion Theis of called
ofmotion
isaaThe called ofmotion centre of the centre
Earth). centre
of the Earth).
of the
wards Earth).
the
centre of the Earth).
Earth). including
including in
intables,
tables, etc.
includin
etc.
projectile ofcalled downwards (towards the
⃗⃗ ⃗⃗
downwards downwards
(towards downwards
(towards
the of the(towards
centrethe the
2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗ 2𝑔𝑔 2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗
∆𝑦𝑦
∆𝑦𝑦 is= =the2𝑔𝑔 ∆𝑦𝑦 = ∆𝑦𝑦 =
𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓
is the motion in which

𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣in 𝑖𝑖𝑓𝑓 +position.
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓
Freefree
fall free
fall. fall. free fall.
projectile
projectile free is
projectile
isfall. called projectile
is centre
centre of
of the
the
centreEarth).
Earth). of the
centre
Earth). of the Earth).
𝑣𝑣 + 𝑣𝑣
calledProjectilefreecalled fall. is called Graphs of motion Graphs

a ∆𝑦𝑦is=∆𝑦𝑦 ( =a( ) ∆𝑡𝑡 ) ∆𝑦𝑦 ∆𝑡𝑡 = ( ∆𝑦𝑦 = () ∆𝑡𝑡 )∆𝑦𝑦 ∆𝑡𝑡
Graphs
) ∆𝑡𝑡 mOTION
𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
2 2
an object experiences negligi-Direction Direction of motion

of motionDirectionPosition Direction
of
Position
is vs
motion an time
ofvs motion
time Position Velocity
Position
vs time
Velocity vs time
timevs Acceleration
vs time vs
Acceleration vs
time timevsAcceleration
time Acceleration time
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ++2𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 VERTIcaL 2𝑣𝑣 + 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑣𝑣(PROjEcTILE + 2𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓
FreeFree fall fall is is theFree

free
free the
fall.Free
fall. fallfreeisfall fall.thefree Projectile
isFree the
fall. fall is the Position
Direction of motion displacement
Position vs time Graphs
Graphs Graphs Graphs Velocity
Velocity vs time vs timeacceleration
vsAcceleration vs time
∆𝑦𝑦
∆𝑦𝑦 = = (( ∆𝑦𝑦 )= ∆𝑡𝑡
∆𝑡𝑡
)Graphs( Graphs ∆𝑦𝑦 = ) ∆𝑡𝑡 ( ∆𝑡𝑡 Graphs
)Equations
VerticallyVertically
Direction downwardsdownwards
of motion Vertically Vertically
downwards downwards
Position Vertically vs time
downwards Velocity vs time Acceleration
Magnitude vs time
constant:
22 vs 2timeVelocity 2Velocity
resistance
ble airmotion
motion in whichand constant
in which anmotion
Free
Free an motion
fallinFree
fall which
is
is in the which
anobject
fall
the Free Direction
Direction
is anfall upon
the of
Direction
is motion
which Position
Direction
motion
Position vs time
time vsPosition
time Velocity
Velocity vs time
time time Acceleration vs time
timeAcceleration
motion in which thean of
Vertically downwards Vertically
Vertically downwards downwards
Vertically downwards Vertically downwards
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖 2 𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
acceleration due to gravitational

1
(speed increases)
𝑦𝑦
⃗ = 𝑦𝑦
⃗ + ∆𝑦𝑦 ⃗ 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑣𝑣 + 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡
objectobject experiences object

experiences
motion
motion in(speed
object
inexperiences
which
motion
which increases)
experiences
an
in
anthe motion (speed
which onlyin an (speed
force increases)
which acting increases) increases)
𝑥𝑥⃗ of 𝑥𝑥
⃗ motion 𝑥𝑥⃗ of vs 𝑥𝑥motion
⃗𝑣𝑣⃗Position 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑔𝑔
𝑣𝑣⃗ Velocity⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ vsVelocity vs𝑔𝑔⃗time Acceleration 𝑔𝑔⃗ vs
object experiences
∆𝑦𝑦
𝑥𝑥⃗ = 𝑣𝑣vs
⃗𝑖𝑖 ∆𝑡𝑡time +vs 𝑔𝑔∆𝑡𝑡 𝑣𝑣⃗ Acceleration vs𝑔𝑔⃗time vs time
2
force.negligible
negligible air
negligible
air (speed
negligible air (speed
(speed
the force
air increases)
increases)
of(speed
gravity. increases) which
(speedisincreases) the change
2 2
object
object experiences
experiences
object increases) experiences
object experiences
𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖
isnegligible
𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
⃗⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗
(constant
𝑔𝑔⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ = 9,8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −2
(constant (constant
an ∆𝑦𝑦(speed ⃗ −𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥⃗⃗Displacement, 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑣𝑣 2 = 𝑣𝑣𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 ⃗⃗2 + 2𝑔𝑔∆𝑦𝑦 𝑔𝑔⃗
𝑣𝑣 −𝑣𝑣
(constant air in(constant position. Direction is always
resistance
resistance and acceleration)
resistance
and
negligible
negligible acceleration)
resistance
negligible and
air
air The and
negligible
resistancemotion
acceleration)
airacceleration) of air anda acceleration) downwards (towards the
∆𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓2𝑔𝑔⃗⃗ 𝑖𝑖
(constant (constant
acceleration)
(constant (constant (constant
constant
constant constant
resistance
resistance constant
resistance and
andprojectileacceleration)
acceleration)
resistance called centre of the Earth).
constant and0is acceleration) 0 and acceleration) 0 0
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓
acceleration
acceleration due due to
acceleration
constant
constantto acceleration
constant due tofree due
constant fall.
to Graphs
VerticallyVertically upwards upwards acceleration
Vertically Vertically
upwards due to
upwards 00 0
𝑡𝑡
0 𝑡𝑡 00 0 𝑡𝑡∆𝑦𝑦 = (𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡
Vertically
Direction Acceleration vs time
0 2𝑡𝑡 0) ∆𝑡𝑡0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
gravitational
gravitational force. gravitational
force.
acceleration
acceleration gravitational force.
due
acceleration
due to
to Free
force.
acceleration
due fall to is to
Vertically upwards gravitational
Vertically
Vertically upwards force.
upwards
Vertically upwards Vertically downwards upwards
𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 00 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 00𝑡𝑡 0𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
(speed
gravitational (speeddecreases)
force. decreases) motion (speed decreases)
in (speed
which an (speed
gravitational gravitational
force. gravitational
force. force.decreases)
𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑥𝑥 ⃗due the 𝑥𝑥⃗ ofupwards 𝑥𝑥motion
⃗𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗ Position 𝑣𝑣vs ⃗ time𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ Velocity vs𝑔𝑔⃗time 𝑔𝑔⃗
𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗
(speed decreases)
(speed
(speed decreases)
decreases)
(speed decreases)
experiences increases)
(speed decreases)
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥⃗⃗ decreases) 𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
⃗⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
⃗⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗
(constant
(constant object(constant
(constant (constant
acceleration)
acceleration) acceleration)
negligible acceleration)
air acceleration)
(constant acceleration)
(constant
(constant (constant (constant
acceleration)
acceleration) acceleration)
acceleration)
resistance 0 0 and 0 0 0
Free
3.3
constant 00 0
𝑡𝑡
0 𝑡𝑡 00 0 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 0 0 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡
free fall.
𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
Projectile
Projectile
fall
acceleration due to
Vertically upwards
𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 00 𝑡𝑡 0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 00𝑡𝑡 0𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡0 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
gravitational force. 9 9 9
is
is
9
(speed decreases) 99 9 9
𝑥𝑥⃗ 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑔𝑔⃗ 9
The motion of a
projectile is called
object upon which
(constant
acceleration)
0 0 0
an Position
in position.
𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
Vertical Projectile Motion
9
𝑦𝑦⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑦𝑦⃗𝑖𝑖 + ∆𝑦𝑦⃗
9
the Direction of motion

the only force acting ∆𝑦𝑦⃗ − Displacement,
is the force of gravity. which is the change
∆
Posi
∆
disp
∆𝑦𝑦
VERT
3.4 Work Energy and Power. Work-Energy Theorem. Law of Conservation of Mechanical Energy. Commented [U25]: Formatting: pse remove blank spaces/
pages in text.
10
3.4 3.4 Work 3.4
Work Work
Energy Energy
Energy and and and
Power.Power.Power. Work-Energy
Work-EnergyWork-Energy Theorem.
Theorem. Law of Conservation Law of Conservation
Theorem. of
of Mechanical Mechanical
LawEnergy. of Energy.
Conservation of Mechanical Energy. Commented Commented [U25]: [U25]:
Formatting:Formatting:
pse rem
3.4 Work Energy and3.4 Power. Work Energy
Work-Energy
Work and
Energy Power.
Theorem.
and Work-Energy
Power. Law of Conservation
Work-Energy Theorem. of
Theorem. Law of
Mechanical LawConservation
of Energy.
Conservation
work of Mechanical
energy of Mechanical
and Energy. Law Energy.
of conservation Commented Commented
[U26]: [U25]:
Formatting:
pages inpages in
suggest Commented
pse remove
text. improving
text. Formatting: Commente blank
[U25s
formatting
Commented [U25
Physical quantity 3.4 3.4 Work Energy and Power. Work-Energy Theorem. Law of Conservation of Mechanical Energy.
3.4 Work Energy and Power. Work-Energy Theorem. Law of Conservation of Mechanical Energy. pages in text.
in inserts to improve legibility of content. pages in text.
pages
Comment in text.
Physical Physical
quantity the principle of
workwork of
energy mechanical
energyand and energy
Law of Law of conservation
conservation Commented Commented [U26]:pages[U26]: in text.
Formatting:Formatting:
suggest is
in tex
quantityPotential mechanical
Physical
work Physical
quantityquantity
Kinetic energy Physical quantity
Physical quantity conservation work energy the and principle work Work
of energy
ofwork conservation
energy and
energy mechanical and
and Law ofLaw
energyLaw Commented
conservation of inconserva-
of conservation [U26]:
inserts Formatting:
intoinserts
improve Commented
to improve suggest
legibility
pages[U26
legibility
improving
Commente
content.
ofCommente of contf
3.4Physical Work Energy
quantity
energy and Power. energy Work-Energy Theorem. Power Law of Conservation of Mechanical
the
of principle Energy.ofLaw
work of
energy mechanical
ofand energy
Law
theof conservation Commented improve
[U26l
Physical quantity Potential Potential mechanical mechanical energy the principle of the
of work
principle
mechanical
the principleenergy
of energy of and
of Law
mechanical
of in inserts
of
mechanical to improve
conservation
energy legibility of content.
energy in insertsinto
pagesinserts
Comment in to i
text.
workwork Kinetic Kinetic
energy energy
Potential Potential
mechanical Power
mechanical Power conservation conservation of principle
the principleof ofof conser- tion
of mechanical energy of mechanical in inserts to improve l
Work energy Kineticenergy
Potential energy
energy energy Potential Potential
energy energy
Mechanical mechanical mechanical
energy Power Power
conservation of conservation the principle of of of mechanical energy in inserts to
Work work
done by a Kinetic
KineticKinetic workenergy
energy Gravitational
work quantity Total
Kinetic energy energy Power
Potential energy Power
is the The work done by
energy Power energy Total mechanical vation conservation
work energy of energy of energy
Law of conservation Commente
work Physicalenergy Kinetic energyenergy energy mechanicalPower
energy conservation of and
energy
done work
potential
Kinetic energy Kinetic
mechanical
Gravitational energy energy rate
Total at which energy thePower energy
is the(net) Power The energywork energy
in
done conservation
energy
isolated
by
the Total
principle mechanical
ofof mechanical energy in inserts to i
constant force isWorkisWork done
the by a by aKinetic
Kinetic energy energyis Gravitational
Gravitational po-Total energy
Total Mechanical Power energy the
isresultant Power The is work
the rate done byan
energy The Total
work mechanical
done by of Total mechanical
Work donedone
defined Work
by abyan a object KineticWork
has done
energy
Work
energyby
done a is by the
aKinetic
Gravitational energy
energy
Kinetic
potential is
Total
energy Gravitational
equal Potential
work
Gravitational
mechanical is Power
done Total
or is mechanical
theforce
Total The
acting
at which Power
workon an
Power is
done thethe by
systemis the
resultant The
atTotalremains work
The
(net) energy
mechanical done
work energy by
done Total
byan isolated mechanical
Total mechanical
as the constant constant
force force
is Work is work
theisenergy
is done by
thea energy Kinetic Kinetic
potential energy energy mechanical
Gravitational Total rate atrate which Power thePower resultant
is the (net)
The conservation
work energy done inby an in of
isolated
Total mechanical
constant constant
scalar quantity
forceforceisdue the
motion. energy
constant
energy Workan
force
energy object
done
an object potential
an by
isforce is
object tential
isa the
has energy
isKinetic
to
the energy
the
energy sumenergy
mechanicalof
isthe
is potential
the the energy energy
Gravitational
energy
potential
energy rate equal
at which
isisismechanical
equal energy
Total
object
mechanical
work isiswhich
the rate
equal
done work
resultant
or at
toPower which is(net)
forceat done
constant is
which the
acting the
energy the
(ison theanresultant
The
resultant
energy an work
in resultant (net)
isolated
system done (net)
(net)energy
by energy
remains energy
Total
in anmechanical
isolated
an an isolat-
in isolated
defined defined
isasits isasthethe anconstant
constant object
force has
is is energy
the energy isenergy
the potential energy is equal work
mechanical is done or rateforce atrate which acting on the an system
resultant remains
(net) energy in an in isolated
defined as the scalar is the energy is the is equal rate at which Commented [U28]:
thehas due its motion. energy an object has to the sum of the or energy is expend-
equal todefined as thescalar an object
defined constant
has
has
as
defined
Work the
due
its due
done as force
itsthe
motion. to
energy an
its
motion. is object
is
energy the
an
Kinetic has
gravitational
object
energy energy
object has
energy energy
object is potential
equal
expended.
energy
the tosum
to Gravitational is
the of work
the
sum the energy
is done
of energy mechanical
theTotal the
energy or ischangeis force
equal work
in acting
the
objectis
work
Power done on
object or
an
conserved).
is
is equaldone
is force
system
or
is equalto The force the
acting
force
to remains
constant resultant
acting
work on
acting
constant an
(is on on (net)
system
anan
by energy
system
Total remains
ed systemin
remains
mechanical anPse check/complete.
isolated
remains
the scalar quantity defined
3.4 as
Work the Energy by aan and object
Power. has
an Work-Energy an energy the
isTheorem. energy
Law of isenergy
equal
Conservation
is work is done or the force
Energy. acting on done an (is system remains Comme
quantity equal
scalar to
quantity the due its
scalar motion.
defined
position
quantity
scalar energy
as
quantity in thea due duean its an
object
due has object
motion.
potential
to its
theto to
position
motion.
due
energy has
toenergy
the
energyits sumin an
energy
of
energy object
the
gravitational
an
gravitational
gravitational
potential is the
energy
objectto theis sum
energy
poten-
to
expended.kinetic
the of
expended.
mechanical sum the ised. equal
object
energy
of energy
theofisMechanical
of
therate work
equal
energyis the
change is
to is done
change in the or
object
constant object
in force
is
object
the
the equal
(is is acting
isequal to
equal
conserved).
resultant on to
(net)to an
constant
the system (is
constant
constant
Commented
energy [G29]:
in remains
(is (is
Commented
an It must Commented
con-
isolatedbe like [U28]: [U28]:
this ( into
PsebracketsPse )check/co
check/complete.
constant force is has
due motion. its energy an object to the sum of the energy is at which object conserved). is equal to constant (is pages in t
𝟐𝟐 due
product of the equal equal quantity Commented [U28
𝟏𝟏
SI due its motion. has due energy

to its object
gravitationalto the sum of the
expended. energy is the change object in is the equal to
conserved). Commented
constant (is [U28]: Pse check/complete. Commente
tounit:
thetojoule [J] has due to its gravitational expended. the change in the conserved).
product of the
equal force
the equal to gravitational
scalar
the
equal field
aposition plus
gravitational
position
object
in the kineticfield
a potential has
energy due
tial
potential to
energy
is the itsenergyplusenergy the
gravitational object.
is equal kineticexpended.
work kineticIn
is done
energy isolated
an energy or change
of the
of
force change
system, in
acting in the
kinetic
an conserved).
served).
system remains [G29]:
Commented It must [U28
force multiplied by defined as
thethe [G30]: Commented
BetterCommented
like this[G29]:
𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲 =quantity
𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
product inhas due to itsenergy gravitational expended. the change in the conserved). It must be like this
be (liki
𝑴𝑴(𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊) 𝑴𝑴(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇)
toproduct
equal the Comme
𝟐𝟐 itsisdue
Comment
𝑾𝑾
Physical has due to its work energy and Law of conservation

𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
position in a potential gravitational

energy expended. the change in the conserved).
𝟏𝟏
relative position
to some in a potential If
energy the body kinetic energy of kinetic energy of Commented [G29
𝟐𝟐
energy.
𝟏𝟏
product SI
equal
of the unit:
to the joule [J] gravitational field position
plus in
the a kinetic potential energy kinetic energy of Commented [G29]: It must be like this ( into
Commente bracke
𝑲𝑲
multipliedproduct of
the SI unit: joule [J] relative due
gravitational itsto some
motion. field plus energy kinetic
the an
kinetic energy.
object to the sum of the energy the onlyobject.
is conservative
𝑲𝑲
product of the the object. energy object of

Inis an equal
the to
object.
isolated constant
system, (is
𝟐𝟐a has
the displacement
𝑷𝑷an =
scalar quantity position in a potential energy kinetic In energy

an isolated of system, in inserts
𝟐𝟐 to
force multiplied by Commented [G30]: Better like tht

𝟐𝟐
𝑬𝑬 = 𝟐𝟐 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
Commented [G30]:Commented
byforce themultiplied
𝟏𝟏
product of the Better like this [G29

thescalar𝟏𝟏𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
𝑴𝑴(𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊)
the principle of of mechanical energy
𝟏𝟏
SI by unit: SI unit: [J] position potential

kinetic energy kinetic energy
𝑾𝑾
object.
𝟐𝟐
reference gravitational
point. field
SIjoule
unit: plus the
[J] kineticpossesses the object. Comment
∆𝒕𝒕
joule gravitational afield

𝑾𝑾 𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴(𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊) =Commented
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇)
plus
𝑲𝑲
product
[J] of the relative to some body In
thean the
isolated object. system, In
of an isolated system, Commente
𝟐𝟐quantity 𝑬𝑬 the=on 𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇)
forcejoulemultiplied by relative some has energy.

duefield
Potential toinits plusIfthe the Ifbody
gravitational
mechanical expended. forces acting. In isolated
Commented system,
[G30]: [G30
𝟐𝟐quantity
the change in the conserved).

𝑬𝑬 𝑲𝑲 = 𝟏𝟏 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
unit: [J] only conservative Better likeCommented

this Commente
the force multiplied SIby reference point.
of the of𝑬𝑬the𝑲𝑲 = to 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
𝟐𝟐
joule gravitational field plus the kinetic
𝑲𝑲 𝑴𝑴(𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊) 𝑴𝑴(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇)
the object.
an𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
only conservative
ofdisplacement
the point
forceofmultiplied equal to the
thebydisplacement
𝑷𝑷 =
In an isolated system,
𝟏𝟏 𝑾𝑾
theofdisplacement
𝑾𝑾 𝑷𝑷 =
force multiplied [G30

𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
conservation of
𝑾𝑾
work SI Kinetic
unit: energy [J] Power
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗 𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
gravitational
to field plus kinetic If the body
𝟐𝟐 𝑾𝑾
energy. the object.

𝟐𝟐 𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
rectilinear If the body

𝟐𝟐
SI unit:
reference point. possesses only only In
conservative isolated system, Commented
∆𝒕𝒕
joule
𝑾𝑾
the force multiplied reference point. position in a potential the energy OR only anconservative Comment
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗 ∆𝒕𝒕
energy energy
𝑷𝑷 =
kinetic energy of
𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
SI unit: are acting.

displacement joule Commente

𝑷𝑷 =
relative some If the

𝟐𝟐
the displacement
𝑷𝑷 =
forces are acting.

𝑴𝑴 𝑲𝑲 gravitational the𝑲𝑲kinetic
point of
applicationtheapplication
of the product the by only conservative
𝑾𝑾are
point of displacement
𝑬𝑬an = 𝑬𝑬
of theof point
the of energy
𝟐𝟐
the displacement possesses the body

𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲
to = + 𝑬𝑬𝒑𝒑energy.
relative some
𝟐𝟐𝑬𝑬
reference point.
∆𝒕𝒕𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
energy.
= 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
ofreference point. topossesses
∆𝒕𝒕
uniform motion possesses

𝟏𝟏
reference point.
=𝑾𝑾 ∆𝒕𝒕
SI unit: joule [J] rectilinear If the body pos- The forces mechanical are acting. forces only
are conservative
acting.
𝑾𝑾𝑷𝑷𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
the displacement SI unit: joule [J] gravitational field rectilinear the kinetic forces are acting.
𝑲𝑲
SI unit:
𝑷𝑷 =
of point of reference SI unit: point. joule the object.OR In an isolated sys-

∆𝒕𝒕
isolated system,
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 forces
of the
force byofthethe point
force by the of point
themultiplied by forces are
an acting. Commente
𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑 energy.
𝑬𝑬 = joule 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗relative
ofapplication ofthetheforce
𝑴𝑴to 𝒑𝒑 energy.
𝑾𝑾𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 conservative
application Work energy Gravitational Power

possesses is the work done by In Total mechanical
𝑾𝑾
rectilinear
𝑬𝑬[J]
𝒑𝒑 =relative
by𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 to some
reference point.
∆𝒕𝒕
of theof the point of

− 𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕
(v rectilinear
constant), SI unit: [J] rectilinear
= 𝑬𝑬the +body
𝑬𝑬possesses 𝑲𝑲𝑾𝑾
forces are acting.

joule uniform OR
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴(𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊) = 𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇)
SIjouleunit: [J] of an object

[J]𝑬𝑬relative =some𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴𝑲𝑲to +Ifsome = body 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 𝑲𝑲 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
unit:SI [J] some uniform sesses body OR

𝟐𝟐energy.
energy.
𝑾𝑾𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑾𝑾
joule The total mechanical

𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏
of the of
𝑲𝑲
SI unit:
𝑴𝑴 𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑
application of point SIjoule

𝑲𝑲
The total mechanical only tem, conservative
only conser-
𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑
the
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 𝑲𝑲
application the of the SI unit: joule [J] OR

𝒑𝒑
cosine ofapplication
the the displacement SI unit: [J]
𝑷𝑷 = total
cosine angle by the joule

𝒑𝒑Kinetic
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴[J] =plus
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴 + 𝑬𝑬 𝑾𝑾
force
is the energy mechanical rate at which the resultant (net) energy in an isolated
𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬 + 𝑬𝑬
constant force is uniform rectilinear

motion
of theforce ofby the
= 𝑬𝑬 + 𝑬𝑬
motion
𝑾𝑾 = 𝑬𝑬 − 𝑬𝑬 = 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
application of the SI unit: then: [J]uniform SI unit: [J] uniform motion

𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
SI unit: [J] joule joule The total

OR mechanical
If − 𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕
joule SI unit: [J] (v = constant), The total mechanical

𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
remains constant as The total mechanical

reference point. (v = Using

constant), the work- possesses
joule [J] 𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴 = 𝑬𝑬Total ∆𝒕𝒕 = 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲OR (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
an object
𝒑𝒑relative 𝑴𝑴 motion 𝑲𝑲motion
force the force by application

the
force the of the SI unit: joule uniform motion motion energy of anof object
The forces
vativemechanical
areforcesacting.are
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛joule 𝑐𝑐rectilinear 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
angle formed
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑬𝑬
𝑲𝑲 +=𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬 𝒑𝒑 +possesses
of theby point
=The 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 𝑲𝑲 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
object [J] has the work done or

energy acting on antotal system remains

If𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
an joule
doneof𝑬𝑬by 𝒑𝒑 =
a 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
uniform
formed by bythe linecosine (vmotion
𝒑𝒑
defined asofthe SI unit:

𝑬𝑬[J]
𝒑𝒑= = to𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
bycosine ofofthe of the = constant),
𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕
force by the SIenergy joule (v constant), energyCommented Theof totalobject

[G27]: mechanical
𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊 𝑬𝑬+𝒑𝒑 𝑊𝑊rectilinear the𝑾𝑾 − 𝑬𝑬−
energy of an object Space corrected

𝑾𝑾
the moves, energy of an object

𝑾𝑾 =energy𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲=−𝑬𝑬OR 𝑬𝑬
theorem: rectilinear
[J]unit:𝑬𝑬 =potential
constant asan
− 𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕
𝒑𝒑 joule
[J] SIenergy unit: (v
[J]= constant), =Using the work-
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
force by the then:joule constant as OR

cosine of the constant), Using work-

𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
cosine of the cosine of the energy of

acting. an object
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝑲𝑲energy
the line of action due its motion. energy an object to the sum of the energy is
object is equal to constant (is

𝑾𝑾 = 𝑬𝑬 − 𝑬𝑬
of the constant),
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
formed by application then:

then:
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
SI unit:
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 is𝑐𝑐object
forceangle
action of theangle formed by cosine ofscalar

the quantity watt then: Using
remains the work-
constant as remains energy constant of an asobject
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴 = 𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲uniform + 𝑬𝑬 𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
Using the (v = provided

work- the net remains constant
uniform motion Commented
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = + 𝑊𝑊=
thatUsing the
the object moves, Commented
as[G27]:[G27]: Space correc
𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊 + =𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐𝑾𝑾 =force𝑬𝑬 𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 − 𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
SI unit: [J] then: energy theorem: Space corrected

cosine of the joule energy theorem: the object The total mechanical
𝑐𝑐 remains 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
angle formed by remains constant as Comme

𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐 then: 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
angle formed Using the work-

𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
angle formed expended. the change conserved).

𝑷𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 [J]=(v is𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗 𝑬𝑬 𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲
force and the of action force by then: Commented [G27

𝑊𝑊 = 𝑾𝑾𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊
equal to
thetheby Commented [G27]:
is𝑊𝑊equal
(v𝒑𝒑 ==constant),
𝑊𝑊 +the 𝑊𝑊
ofand
the the the line
direction byofline
of action inthe theobject remains moves, constant Space
as corrected Commente
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
SI unit: [W] energy Using

theorem: the work-
𝑊𝑊 == 𝑊𝑊 +− 𝑊𝑊
the object moves,

𝑬𝑬unit:
𝒑𝒑 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂then:
angle formed by watt

energy theorem: work done by
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−remains
𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕𝒕
SI unit:
But: watt [W] (v = constant), = energy
provided theorem:
provided that that
the net the
the
energy netobject of moves,
an object Commented [G27
𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊
=
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐moves, 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
angle Using the work- ener-

the object moves,
𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
the line of actionformed by energy theorem:

𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝐾𝐾
the line of action position in a potential energy

the direction of the

cosineline of oftheaction SI unit: watt [W] SI unit: watt [W] kinetic energy of OR Comme
Comment
𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊
SI unit: [W]
𝑷𝑷 ==𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗
of the force and product of the watt energy theorem: provided the object
that the moves,
net
+ 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
=
[W]𝑷𝑷 𝑊𝑊 = 𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗
of the force and external provided

non- that the net
𝑾𝑾 = =𝑬𝑬work- −+ 𝑬𝑬
the displacement. the line of action =then: = provided that the net
𝟐𝟐 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
= unit: [W] work done by

𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
wattBut: work done by remains constant as
But: Using the work-

𝟏𝟏
the line of action gy =

theorem: provided that the net
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
SI unit: [J]
𝑷𝑷 = 𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗
of the force and joule gravitational field plus the kinetic

𝑲𝑲
has due to𝑷𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 its = 𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗gravitational
of the force and SI unit: [W] object.

𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝑐𝑐 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
of the force and watt

𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
the displacement. In an isolated system,

𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
the direction formed provided

done by that Comme
𝑊𝑊 = −∆𝐸𝐸
force multiplied by by conservative work

But: doneforces
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒗𝒗
the direction work work done by the net

𝑷𝑷 = 𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗 + 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
of of of the angle
force and
external Commente
𝑊𝑊 𝑝𝑝+ 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸 𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊
external
energy theorem:non- the object moves,
𝑾𝑾
work done by
𝑬𝑬 = 𝑬𝑬
But:
of the force and [W]

relative to some Hence: watt the

𝟐𝟐
the direction of energy.SI unit:

𝑝𝑝 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾 𝑝𝑝the
direction of direction of The

only total
conservative mechan-
𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝
the line external work non- done by

𝑊𝑊 +SI 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
external
𝑐𝑐
But:
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
non-
𝐾𝐾
the displacement.
𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
the displacement is zero.

𝑷𝑷 =
SI unit: [W] external non-

−∆𝐸𝐸 + 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
the watt =
the direction ofof action = conservative forces

conservative = forces provided that the net

𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝐾𝐾non-
non-
𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝
reference point.
∆𝒕𝒕
displacement. the the direction of are acting.

𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐 + 𝑊𝑊
𝑝𝑝body 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
𝑊𝑊 =by −∆𝐸𝐸
SI unit: the the displacement. ical

external energy non-
forces of an
−∆𝐸𝐸
joule
𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗
the force and

𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑊𝑊 =𝑝𝑝∆𝐸𝐸 −∆𝐸𝐸
conservative
of
displacement.the point of Hence: is zero.
But: 𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 =𝑷𝑷−∆𝐸𝐸 𝑝𝑝 += 𝑊𝑊 𝐾𝐾= ∆𝐸𝐸
is
But: zero. work done byforces
−∆𝐸𝐸 𝑝𝑝If+ 𝑊𝑊= ∆𝐸𝐸
Hence:
𝑊𝑊But: =𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
−∆𝐸𝐸
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝
This equation
Hence: can conservative forces
𝑾𝑾
𝑝𝑝 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
rectilinear
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 Hence: 𝐾𝐾
the displacement.
=𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
SI unit: [J] Hence:
𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙
the 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽 displacement.
joule OR
𝑊𝑊 𝑝𝑝= −∆𝐸𝐸
is zero. is zero. conservative forces

the direction of is object

zero. remains
unit: joule
𝒑𝒑 𝒑𝒑 possesses 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =
unit: application of the

𝑾𝑾 = ∆𝑬𝑬 + ∆𝑬𝑬
SIjoule Hence:
𝑊𝑊 ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾 𝐾𝐾externalforces
SI unit: jouleSI[J] external non-

𝒑𝒑
𝑬𝑬𝑴𝑴𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 = 𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲 + 𝑲𝑲𝑝𝑝 𝑬𝑬Hence: −∆𝐸𝐸 =𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛∆𝐸𝐸
+𝑝𝑝𝜟𝜟𝑬𝑬 (𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘𝒘
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝐾𝐾
SI unit: joule This equation

equation can
0 =conservative
∆𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲𝑝𝑝+ 𝑝𝑝𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝
+𝑐𝑐∆𝑬𝑬
SI unit: joule [J] SI unit: zero.

𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄displacement.
𝜽𝜽of
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑
−∆𝐸𝐸 +𝑲𝑲forces ∆𝐸𝐸conservative
joule
[J]𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙
𝑾𝑾 =𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽the
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑
the displacement.
𝒑𝒑
by constant as the
𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝐾𝐾= −∆𝐸𝐸
SI unit: force
joule [J]the [J] forces
+ ∆𝑬𝑬
conservation This equation equation can

𝑬𝑬 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑾𝑾 = 𝑾𝑾∆𝑬𝑬 =+∆𝑬𝑬 ∆𝑬𝑬
This equation
(v constant), Hence:
𝑲𝑲 𝒑𝒑
be=can used toThis solve

𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽 𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽
SI unit: joule [J] be used to𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏solve This𝑲𝑲uniform 𝒑𝒑 motion 𝒑𝒑
SI unit: [J] be
of used to solve of
𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽
joule
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝒑𝒑 zero.
This equation
𝑝𝑝𝑲𝑲 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑲𝑲
𝑾𝑾 = ∆𝑬𝑬 0 +
= ∆𝑬𝑬 0 = + ∆𝑬𝑬∆𝑬𝑬 + ∆𝑬𝑬
[J] 𝑾𝑾 [J] = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽 𝑾𝑾 = ∆𝑬𝑬 + ∆𝑬𝑬
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 𝑲𝑲
object moves,
∆𝑬𝑬 ∆𝑬𝑬
of the is zero.
−∆𝐸𝐸 + +∆𝐸𝐸
be used This to equation

solve can
𝒑𝒑
energybe used
problems to solve
𝒑𝒑
be used to solve
𝑾𝑾 𝑬𝑬=𝒑𝒑𝒑𝒑𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲 −𝐾𝐾is𝑬𝑬
then:
𝑾𝑾𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 ∆𝑬𝑬 =+𝑊𝑊 ∆𝑬𝑬
conservation of
𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙
[J] 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽 =isThe
∆𝑬𝑬 ∆𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲mechanical
conservation of remains constant as

0can =
=𝑾𝑾∆𝑬𝑬 += ∆𝑬𝑬
𝒑𝒑an
0𝑲𝑲=total
+∆𝑬𝑬 𝒑𝒑+ ∆𝑬𝑬
be usedUsing to
𝑾𝑾𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝑲𝑲 = ∆𝑬𝑬 𝑲𝑲 +can ∆𝑬𝑬𝒑𝒑𝑲𝑲𝑲𝑲0
unit: joule
0 conservative
= energy
∆𝑬𝑬 + ∆𝑬𝑬
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 can𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
SIangle
𝑲𝑲
formed[J]by and is called conservation the energy conservation be used

conservation ofto solve of provided that
Comme
𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊 0𝑲𝑲 = ∆𝑬𝑬 + object
∆𝑬𝑬𝒑𝒑
energy problems conservation energy equation oftheorem: can the object moves,
𝑾𝑾cosine
= 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 solve the𝑲𝑲work- 𝒑𝒑
the line of action energy problems energy conservation
problems of
principle of and SI
is and unit:
called is watt
called
theenergy [W] the energy used
beproblems problems
to solve net work done by
𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 This
This equation can
0 = ∆𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲 + ∆𝑬𝑬𝒑𝒑the
called and is energy

called problems
the
𝑷𝑷of𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 = problems
𝑭𝑭𝒗𝒗
of the force and conservation and is principle of principle theof of

andused and But:
isconservation
called called
the the
of external
work donenon-con- by
to
𝐾𝐾 be provided that the net
the direction of energy.principle of conservation principle and

ofprinciple ofissolve called servative forces is
𝑊𝑊 𝑐𝑐 + 𝑊𝑊 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸
conservation ofprinciple energy of problems

of the 𝑝𝑝
= external non-
the displacement. conservation of
energy. servation
conservation principle
conservation of energy of
is 𝑊𝑊
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 =con- −∆𝐸𝐸
energy. conservation and Hence: is called of of the

of conservative
zero. forces
energy. energy. problems conservation and isof
𝑝𝑝 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
energy.
principle of is zero.
energy.
SI unit: joule [J] called energy.
conservation the
This equation 10 can
𝑾𝑾 = 𝑭𝑭∆𝒙𝒙 𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 𝜽𝜽
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏 principle 𝑲𝑲
of 𝒑𝒑
conservation
of energy. of
be used to solve 10 10
0 = ∆𝑬𝑬𝑲𝑲 + ∆𝑬𝑬𝒑𝒑
energy. 10
conservation 10 of 10 10
energy problems 10
and is called the 10
principle of
conservation of
energy.
10
3.5 Doppler Effect
3.5 Doppler Effect

DOPPLER EFFECT Commented [U31]: Formatting: pse remove bla
3.5 Doppler Effect Commented
pages in text. [U31]: Formatting: pse remove bla
3.5 3.5Doppler Doppler Effect Effect pages
Commented in text.
Commented [U31]: Formatting:
[U31]: pse remove
Formatting: blank sp
pse remove bla
Sound dOPPLER EFFEcT Light
3.5 Doppler Effect dOPPLER EFFEcT pages pages
Commented
in text.in text. [U31]: Formatting: pse remove blan
Theory Sound
Equations Applications Red shift Light Blue shift pages in text.
Sound dOPPLER
dOPPLER EFFEcT EFFEcT Light
3.5Theory Doppler Effect Equations applications
dOPPLER EFFEcT Red shift Blue shift Commented [U31]: Formatting: pse remove blan
Sound Equations applications Red shift LightLightBlue shift Commented
pages in text. [U31]: Formatting: pse remove blank
3.5Theory Doppler Effect Sound
(dEFINITION)
(DEFINITION)
Theory
(dEFINITION)
Theory Sound
Equations
Equations applications
applications Red shift
Red shift Light
Blue shift
Blue shift pages in text.
Theory dOPPLER
applications EFFEcT Red shift shift
(dEFINITION)
The
The (dEFINITION)
Doppler Doppler effect  To • find To thefindrate the If the light source
If the is moving
light source is movingBlue If
away thefromsourceIf the moving
is source is moving towards the ob-
The Doppler  dOPPLER
effecteffect is Sound ais a
(dEFINITION) To find the EFFEcT rate If the light source is movingLight If the source is moving
The
change Doppler
change
The
Theory
in Doppler
frequencyeffect
in frequency
effect
is(or aSound
is a Equations  of
To
applications blood
the
find rate
rate
the flow
If
of
rate the
blood
Red light
away
If the
shift source
from
light
the the is
source moving
observer
observer is moving
(positive Light
If the
towards
If
velocity),
Blue source
the
then
shift source
the is
the moving
is
server observer
moving
(negative velocity), the observed
± 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿
change frequency of blood flow away from the observer

is a Equations 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 ±
The Doppler  light source is moving Iftowards

the the is observer moving
Theory in effect is a Equations (Doppler
applications Red
If theshift Blue shiftsource
To find the rate
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 = ( 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿 ) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠  To find
(dEFINITION)
𝑠𝑠
of blood
of bloodflow flow
𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿
𝑓𝑓 = ( ) 𝑓𝑓
change in frequency the observer

observed frequency towards observer
frequency higher and the wavelength
𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣
pitch) (or
change
of pitch)
sound of sound
frequency
in detect- (Dopplerflow (Doppler away(positive
away
fromfrom velocity),
the observerthen theis lower (negative
towards
and the the the velocity), observeristhe
𝐿𝐿 𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣
(dEFINITION) where
(or pitch)
change of sound
frequency where ofscanning)
(Doppler blood flow away
(Doppler (positive velocity),
the observer then the towards
(negative the velocity),observer the
where scanning)
𝑠𝑠
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 =𝑓𝑓(𝐿𝐿 = 𝑣𝑣 ( ±)𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
The Doppler in effect is a  To find the rate If the light

fromsource is moving If the source is moving
pitch) sound scanning) (positive velocity),

observed then the
wavelength greater (red-velocity), is shorter (blue-shift).
ed by listener
(oradetected
(or pitch) ofbybecause
a listener
of sound  (Doppler
To see the observed
(positive frequency
velocity), thenis lower
the is(negativeobserved
(negative frequency
velocity), isthe
higher
the
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 = ( )𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓
The Doppler
detected byeffect is a scanning)
To find
scanning) the rate
see observed source
frequency moving lower the source
observed frequency is moving
is higher
𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠
(or pitch) ofa listener

sound ofTo blood flow (positive
the lightvelocity), isthen is the If(negative velocity), the
𝐿𝐿
change in frequency the Ifaway from the observer towards the observer
where scanning)
detected
the sound source
detected
because by aby listener
and
the the
a listener
sound  To of blood
unborn
To see flow
the observed
child
the observed
and thefrequency
shift).
frequency
observed lower
is lower observed
is wavelength observed
and thefrequency
frequency
wavelength is higher higher
isisshorter
change frequency • see
(Doppler To see away
the and from the
the observed observer wavelength towards
and the wavelength the observer
shorter Commented [U34]: Pse check – perhaps: For a s
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 where
sound For a stationary listener

= (𝑣𝑣where ± 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿 ) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
detected
becauseinbythe a listener unborn child observed frequency is lower observed frequency is
is higher
Commented
𝐿𝐿
For a listener  To see the [U34]: Pse check – perhaps: For a s

± 𝑣𝑣
(or pitch) of sound (Doppler (positive velocity), then the (negative velocity), the listener:
𝑓𝑓 = ( 𝑣𝑣
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑠𝑠) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
listener
because have the different
sound and the
is observed
greater wavelength
(red-shift). and the wavelength
(blue-shift). is shorter
𝑠𝑠
source
because and the
the listener
sound where scanning)
unbornunborn
(ultrasoundchild child and the observed wavelength and the wavelength is shorter listener:
For a stationary listener Commented Commented [U34]: Pse check
[U34]: perhaps: For a station
𝑣𝑣 ± = 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
(or
sourcepitch) and of
the sound
listener
sound For a Forstationary
a stationary listener listener (ultrasound unborn (positive
child
is greater
and the observedvelocity), then
(red-shift). the
wavelength (negative
(blue-shift).
and the wavelength velocity), the Pse –check – perhaps: For a s
detected
because bythe a listener scanning)
unborn observed frequency observed frequency is is shorter
higher listener: Commented [G35]: Agree in this way is better
To see child Commented
listener: [U34]: check perhaps: a sta
𝑣𝑣 stationary
= 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
velocities relative to the theis greater (red-shift). is lower (blue-shift). Commented [G35]:Pse
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
source
have
source and and the listener
the different
listener (ultrasound
scanning)
(ultrasound is greater (red-shift). (blue-shift). Agree in –this way is Forbetter
detected a listener
different  To (ultrasound
see the observed
scanning) frequency is lower observed frequency is higher listener:
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
source
have and
because
by the
the listener
sound (ultrasound is
and greater
the (red-shift).
observed wavelength (blue-shift).
and the wavelength is shorter Commented Commented [G35]: Agree
[G35]: in this
Agree way
in is
this better
way is better
where𝑣𝑣
medium of sound
havevelocities
have propa-
different
relative
different unborn child Commented
𝐿𝐿 𝑠𝑠
to For stationary scanning)
scanning) Commented [U34]:[G35]: Pse check – perhaps: For a sta
𝑣𝑣 listener
because  To hear
scanning)the the observed wavelength and the wavelength is shorter Agree in this way is better
For a 𝑓𝑓stationary = ( ) 𝑓𝑓
velocitiestherelative soundto unborn

To hearchild the and
have different Commented
listener: [U34]: check – perhaps: For a stat
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 =
For a stationary listener

( 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
source and the listener scanning) is greater (red-shift). (blue-shift). Commented [U36]: PsePse check/correct.
𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣=
For a stationary heartbeat of a

±𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
gation.
velocities
the medium
velocities relative of
relative sound (ultrasound
𝑣𝑣 ±
𝑠𝑠
 To heartbeat Commented [U36]: Pse check/correct.

listener:
to to For a stationary Tohearhear theofthe
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 a ) 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠listener
source and the listener a is greater (red-shift). (blue-shift).

=𝑓𝑓 (𝐿𝐿 𝑣𝑣= = ( 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑠𝑠 ) 𝑓𝑓
the medium of sound source

(ultrasound
foetus Commented [G35]: Agree in this way is better
velocities relative Commented [G37]:
𝐿𝐿
Agree better in this way

𝑣𝑣 ±
Commented [U36]:
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠𝑣𝑣± 𝑣𝑣
To check/correct.
different toFor astationary
Forasource
For
• hear
heartbeat
foetus
heartbeat of
Toahearof
thea the Commented [U36]: Pse check/correct.
𝑓𝑓 = ( )𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
Commented [G37]:
thehave
medium
propagation.
the medium of soundof sound  scanning) Commented [G35]: Agree
Pse Agree in better
this way inisthis way
better
(ultrasound
have
propagation.
The frequency heard different by For
source stationary heartbeat
scanning)
foetus(ultrasound of a Commented [U36]: Pse check/correct.
the medium of sound source foetus heartbeat Commented [G37]: Agree better way
𝑣𝑣 𝑠𝑠
velocities relative to scanning) Commented [G37]: Agree better in this in this way
propagation.
propagation. To hear the
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿astationary
=stationary 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
source foetus
(ultrasound
( 𝑣𝑣 ) source
velocities
the observer is higherrelative thanto scanning)
(ultrasound Commented [G37]: Agree better in this way
propagation.  To the foetus Commented [U36]: Pse check/correct.
𝑓𝑓a𝐿𝐿 =
heartbeat
hearofofa a
( 𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠
the
Themediumfrequency of heard (ultrasound
scanning)
𝐿𝐿
scanning)
The frequency heard by Commented [U36]: Pse check/correct.

the medium
the frequency of the sound source
ofsource For a stationary heartbeat
foetus of
scanning)(ultrasound a Commented [G37]: Agree better in this way
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 = (𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿 ) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
The frequency
the
The observer
frequency
propagation. heard is
heardby
higher Red shifts are evidence that
𝐿𝐿
by source foetus
𝐿𝐿
soundby For a 𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿stationary
For a source moving: (ultrasound Red shifts are evidence that Commented [G37]: Agree better in this way
𝑣𝑣
is higher
=±(𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 ±𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣 ) 𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠
𝑣𝑣
The
the frequency
when propagation.
the observer heard
source moves by ForFor a source
a source moving: (ultrasound scanning) shifts evidence that the Universe
( ) 𝑓𝑓 ) 𝑓𝑓
scanning) Red shifts are

Redevidence arethat
𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 =𝑓𝑓(𝐿𝐿 = 𝑣𝑣
observer
the than the is
frequency
the observer is higher higher of the the
Red Universe
shifts are is expanding.
evidence that
𝐿𝐿 𝑠𝑠
than the frequency of the For aFor source

away source Universe is expanding.
𝑓𝑓 = (𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿𝑠𝑠) 𝑓𝑓 𝑠𝑠
thetheobserver
observer is higher
and scanning) Red
the shifts evidence
expanding. that
𝑣𝑣moving:
towardsThe heard by For
𝐿𝐿
thefrequency
thansource
than frequency
the when
frequency of the
the source
of the the Universe
the Universe isisare
expanding.
is expanding.
The frequency
source when heard
the sourceby  • away
awayaway (v (v the Universe expanding.
𝑓𝑓 𝐿𝐿a= )𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠𝑓𝑓)𝑠𝑠
than
when the frequency source
(𝑣𝑣moving:
±(v𝑣𝑣+moving:
lower the observer the is higher towards Red shifts areisevidence that
a𝐿𝐿 source 𝑠𝑠
of the  away
𝑣𝑣moving: )
source
moves
sourcewhen whenthe
towardssource source the For a source moving:
 𝑓𝑓away = ( (v +𝐿𝐿 )𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠𝑓𝑓
the
movesobserver is
towards
thehigher 
the 
towards towards
Listener moving: Red shifts are evidence that
+ 𝑣𝑣 )
+ 𝑣𝑣 )
source
away when
from the
the source
ob- For a source moving:
towards (v 𝑠𝑠 − v 𝑠𝑠s )
moves than frequency the towardsmoving:

towards the Universe is expanding.
(v(v −
movesmoves thetowards
observer and the
towards oflower the • Listener
away
+ 𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠v) s )
the Universe is expanding.

s
the frequency the Listener moving:

s
observer and oflower  Listener

towards moving:
(v − v )
server.than
moves towards the away (v
(v − v )
source
observer whenand thelowersource  towards moving:
observer
when the and
source lower Listener
moves towards
(v(v+−𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠v)s )
source
when when the sourcethe source
moves towards
 Listener towards
away moving:
observer
moves and
towards lower
the  
towards
away
+ (v𝑣𝑣+) vL )
 towards Commented [G32]: This is the correct word

(v + 𝑠𝑠 vL )
when away
when source
the fromthe themoves
source observer.
moves
moves towards Commented [G32]: This is the correct word
(v −
when
awaythe from the observer.
source moves the away  away
(v
Listener moving:
(v (v
Commented [U33]:
L
observer and lower Commented [G32]: Pse check.

(v+−− vvLvv+ )s)))vL )
away from the observer. Commented [G32]: This correct

is the correct
word word
(v − v Ls)
the observer.  towards Commented [U33]:

This isPse
the check.
Listener moving: vL ) (v +
observer
away fromand
the observer. lower •  towards Commented [G32]: This is the correct word
(v −
Commented [U33]:
(vvL− ) vL )
when
away the fromsource Commented Pse check.
[U33]: Pse check.
12
away (v −
Commented [U33]: Pse check.

(vv+ L )vL )
12
away from the observer. •  away Commented [G32]: This is the correct word
moves  towards (v + vL )
away from the observer. 12 12 Commented [G32]: This is the correct word
when the source moves  away (v − vL )
12 Commented [U33]: Pse check.

away (v − vL )

12
12
11
12
3.6 Electrostatics
ELECTROSTATICS
Electric field at a Principle of superposi- Principle of superposi-
Electrostatics3.6Force Electric field
Electrostatics Lines
3.6 Electrostatics point tion of forces tion of fields
Coulomb`s law Electric field is an The electric field Electric field lines The force that a sys- The electric field
ELECTROSTATICS
ELECTROSTATICS area of space in at a point is the are IMAGINARY tem of point charges strength at a point
The magnitude Electric
Electric
field atfield
a at a Principle of
Principle of Principle of
Principle
Electrostatics
of the elec-Force which
Electrostatics Force Electric
an field
electric
Electric field point electrostatic Lines LINES
Lines along which a exerts on another of due to a system of
point superposition of forces
superposition superposition
of forces of fields
superposition of fields
trostatic force one charge experi- force experienced small POSITIVE test point charge is charges is equal
coulomb`s Electric field lines are
exerted bylaw Electric field is The electric field The force that a The electric
equalfield point
point chargeThe coulomb`s
(Q magnitude law Electric field is The electric field Electric field lines are The force that a The electric field
) on anotherof the ences an area of
force.
a an space
area of space at a point
per unit is the
positive
at a point is theIMAGINARY
charge
IMAGINARY LINES
would LINES system
move. of
system point
toofthe strength
vector addition
point at a point
strength at ato the vector addition
point
1 The magnitude of the
point chargeelectrostatic
is directly
(Q ) electrostatic
force force The in which
in which
direction electrostatic
an ofan electrostatic
charge placed atalong along a small
which which a small charges exerts
charges of exerts
all
on the due todue
onforces system
aeachto a systemofof all of the electric field
2 point electric charge POSITIVE another charge charges is
proportionalexerted
to theexerted
product
by onebyof one point
the electric
electric fieldcharge force force
that point. POSITIVE
The testforcetest experienced another
point point
one charge
exerts
point point
on it. charges is
strengths of each one
charge (Q1) on (Qanother
) on another experiences
experiencesa aexperienced
experiencedper per charge wouldwould
charge move.move. is equal
is equal
to theto vector
the vectorequalequal
to theto vector
the vector
the magnitudes ofcharge the charges1 point
a force. is the
The unit positive by the positive test
addition a specific point.
point charge
point charge
(Q2) is(Q at force. The unit positive The force The force addition
of all of
theall the addition addition
of all oftheallatthe
and inversely proportional to ) is direction
2direction in of
which
direction theof the charge placed
charge at
placed at charge
experienced by is
experienced thealways
by theforces each one
inforces each one electric
electric
field field
directly proportional
directly proportional to
electric field at that positive test charge exerts on it. F F2 + ...
net = F1 + strengths +F ofn each
the square of the distance
the product
(r) toa positive electric
test field a at a point.
that point. the direction
positive test charge of theexerts on it. strengths of each
the product
of the of the point point
is theis the E =F F is always
is always
in the in the F net  F  F  ...  F one at a
one specific
at a specific E net = E1 + E2 + ... + En
between them: magnitudes of the charge
magnitudes of the direction would in F tangent
direction
to
of the of the
the field F net
1  2F  F n...  F
1 2 n
point.
charges and inversely direction in E = Eq=
q direction point.
charges and inversely
move which a positive
if placed at q tangentline to the tofield
proportional which a positive tangent the field 1 
E net EEnet EE2  ...E E n
proportional
to the to the test charge For point
Fora apoint line 1 2  ...  En
that test
point. charge For a point line
squaresquare distance
of the of the distance if charge: They start
They on start
wouldwould
movemove charge:
ifcharge: They start
a onon a a posi-
(r) between
(r) between
them: them: placed positive charge
placed
at thatat that positive
tive and and
charge
charge and end
KqQ point.point. KQ KQ end onend a negative
on a negative
F= KqQ KqQ E = E2 = charge.on a negative charge.
r r2 charge.
r2 F  F
r2 r2
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗ 𝐸𝐸⃗⃗
13 13
Electric field pattern
Unlike charges
Positive like charges
13
14
CURRENT 3.7 3.7 Electric
EMF Circuits
3.7Electric& Electric
Circuits Circuits SERIES PARALLEL Ohm’s Law Work Power
3.7 Electric Circuits
3.7 Electric
cuRRENTCircuits EMF & SERIES PaRaLLEL Ohm’s Law work Power Commented [U39]: Formatting: pse ensure n
cuRRENT cuRRENT
EMF cuRRENT EMFSERIESEMF
& & SERIES SERIES PaRaLLEL PaRaLLEL PaRaLLEL
Ohm’s Law Ohm’s Ohm’s
Lawwork Law work work
Power Commented
Power Power Commented
[U39]: Formatting: Commented
pse [U39]:
ensure no[U39]:
Formatting: pse
text isFormatti
obscure
&POTENTIAL
POTENTIaL – pse check entire text – repetitive problem seen.
cuRRENT
3.7 ElectricEMF &
Circuits
POTENTIaL SERIES
POTENTIaLPOTENTIaL PaRaLLEL Ohm’s Law work Power – pse check entire
Commented [U39]: pse check
– pse
–repetitive
text –Formatting: entire
check
problem
pse text
ensureentire
– repetitive
seen.
no text repetitiv
probl
textis– obscure
DIFFERENCEdIFFERENcE – pse check entire Commented [G40]:
text – repetitive problemcorrected
POTENTIaL
dIFFERENcE dIFFERENcE dIFFERENcE Commented [G40]: corrected Commented Commented[G40]:
seen.[G40]:
corrected correcte
cuRRENT The EMF
total & Work done SERIES PaRaLLEL R1 Ohm’s Law work General: Power The rate Commented [U39]: Formatting: pse ensure no text is obscur
dIFFERENcE
The The total Work Work R R R  General: General: Commented
The [G40]: corrected
The total Work done (energy General: atrate
The at
rate at
The total Worktotaldone done done R1 R R2 R R3 1  1   General: The rate at – pse check entire
The
text –
rate
repetitive problem seen.
The POTENTIaL
done
R R R 3 1
R
1 2 R R
2R 3
1 R
3 General:
chargetotalthatcharge
charge charge
thatcharge
(energy
that Work that(energy
transferred) that(energy per(energyunit 1  W  VIt W  VItWThe  VIt
whichWrate
 VItatwhichwhichwhich at which
passes dIFFERENcE transferred) perR11 R22 R3 Series: electrical Commented [G40]: corrected
charge
passes
passes that (energy
passes passes
transferred)
through charge perto transferred)
transferred) per per R2 W  VIt
Series: which
Series:
2
Series:
electrical electrical
electricalelectrical
The
passes total through Work
a
transferred)done unit
per charge
movetothe
R2 R 1 R 2
 R 2
General: 2 W  I Rt The
electricalrate W =
work
at VIt is
through a through through
unit charge a to a unit charge unit R charge
1 to R to
2 R3 I Series: work 2 is 2 work is is
a conductor
charge
through athat
per
(energy
conductor charge
per
charge move fromthe thecharge R2 I I I
WWIVItRt
2
W which
Parallel: work
IWRt I Rtdone or work
is work is
conductor conductor
per unit
move conductor per
the charge to per move movethe charge the charge W  I
Parallel: Rt done
Parallel: or
Parallel: donedone or or
passes
unit
conductor of unit
time. of
per move transferred)
time. negative
the from
charge per the negative
electrode to I Series: 2 electrical electrical
unit of time. unit
from ofunit
time. of time.from the
negative fromnegative
the negative 2 V done electrical 2
2 or Series: electrical
electricaldone or
through a unit charge to
electrode
3.7 to
Electric the Circuits RR2 V 2 V
work V
is energy is

R3 R R The potential Parallel:
from the positive
the negative
electrode to the electrode electrode
electrode to theto the 3 3 3 W  I
potential Rt W t
electrical
energy energy energy
is iselectrical
TheI potential The potential TheW V 2 t t
conductor move positive
charge electrode R3 done
W t oris transferre
difference across Parallel: R R
Δ𝑡𝑡
the
RWenergy is
positive the
electrode
Δ𝑡𝑡 cuRRENT positive
battery. positiveelectrode
EMF & electrode SERIES The
difference potential
PaRaLLEL across difference
a difference
W 
across
aR across
Ohm’s Law t a a transferre work transferre
transferre Power energy is Commented [U39]:
𝑄𝑄 the
unit of Δ𝑡𝑡
time. from the negative battery. conductor The potential
is directly whole circuit:
difference electrical
𝑄𝑄 𝑄𝑄
R
𝑄𝑄
positive electrode
in the in theinbattery. battery. whole R 2circuit: whole whole
circuit:
transferre Wcircuit:
d.= I 2 d.
t d.
unit of time. 𝐼𝐼 =
in the battery. thePOTENTIaL R difference

conductor across
is directlya
conductor
conductor is directly
V is directly d. transferred.– pse check entire text –
Δ𝑡𝑡𝐼𝐼 =inthe 𝐼𝐼to=
to the R The potential proportional to the energy

𝐼𝐼 = 𝑄𝑄 per electrode
inelectrode
the battery.
RRT R RR2  R conductor is directly across W
whole conductor
a circuit: W  It
d. is
T1  Commented [G40]:
dIFFERENcE 2 RT13 R R312  RR23 3R3 proportional to proportional
the proportional to
 the
t to the W W It 
𝐼𝐼 =
Δ𝑡𝑡 positive differencecurrent across ina the W

directly R It transferre
The Work done proportional
current in the
R1to the current current
in
W theinproportional
the
It
Δ𝑡𝑡𝑄𝑄 𝑊𝑊 𝑾𝑾
1 2 I213 II321  I 2 1 1 1 
whole circuit:
conductor is directly
conductor d.
R1 𝑊𝑊 𝑾𝑾 𝑾𝑾
3 RI 3 1R
𝑊𝑊
R + R 1
𝐼𝐼 = 𝑾𝑾isIt 𝑷𝑷 =
Potential V V 1 V 11 3 1 2  11 R3 1  conductor 1in the at1 conductor conductor

to
at theatcurrent
1R 
+2R21V
𝜀𝜀 = R𝜀𝜀T =𝑊𝑊 𝜀𝜀 = I R  I
1R  I2(energy T =V
𝜀𝜀 =electrode
thatIV 3VTR
𝑞𝑞IT IR
VTR 32  proportional

𝑊𝑊 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑾𝑾Parallel: ∆𝒕𝒕𝑷𝑷 = 𝑷𝑷 =
is
TTthe VR11I 33VV T1 1 V1 1 VV23 R1EV3 1R1 R2 current W   It
𝑞𝑞21IIR 𝑞𝑞31 ∆𝒕𝒕 The ∆𝒕𝒕 rate at
conductor at
𝑞𝑞 total R ∆𝒕𝒕General:
toconstant
the constant
Potential
defference is the defference
defference is the
transferred)
 is
22the
(Resistors act R R R RR 3E
RRE1
RRR3  R constant
constant 21 32 R 3 conductor at constant Series:
in the𝜀𝜀battery.
= Potential 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
Potential passes VT  V
work done (Resistors
perI 
unit
I 1  V
act
I 2 as Vper
(Resistors
3 (Resistors
asact E  as act
1  as2  current in the
temperature.
at in the 𝑷𝑷 = ∆𝒕𝒕 𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽W  VIt 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑷𝑷 =which
𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
𝟐𝟐 𝟐𝟐
Potential 𝑞𝑞charge
𝟐𝟐
defference
work done through is the
per work
unit work
done1 done per
unit 2 unitper
charge3 unit
potential temperature. R2 temperature. temperature. 2 2
𝑊𝑊 Potential 𝑾𝑾
V
RE1 VR11 VV R1  VR2 VV V temperature. Rt
𝑽𝑽𝟐𝟐
a (Resistors act dividers.) 1 V 321 1constant
conductor
32 1V3 1at
Potential charge potential
between dividers.) =potential
𝑷𝑷 = 𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
W  IV
𝑽𝑽 𝑽𝑽
the 1  2  321 V31

𝟐𝟐
𝑽𝑽
defference potential
𝜀𝜀 =defference 𝑷𝑷 =
work
charge done per
between unit
conductor charge charge
isper move
VTbetween Vbetween
1 I1theVas ItoV2dividers.)
=charge
2 3
I 3dividers.)
V  V  V I  I  =
I  temperature.
I + V + V V VI done or
T 1 2 3 =
𝑷𝑷 = 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑷𝑷 =electrical
W t
𝑞𝑞 𝑷𝑷 = ∆𝒕𝒕
two is points potential

in dividers.) constant
𝑹𝑹
defference
𝑽𝑽
charge work
between theper points
two unit
a points in
𝑹𝑹 work 𝑹𝑹 is
two points indone

I1TRE I21R1 I32R2 IIR 1RR II21R  I 32 RRI 3 R  R 
unit a oftwotime. from
in a the
(Resistors actanegative
as 3RT3E  IIT V 2 3 electrical
𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
(Resistors act as 2R
𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷== 𝑹𝑹
   I
𝟐𝟐
work
two points
donein circuit.
per unit I T I
(Resistors Iact I 3
1 temperature.
(Resistors
Ract  as Iact as R3
𝑹𝑹
circuit. charge circuit.

a between twoelectrode
potential dividers.) to V1  V12 current V23 as(Resistors
dividers.)
I The I potential W t energy is
𝑽𝑽Parallel:
charge between V = V
the + V +
(Resistors
current V dividers.) current current
dividers.) dividers.)
IV WholeWhole circuit:
Whole
circuit: circuit:
circuit. T 1 2 3 Whole circuit: Whole
𝑷𝑷 =
points
two points in a Δ𝑡𝑡 positive electrode I T  I1
potential I
act asV
2  I 3
1 = V 2 = R V  3 A real battery has
V
difference across a R circuit: transferre
𝑹𝑹 V
current dividers.) Whole battery

real battery
𝑄𝑄 circuit.
in A real battery circuit:has A realAR =conductor

has hasis directly whole circuit: d.
(Resistors act as
𝑊𝑊
internal resistance.
𝐼𝐼 =
circuit. dividers.)
𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊
A real battery has

𝑊𝑊
internal internalinternal
resistance.
resistance.
I resistance.
R  R  R  R
𝑉𝑉circuit.
T
current 1
dividers.) 2 3 I
proportional to the 
= 𝑉𝑉 = 𝑉𝑉 = (Resistors act as
Whole circuit: W It
𝑄𝑄

𝑉𝑉 = 𝑊𝑊in a
I = I internal
+ I +resistance.
I
𝑄𝑄 the𝑄𝑄battery.
I  I  I T 1 2  3  
current in the
𝑉𝑉 = 𝑄𝑄
1 2 3 real battery Whole circuit:

𝑊𝑊 𝑾𝑾
Potential IA 1 
I 1 has
at
𝑄𝑄𝑊𝑊
act resistance.
1 current
as 
𝜀𝜀 = 𝑷𝑷 =
VT  V1  V2(Resistors  V3 Iinternal  R  r 
RI1r RI  rRconductor r
𝑉𝑉 = 𝑞𝑞 ∆𝒕𝒕
defference is the
𝑄𝑄
(Resistors act as dividers.) RER  Rr1 R2 R3 A realconstant battery has internal

𝑷𝑷 = 𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
work done per unit IV1 V2  V3 temperature.

potential dividers.)
𝑽𝑽𝟐𝟐
charge between
𝑷𝑷 =
I 
RI r I  I resistance.V
two points in a T 1 2 3 R
𝑹𝑹
circuit. (Resistors act as I

current dividers.) Whole circuit:
ε
A real battery has
I=
𝑊𝑊
internal resistance.
𝑉𝑉 =
𝑄𝑄
R + r
I 15
Rr 15 15 15
15
15
15
• Strategy to Solve Problems on Electric Circuits
• Read the problem carefully as many times as needed.
• If not given, draw a circuit diagram.
• Write down the data in symbolic form.
• Indicate the conventional direction of the current from high-potential to low-potential (+ to -).
• Re-draw the circuit diagram to simplify it if necessary.
• Identify the type of connection (series/parallel).
Analysing circuits:
1 – The algebraic sum of the changes in potential in a complete transversal of any loop of a circuit must be
zero. (ε= Ir+ Ir)
2. The sum of the currents entering any junction must be equal to the sum of the currents leaving that
junction.
• i = i1+i2+…+ in
• Write down the formula/ equation that solves the question.
• Find the unknowns if needed (multi-concept problems).
• Do the calculations and write down the final answer.
- Check your answer. Check if it makes sense, e.g.:
- Is the unit correct?
Is the numerical value reasonable?
15
16
3.8 Electrodynamics
Electrical machines
Direct current motor (DC–motor) AC and DC Generators The DC generator (Dynamo)
Motors convert electrical energy into (rotational) Generators convert mechanical energy into electrical The DC generator or dynamo is similar
mechanical energy. energy. to the AC generator, but the slip rings are
replaced by split ring (commutator) to get
Elements of the DC-motor: The generator is based on the principle of
direct current (current that flows in one
“electromagnetic induction”
1. Armature. direction).
Elements of the AC generator:
Split-ring (commutator).
1. Armature.
2. Carbon brushes.
2. Slip-rings.
3. Two poles of magnet (permanent magnets)
3. Carbon brushes.
Fleming’s left hand (motor) rule
4. Two poles of magnet (permanent magnets).
Fleming’s right hand (dynamo) rule (for generators)
The thumb shows the direction of the force, the first

finger shows the direction of current and the second
finger shows the direction of the magnetic field. The The thumb represents the direction of motion of the conductor.
thumb, the first finger and the second finger must be The first finger represents the direction of the magnetic field (north to south).
at a right angle to (900) each other. The second finger represents the direction of the induced or generated current (the direction of
the induced current will be the direction of conventional current - from positive to negative).
ALTERNATING CURRENT
Alternating current (AC) isaLTERNaTING

anaLTERNaTING cuRRENT
oscillatingcuRRENT
electric current that varies sinusoidally with time, reversing its direction of flow periodically.
Alternating
Alternating
aLTERNaTING current
current
cuRRENT (AC) is an
(AC) oscillating
is an oscillatingelectric current
electric current varies
thatthat sinusoidally
varies sinusoidally with time,
with time, reversing
reversing direction
its its direction of flow of flow
aLTERNaTING
periodically.
periodically. cuRRENT
Alternating current (AC) is an oscillating electric current that varies
(AC) is an oscillating electric current that varies sinusoidallysinusoidally with time, reversing its direction of flow
Alternating currentGraphs
aLTERNaTING
periodically. cuRRENT a rms values with time, reversing its direction Average of flow power
periodically. Graphs a rms values Average power
Alternating current (AC) is an oscillating Graphs aelectric current that varies sinusoidallyrms withvalues time, reversing its direction ofAverage flow power
Advantages
Advantages of AC over DC periodically. Advantages of AC of AC over overGraphs a rms values Average power
DCDC Graphs
Currenta versus time Voltage
Voltageversus time rms Current values Voltage
Voltage Average power
Advantages
AdvantagesofofAC ACover Current versusCurrent
over time versus time Voltage versus timeversus timeCurrentCurrent Voltage
DC Graphs
Current aversus time Voltage versus time rms values Voltage Average power
•  DC
Easy to be transformed Easy
 (step
Easy to be up
to transformed
ortransformed Current
For one complete one
ForFor versus
complete
cycle
one time cycle
complete For Voltage
one
cycle For versus
complete
complete
For
oneone cycletime Current
complete Current
The The root-mean-
root-mean-
The root-mean- Voltage
The
The Theroot-
root-mean-
root-
Advantages ofbe AC over
step down usinga DC (step(step
transformer). up or
up step
or stepdown down Current
For one versus
completetimecycle cycle
cycle
Voltage
For one versus
complete time square
square
Current
The square
root-mean- current
current current The mean-square
square
Voltage mean-square
root- voltage
 Easy
Easy totobebe transformed For one complete cycle For one complete The root-mean- The root-
= 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
is the value voltage is the

𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
(stepusingusing
up a transformer).
atransformed
step transformer).
down cycle the
square the
isvalue
current valueofof of is the
mean-square voltage value is the
cycle
issquare current mean-square
(step up oror step down
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
• Easier
Easier convert
to convert from from the current
the current in in value value of the
of the
𝑃𝑃 = 𝐼𝐼 𝑉𝑉
Easier to convert from

Easy
using  AC
to be DC
tototransformed ACFor
AC one complete cycle For one complete The
is
the root-mean-
value
current ofin Thethe root- voltage OR
𝐼𝐼𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
using aatransformer).
transformer). isthe
an the AC value circuit of anvoltagevoltage
voltage
isisthe
inthean
𝑃𝑃 = 𝑉𝑉=𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅
to DC than from an AC circuit voltage

of 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 =
(step up DC
or than
step from
down DCDC to to cycle square current mean-square
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
than from DC to AC. Easier toto convert from AC the
AC current
circuit in
that value an of
AC the circuit
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
 Easier to convert from AC thethat current havein value circuit OR

in an𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
that
willwill ACAC ofcircuit
the thatthat
𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑉𝑉= 𝐼𝐼 𝑉𝑉
AC. is the value ofhavevoltage is the

𝑅𝑅
using AC.a transformer). an AC circuit voltage in an

in𝐼𝐼 OR
than from DC to will have the that will have

𝑅𝑅
AC circuit voltage in an
𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟==
totoDC than from DC to
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
to generate. anthe same

the same will have
will have
DCEasier to generate.
𝑉𝑉 = 𝐼𝐼
•  Easier to convert from AC the

that current
will have in value
AC of
circuit the that
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
= 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅
Easier to generate. AC.Easier

that
same will
heating have AC the circuit
same that
heat- Forseries series
 AC.It can be transmitted at an heating
AC heating
circuit effect effect same
voltage same heating
an heating OR
can be transmitted at
the same will have inthe

𝐼𝐼 OR= 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
DC
Easier Itthan
to from
generate. DC to connection:
connection:
OR𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
thethe𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
  to Easier to generate. the
effect
as same
a as
DC a DC
circuit.
a DC circuit. will
ing have
effect effect
effect as thea as
DC
as a DC aFor series
𝑉𝑉 For ==𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
• It can be transmitted high

at high
bevoltage
high voltage
voltage andand low that
heating willas have AC
same circuit
heating that For series
  AC.
ItItcan betransmitted
transmitted atatlow heatingeffect
circuit. effect same
circuit.
DC heating connection:
circuit.
circuit.
current over long
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
 Easier
high
cancurrent
voltage generate.
and
overlow long the
as samecircuit. will effect have a the connection:
For series
𝑉𝑉 = 𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅
and low current over long

high
todistances
voltage and asaaDC DC circuit. effectas as aDC DC For series
distances
Itcurrent distances
can beover with
transmitted at less
with lowlessenergyenergy heating effect same
circuit. heating
with less energylost. current overlong long circuit. connection:
lost.lost. as a DC circuit. as
= (𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 )2 𝑅𝑅 2
OROR
(𝐼𝐼connection:
parallel connection:
𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑃𝑃 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ) 𝑅𝑅
high voltage
distances with and lesslowenergy For parallel connection:
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
2
 distances
High with
frequency less usedenergy in OR OR where where
2
circuit.
For𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
 High frequency used in
𝑰𝑰𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝑰𝑰𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓
= =
current
lost. over long OR
𝑽𝑽𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
•
High frequency usedlost. in AC makes it OR

𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 ==(𝐼𝐼(𝐼𝐼 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ) )𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅
AC makes suitable
√𝟐𝟐 √𝟐𝟐effect
Forparallel
parallel connection:
𝑽𝑽𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓 a=DC
𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓
AC makes it suitable for for

2
𝑰𝑰 𝑽𝑽 =
 distances withitless energy OR where

2
High frequency used in

𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓
𝑰𝑰 =
2
OR where For parallel connection:

suitable for motors.

 High frequency used in
𝑰𝑰 = 𝑽𝑽 √𝟐𝟐
motors.
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 √𝟐𝟐
𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓Where
𝑉𝑉
motors.
𝑽𝑽 𝑉𝑉
lost.
√𝟐𝟐
AC OR
= 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 For 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝐼𝐼connection:
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
For parallel
2
Where
√𝟐𝟐
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑽𝑽𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑽𝑽Where 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
ACmakes
makesititsuitable suitablefor
𝑽𝑽 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
= )=𝑅𝑅 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓 2
for OR where
𝑰𝑰 = 𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓 = √𝟐𝟐
 High frequency used in OR

𝑰𝑰 = 𝑅𝑅
motors.
𝑰𝑰 = 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅
OR
𝑽𝑽𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 √𝟐𝟐
=𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
motors.
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑹𝑹 𝑽𝑽 𝑽𝑽 𝑰𝑰= 𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝑹𝑹 𝑹𝑹
𝑹𝑹 Where 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
Where
𝑽𝑽√𝟐𝟐 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
AC makes it suitable for

𝑰𝑰 = 𝑽𝑽 𝑽𝑽𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓𝒓 =𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎=connection:
= 𝑅𝑅
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝑹𝑹 𝑹𝑹 2 𝑅𝑅
motors.
𝑹𝑹
𝑽𝑽𝑽𝑽
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 ==𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝑰𝑰√𝟐𝟐
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑹𝑹 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑽𝑽𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 =
𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝑅𝑅
𝑹𝑹 𝑽𝑽𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝑰𝑰𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑹𝑹
18 18
18
18
18
17
3.9 Photoelectric Effect
18
3.9 3.9 Photoelectric
Effect
Photoelectric EffectOPTIcaL PHENOmENa
ENERGy RadIaTION 3.9 Photoelectric EffectPHOTOELEcTRIc OPTIcaL PHENOmENa EFFEcT OPTICAL PHENOMENA SPEcTRa
ENERGyENERGY RadIaTION PHOTOELEcTRIc
Theory EFFEcT OPTIcaL
Einstein’s equation PHENOmENa SPEcTRa Emission
RADIATION
3.9 Photoelectric Effect PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT absorption SPECTRA
ENERGy
The energy radiated by hot Photoelectric RadIaTION
Theory effect: This Theory is the PHOTOELEcTRIc
Einstein’s
E = WoOPTIcaL +equation
Ek(max) PHENOmENa EFFEcT absorption
An atomic Emission
An atomic SPEcTRa
Einstein’s equation Absorption Emission
The energy radiated process
Photoelectric whereby electrons
effect: This is the E = W are ejected Theory Einstein’s equation An atomic absorption Emission
objects is liberated the
by hotin ENERGy RadIaTION o + Ek(max)
PHOTOELEcTRIc EFFEcT emission spectrum SPEcTRa
The energy radiated by hot from ob- Photoelectric
a metal when effect:light This of ais the where process whereby EAn= Wabsorption
o
+ Eatomic
k(max)
An atomic absorption An atomic emission spec-
Theprocess
energy whereby
radiated electrons
surface are
by hot ejected
Photoelectric effect: This is the E = W o + E k(max) An atomic An atomic
objects
form is liberated
of separate in the
packets of suitable frequency
electrons are is incident
ejected from on a that
metal
Theory surface when light of absorption
spectrum
Einstein’s equation emission
is is spectrum
formed when
absorption Emission [U43]: Pse check.
jects is liberated infrom the a form metal surface whenprocess light ofwhereby a where electrons spectrum is formed when Commented
trum is formed when certain
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
form of separate packets of objects

suitable surface.
is a
liberated
frequency suitable
in
is the frequency
incident on is incident
that on that surface.are ejected Where
hc spectrum is is formed absorption
when emission Commented
spectrum
Commented [U43]: [G44]:
Pse check. It is exactly like in exam guide lines
energy
of called quanta.
separate packets Theof energyenergy radiated by hot Photoelectric
from a metal effect:
surface This
when lightis the
of a E = W
where oformed
+ E k(max) when certain An atomic
certain An atomic
frequencies of frequencies of electromag-
Threshold frequency ( fo ) is the OR E 
surface. packets of process suitable whereby frequency electrons

is incident
hc are  ejected Commented
when [G44]: It is exactly like in exam guide lines
Commented [U43]: Pse ch
energyA called
quantum
called quanta.
quanta. of energy formisof separate
objects is liberated
minimum in the
frequency
Threshold light
frequency tof )Eis the minimum
on that formed
fre- certainwhen certain frequencies
spectrum of
absorption is emission
electromagnetic
is formedspectrum
radiation netic radiation are emitted
Threshold frequency ( of from ) is the OR
a needed
metal (surface when light of a
o
fsurface. where
energy called quanta. o  hc formed when Commented [G44]: It is ex
A quantum
called photon.of energy isform of separate
minimum electrons
emit frequencypackets
quencyoffrom light
ofoflight suitable certain
needed
aneeded
Threshold to emit
frequency
tometalfrequencyelectrons
is incident(from certain
is thatthe certain
OR 
Efrequencies frequencies
of electromagnetic
spectrum
of that pass iscertain
isthroughformed
a medi-whendue to an atom’s electrons Commented [U43]: Pse ch
maximum fo )aon kinetic
OR
surface. 
calledA quantum
photon.
The energy ofofa photon energyA emit
quantum electrons
calledof metal fromsurface.
energy aiscertain surface. metal energy electromagnetic
hc of electromagnetic
radiation
certain are frequencies Commented [G44]: It is ex
energyis:is called
Workquanta. )minimum
is the minimum frequency
maximum of light( E K (max)
needed ) to frequencies
kinetic formed um when certain
(e.g. a cold gas) are ofmaking a transition from a
surface.
function ( W o Threshold
emit electrons frequency from a ( f o
certain ) is the
metal
OR
MaximumE  kinetic energy (
photon.
The energy called photon.
energy electron ( EK (max) ) electromagnetic
radiation radiation
that
kinetic frequencies
emitted
are due to an of electromagnetic
quantum of that
function energy
(W
Work is the
an )function minimumminimum
in( the )metal
W frequencyisenergy
the minimum of light energy
needed that
to maximum certain absorbed. frequencies ofhigh-energy state to a lower
o surface. 2
Theenergy needs
energy of to
a be
photon emitted
is:
electron in
that ananelectron inemit from
the
Workthemetal the
metal
o metal
electrons
function needsfrom be )aemitted
iscertain m
the minimum v
e metal
from max the energy
Eradiationpass( E
) K (max) )
that emitted
through electromagnetic
due to
a atom's an
electrons radiation are energy state.
called photon. (toWE K (max) of electromagnetic
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉of a photon is:A Work
The energy of a photon is: surface. o K (max) 2 maximum kinetic frequencies

needs to be emitted
metal surface.
fromenergysurface.
the metal that an mein radiation emitted due
The energy of The theenergy of
of a photon intensity on the
v maxthe2 metal energy pass mediumthrough a atom's electrons
a making a transition
electromagnetic that radiation are to an
(max)
is: Work function E K( electron minimum ( EK (max)2 )(e.g.
surface. needs to be emitted W o )is from
the the metal m v
energy the photoelectric effect. The number of 2 medium e max a pass through
a transition atom's electrons Commented [G45]: Better to include it
radiation
The The energyof isof the of intensity the cold (e.g. are from a high-energy
𝑬𝑬 = 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉 Effect
is Effect energy
of intensity on that
surface. onan the electron
work in
photoelectric the metal
function ef- E K (max) 
gas)2 making radiation thata emitted due to an
electrons
photoelectric emitted
effect. The per number unit time
of is m2 v max CommentedCommented[G45]: [U46]:
Better toFormatting:
include it pse standardise font type,
radiation
where
where N is
Nisisthe the ofnumberenergy
proportional of The
fect. the
the needs
numberEffect
intensity to
of be
ofincident
of work emitted
electrons intensity from the
emitted onpermetal unit
the E gas)
cold absorbed. m v 2eare from astatemedium
high-energy
pass lower
to athrough
(e.g. aa atom's a transition
makingelectrons bold/not bold, etc. with all equivalent items, including paragrap
function
𝑬𝑬 = 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵
E (max) = e max
𝑬𝑬radiation
=Effect
𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
electrons emittedto per unit

surface. time
photoelectric is The of K
K(max)
text, text in tables, headings,pse standardise
Commented
sub-headings, etc. type, size,
font[G45]: Better
radiation light. is time proportional to theeffect. intensity
W0  h of fnumber
0 incident absorbed. cold
a lower gas) high-energy
from a bold/not
whereof Nphotons
photons number
is theemitted. emitted. ofThe proportional
energy to the
of the of incident
Effect of intensity on the work function 2 2 state energy tomedium state. (e.g. are a making bold, etc. with all equivalent items, including paragraph
a transition
𝑬𝑬 =number
𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵The
Effect light. of frequency on the electrons emitted per unit time is Commented [U46]: Forma
text, text in tables, headings, sub-headings, etc.
where
light. N is the number of photoelectric toWeffect.
the h fThe
0  intensity 0 number
of incident absorbed.
state. a lower Commented
bold/not [G45]: Better
photons emitted. The of Work function Commented [G47]: Better include it bold, etc. with all equ
𝑬𝑬 =intensity
is𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵
radiation photoelectric effect.proportional work function

energy cold gas) are from stateatohigh-energy
Effect of text, text in tables, headings, s
is frequency on maximum
The power of the radiating
kinetic energy electrons
light.
photoelectrons
theemitted OR per unit time is W  h f Commented [U46]: Format
The power photons
of where the
photoelectric emitted. Effect
effect.of ofthe frequency maximum onis the photoelectric W00 = h 0f 0 absorbed. energy
state state.
toCommented
a lower [G47]: Better include itbold/not bold, etc. with all equi
is number ofThe proportional
Effect of toOR the
frequency
intensity ofon incident the
𝑬𝑬 = 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵
Nlinearly
the proportional to the frequency of
sources: effect.
kinetic energy of the photoelectrons The maximum is kinetic energy
hc of the W Commented [G50]: Better in
text,
thistext
wayin tables, headings, su
The radiating
power sources: of thephotons the incident radiation.light. photoelectric effect. OR0  h f0 energy state. Commented [G47]: Better
linearlyemitted. photoelectrons
proportional to the frequency is linearly
of W0 The maximum
proportional to the
Significance Effect
kinetic of
energy
photoelectric frequency
of the hc photoelectrons
 0
on the is OR Commented [G50]: Better in this way
radiating The power
the incident of of
radiation.
frequency thethe of the incident radiation.
photoelectric
linearly proportional Weffect.
0  to the maximum
Thefrequency Commented [G47]: Better i
effect. The photo-electric effect 
of OR
hc Commented [G48]: Better include it
Commented [G50]: Better
0
∆𝑵𝑵
Significance
radiating sources: of the photoelectric
kinetic
the energy
incident of
radiation. the photoelectrons is W 
establishes
power of the thequantum theory and 0 Commented [U49]: Pse standardise appearance of all
Commented [G48]: Better include it
∆𝒕𝒕
Theeffect. photo-electric
𝑷𝑷 = sources:
𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
The Significance ofeffect
Significance the photoelectric frequency
to thephotoelectric effect. of 0
∆𝑵𝑵
nature proportional
of light. of the hc equivalent items, including hyphens Commented
or not – variations
[G50]:seen.Better i
establishes
radiating sources:the quantum
The photo-electric theory
the
effect. incident and The radiation.
effect photo-electric
establishes effect the W0  Commented [U49]: Pse standardise appearance Commented of all
[G48]: Better
𝑷𝑷 = ∆𝒕𝒕 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
∆𝑵𝑵 illustrates the particlelinearly
illustrates the particle nature of light.

Significance
establishes the of quantum photoelectric and 0 equivalent items, including hyphens or not – variations seen.
quantum theory and illustrates thethe particle
theory na- Commented [U49]: Pse st
∆𝒕𝒕
𝑷𝑷 = 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
ture of light. effect.

illustrates Thethe photo-electric
particle nature of effect
light. Commented
equivalent items, [G48]: Better
including hy i
∆𝑵𝑵
establishes the quantum theory and Commented [U49]: Pse sta

19
𝑷𝑷 = ∆𝒕𝒕 𝒉𝒉𝒉𝒉
illustrates the particle nature of light. equivalent items, including hyp

19
19
19
4 Revision Questions- Set 1
4.1 Newton’s Laws
Strategies for problem-solving questions on Newton’s Laws
Step 1: Read the problem as many times as needed.
Step 2: Sketch the problem, if necessary.
Step 3: Draw a force diagram for the situation.
Step 4: Draw a free-body diagram and resolve the forces into component on the Cartesian plane.
Step 5: List all the given information and convert these to SI units, if necessary.
Step 6: Determine which physical principle can be used to solve the problem.
Step 7: Use the principle to solve the question, often by substituting numerical values into an appropriate
equation.
Step 8: Check that the question has been answered and that the answer makes sense.
19
Worked Example 1
A block of mass M is held stationary by a rope of negligible mass. The block rests on a frictionless plane that
is inclined at 30o to the horizontal.
Worked Example 1
A block of mass M is held stationary by a rope of negligible mass. The block rests on a frictionless
plane that is inclined at 30o to the horizontal.
1.1 State Newton’s first law of motion in words.
1.2 Draw a free-body diagram that shows all the forces acting on the block.
1.3 Calculate the magnitude of the gravitational force of the block when the force in the rope is 8 N.
1.1 State Newton’s first law of motion in words.
1.2 Draw
1.4 Now the rope a free-body
is cut and thediagram
block that shows
slides all theon
down forces
the acting on the
inclined block. reaching the horizontal rough
plane,
1.3 Calculate the magnitude of the gravitational force of the block when the force in the rope-2is 8 N.
surface and then continuing to move with constant acceleration of magnitude 1,5 m·s .
1.4 Now the rope is cut and the block slides down on the inclined plane, reaching the horizontal rough
Statesurface and then continuing to move words.acceleration of magnitude 1,5 m·s .

withinconstant -2
1.4.1 Newton’s second law of motion Commented [U53]: Pse ch
as the editor is an English langu
1.4.1 State Newton’s second law of motion in words. There are many problems with
specialist must check the revis
1.4.2 Calculate the acceleration
1.4.2 Calculate of the
the acceleration of block while
the block whileititis
is sliding down
sliding down thethe inclined
inclined plane.plane. ensure it is also technically cor
Comment applies to all sugges
1.4.4. Calculate the coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the surface.
1.4.4 Calculate the coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the surface.
Solutions for Worked Example

Solutions 1 Example 1
for Worked
1.1 An object continues

1.1 An objectincontinues
a state inofa rest
state or uniform
of rest motion
or uniform (motion
motion (motion with
with aaconstant
constant velocity),
velocity), unless unless
it it is
acted on by anisunbalanced
acted on by an(net or resultant)
unbalanced force. force.
(net or resultant)
1.3 1.3 To calculate

To calculate the gravitational
the gravitational force, we canforce, we can use
use the
the parallel
parallel component: component:
𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 𝜃𝜃
We do not have the component, but we can calculate this

We do not have the component, but we can
by applying Newton's second law in the x direction. We
calculate this by applying Newton’s second law in
are going to calculate only the magnitude, because the
the x direction. We are going to calculate only the
direction is known.
magnitude, because the direction is known.
21
On the x-axis:
On the x-axis:
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
𝑇𝑇 − 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0
𝑇𝑇 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 0
8 − 𝐹𝐹⃗ 𝑔𝑔 sin 30𝑜𝑜 = 0
8
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =
sin 30𝑜𝑜
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 16 𝑁𝑁
1.4.1 If a resultant force acts on a body, it will cause the body to accelerate in the direction of the
resultant force. The acceleration of the body will be directly proportional to the resultant force and
inversely proportional to the mass of the body.
201.4.2 Free body diagram, coordinate system and components. Commented [G54]: Better like this
Applying Newton’s second law of motion

𝐹𝐹⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 𝑜𝑜
8 −𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹⃗ 𝑔𝑔 sin 30 =0
𝑇𝑇 − 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0
8
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin𝑜𝑜 𝜃𝜃 = 0
𝑇𝑇 − sin 30
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
8− =𝐹𝐹⃗16 𝑁𝑁 30𝑜𝑜 = 0
𝑔𝑔 sin
8
1.4.1
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = If a𝑜𝑜 resultant force acts on a body, it will cause the body to accelerate in the direction of the resultant
sin 30
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 16force.
𝑁𝑁 The acceleration of the body will be directly proportional to the resultant force and inversely
resultant force. The acceleration of the body will be directly proportional to the resultant force and
proportional to the mass of the body.
inversely proportional to the mass of the body.
1.4.2
resultantFree
force.body diagram, coordinate
The acceleration system
of the body will and components.
be directly proportional to the resultant force and
inversely proportional to the mass of the body. Applying Newton’s second law of motion
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
Applying
ApplyingitNewton’s
in the x direction
second law of motion
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
𝑜𝑜
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚30
𝑜𝑜
𝑎𝑎⃗Applying
= 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔30 it in the x direction
𝑜𝑜
𝑎𝑎⃗𝐹𝐹⃗= = 9,8𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠30
⃗
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
= 4.9 m𝑜𝑜∙ 𝑠𝑠=−2𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
𝑎𝑎⃗𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚30
𝑎𝑎⃗ = 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔30𝑜𝑜
𝑎𝑎⃗ = 9,8 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠30𝑜𝑜
𝑎𝑎⃗ = 4.9 m ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −2
1.4.3
1.4.3
Free body diagram Applying Newton’s second law of motion
Free
1.4.3
body diagram
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ (1)
⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁 There is only one force acting on the block,
Free body diagram Applying Newton’s
which is the frictionalsecond
force: law of motion
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ (2)
𝐹𝐹⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ (1)
⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁 𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾𝑅𝑅𝑁𝑁 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (3)
There is only one force acting on the block,
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 The normal force is unknown and we need to
which is the frictional force:
calculate it.
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ (2)
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (3)
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 The normal force is unknown and we need to
calculate it.
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
working
working in
in the
the y-direction:
y-direction: Commented
Commented [U55]: [U55]: Pse
Psecheck
check––perhaps
perhaps“Work
“Workininthe
thedire
dire
ofofy.”
y.”
Pse
Psecheck
checkall
allsuch
suchinstances.
working in Working in the y-direction:
thevertical
working
In the y-direction:
in thedirection,
y-direction:
the
instances.
In the vertical direction, the acceleration
acceleration is
is zero,
zero, therefore
therefore we
we can
can apply
apply Newton’s
Newton’s first
first law of
ofCommented
law22 [U55]: Pse[U55]:
Commented check – perhaps
Pse check“Work in the“Work
– perhaps direction
in the dire
of y.” of y.”
motion.
motion. Pse check all such instances.
Pse check all such instances.
In thevertical
In the vertical
In the vertical
direction, direction,
the the is
acceleration
direction, acceleration
zero, is
the acceleration thereforeiswe
zero, therefore
can we
zero, therefore apply applywe
canNewton’s canlaw
first
Newton’sapply Newton’s
of law
first of first law of motion.
motion.motion.
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏(𝒚𝒚) = ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗ 22
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏(𝒚𝒚) = 𝟎𝟎
𝑵𝑵
𝑵𝑵 +
⃗⃗⃗ + ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈 = 𝟎𝟎
𝒈𝒈 = 𝟎𝟎
=⃗𝑭𝑭⃗⃗𝟎𝟎
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏(𝒚𝒚) Taking ⃗ ⃗𝟎𝟎⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 + ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈 the
= positive
𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏𝒏(𝒚𝒚)as =⃗⃗⃗ ⃗+
𝑵𝑵 𝟎𝟎⃗y-positive⃗⃗ direction
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈 = 𝟎𝟎
Taking
Taking as
aspositive
positive the y-positive
the direction
y-positive direction Commented
Commented [U56]:
[U56]: Pse
Psecheck.
check.
Commented
Commented [G57]:
[G57]: Beter
Beterlioke
liokethis
this
Taking 𝑵𝑵
as −positive
Taking
𝑵𝑵 − 𝑭𝑭𝑭𝑭𝒈𝒈 =
= the𝑵𝑵
y-positive
as𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎positive
𝑵𝑵 − the =
− 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎direction
y-positive direction Commented [U56]: Pse[U56]:
Commented check. Pse check.
𝒈𝒈
Commented [G57]: Beter
Commented [G57]:
lioke this
Beter lioke this
𝑵𝑵 − 𝑭𝑭𝒈𝒈 =
∴∴𝟎𝟎−
𝑵𝑵 𝑵𝑵 −
𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 𝑵𝑵
=−𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 = 𝟎𝟎
𝑵𝑵𝑭𝑭=
𝑵𝑵 = =
𝒈𝒈 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 (4)
(4)
∴ 𝑵𝑵 = Substituting
𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎
∴ 𝑵𝑵 = 𝒎𝒎𝒎𝒎 44 in
Substituting
Substituting
4 3:
in
in 3:
3:(4) (4)
Substituting
𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚4=
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =in𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
Substituting 3: 4 in 3:Hence
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 Hence 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 =
= 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝜇𝜇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
Substituting HenceHence
𝐾𝐾 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚Hence
𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =Substituting 𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 𝑔𝑔 = 𝑎𝑎𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 𝑔𝑔 = 𝑎𝑎
Substituting
𝜇𝜇Substituting
Substituting
𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾(9,8) = 1,5
(9,8) = 1,5 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 =
= 0,153
0,153
𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾1,5
𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 (9,8) Exercise
= (9,8) =11𝜇𝜇
Exercise 𝐾𝐾 = 0,153
1,5 𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 = 0,153
ExerciseA 1block
AExercise of1mass
block of mass 1010 kg
kg isis pulled
pulled to
to the
the right
right at
at constant
constant velocity
velocity with
with aa force
force of
of magnitude
magnitude 30
30 N
N that
that
acts at an angle of 37 oo
with the horizontal.
acts at an angle of 37 with the horizontal.
A block A
of block
mass of10mass
kg is 10
pulled
kg istopulled
the right at constant
to the velocity velocity
right at constant with a force
with of magnitude
a force 30 N that
of magnitude 30 N that
acts at an angle
acts of angle
at an 37o with theo with
of 37 horizontal.
the horizontal. ⃗⃗𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭⃗⃗ =
= 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
37o
⃗⃗ = 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝑭𝑭
37o𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ = 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
10
10 kg
kg
37o 37o 21
10 kg 10 kg
1.1
1.1 Draw
Draw aa free-body
free-body diagram
diagram with
with all
all the
the force
force action
action on
on the
the block.
block. Use
Use aa Cartesian
Cartesian plane
plane and
and
uting
) = 1,5 𝜇𝜇𝐾𝐾 = 0,153
se 1
Exercise 1
k of mass 10 kg is pulled to the right at constant velocity with a force of magnitude 30 N that
an angle of 37o A block
with of mass
10 kg is pulled to the right at constant velocity with a force of magnitude 30 N that acts at an
the horizontal.
angle of 37 with the horizontal.
o
⃗⃗ = 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝑭𝑭
37o
10 kg
Draw
1.1 diagram
Draw a free-body withaall
free-body diagram
the force action with
on the all Use
block. the aforce action
Cartesian onand
plane the block. Use a Cartesian plane and represent
represent the component
theof component
the force. of the force.
Calculate the magnitude and direction of the normal force.
1.2 Calculate
Calculate the coefficient of friction. the magnitude and direction of the normal force.
The force is removed and the block comes to rest after a time. Calculate the acceleration of
1.3 forceCalculate
the block after the the coefficient
has been removed of friction.
if the frictional force remains constant.
1.4 The force is removed and the block comes to rest after a time. Calculate the acceleration of the block
after the force has been removed if the frictional force remains
23 constant.
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
A block, of mass 20of kg,

A block, massis20pulled upwards
kg, is pulled upwardsbybyforce alonga plane
force 𝐹𝐹⃗ along a plane with
with an an 30
incline incline
o
to the30 o
to the horizontal. It
horizontal.
accelerates along the incline plane at 2 m·s . The surface of the incline exerts a friction force on the block.
It accelerates along the incline plane -22 m·s-2. The surface of the incline exerts a friction force on the
at
block.
2.1 Draw a diagram showing all the forces acting on the block (force diagram) as it moves up the incline.
2.1 aDraw
Also draw a diagram
free-body showingfor
diagram all the
theforces acting
block. on the block
Represent the(force diagram)
forces as Cartesian
on the it moves up the
plane and resolve
incline. Also draw a free-body diagram for the block. Represent the forces on the Cartesian
the gravitational force into components.
plane and resolve the gravitational force into components.
2.2 Calculate
2.2 the component
Calculate of the gravitational
the component force
of the gravitational exerted
force exertedon theblock
on the block parallel
parallel toincline.
to the the incline.
2.3 Calculate the normal force.
2.3 Calculate the normal force.
2.4 Calculate the magnitude of the friction force if the magnitude of 𝐹𝐹⃗ is equal to 200 N.
2.4 Calculate the magnitude of the friction force if the magnitude of is equal to 200 N.
2.5 Calculate the coefficient of kinetic friction for the block.
2.5 Calculate the coefficient of kinetic friction for the block.
4.2 Momentum
4.2
and Impulse
Momentum and Impulse
Momentum and impulse problem solving strategy

Momentum and impulse problem solving strategy
1 Read 1the Read

problem as many
the problem as time
many as you
time as need to; to;
you need then draw
then drawaasketch ordiagram
sketch or diagramof of
thethe situation described
situation Commented [U58]: Formatting: Pse
described if not provided. all equivalent items, including line spaci
if not provided. etc.
2
From the reading, collect the data and write it in symbol form (not only numbers are part of the
data) e.g. the object starts moving from rest means the initial speed is zero. Commented [U59]: Not understood
2 3 Draw
From the a freecollect
reading, body diagram
the datafor each
andobject
writeand
it inclearly
symboldefine the (not
form system younumbers
only are going toare
work with.
part of the data) e.g.[G60]: It could be inclu
Commented
 If possible, choose a system that is isolated ( F net  0 ) and closed (m = constant). If the
the object starts moving from rest means the initial speed is zero.
interactions are sufficiently short and intense you can ignore external forces.
 If it is not possible to choose an isolated system, try to divide the problem into parts (scenarios). Commented [U61]: Pse introduce b
3 Draw a free body diagram for each object and clearly define the system you are going to work statement
Comment
to ensure legibility.
with. applies to all such instances.
4 Select the law (principle), theorem, equation or formula that will answer your question.
Commented [U62]: Formatting: pse
numbers, including font type, font size,
• If possible,
 If choose a systemrepresentation
the mathematical that is isolated ( F net in
is based = 0the) and
law closed (m = constant).
of conservation If the interactions
of momentum alignment, etc. Repetitive problem seen
p
are sufficiently
 initial 
short and
p , 
write it in component form.
finalintense you can ignore external forces.
5 Substitute the values into the equation or formula (the system of units must be homogeneous). Commented [U63]: Pse check all sc
• If it is not possible to choose an isolated system, try to divide the problem into parts (scenarios).
the text, as the editor will not know all o
6 Check your answer
 Is the value of the answer reasonable?

 Is the unit correct? Commented [G64]: I did the correc
worked example 1
22
24
4 Select the law (principle), theorem, equation or formula that will answer your question.
• If the mathematical representation is based in the law of conservation of momentum
(∑ p initial
= ∑ p final ), write it in component form.
5 Substitute the values into the equation or formula (the system of units must be homogeneous).
6 Check your answer
• Is the value of the answer reasonable?
• Is the unit correct?
Worked example 1
Trolley A, with a mass of 120 kg, is moving at 20 m·s-1 ; it collides head-on with trolley B, with a mass of 150
kg, moving at 30 m·s-1 in the opposite direction. If A rebounds at 25 m·s-1:
1.1 State the law of conservation of momentum in words.

Trolley A, with a mass of 120 kg, is moving at 20 m·s-1 ; it collides head-on with trolley B, with a mass
1.2 150
of kg, moving at 30 m·s in the opposite direction. If A rebounds at 25 m·s -1:
-1
Trolley A, withCalculate the
a mass of 120 rebound
kg, is movingvelocity of-1 B.
at 20 m·s ; it collides head-on with trolley B, with a mass
of 150 kg, moving at 30 m·s-1 in the opposite direction. If A rebounds at 25 m·s -1:
1.1 State the law of conservation of momentum in words.
1.3 Calculate
1.2 Calculate the velocity
the rebound impulse of of
B. the force exerted by trolley B on trolley A.
1.1 1.3
State the law the
Calculate of conservation of force
impulse of the momentum in by
exerted words.
trolley B on trolley A.
1.2 Calculate the rebound velocity of B.
1.3Solution:
Calculate the impulse of the force exerted by trolley B on trolley A.
Solution:
Solution:
data
Data
data
ma = 120 kg
ma =𝒗𝒗
⃗⃗ 120 kg m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right
= 20
𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊
−1
⃗⃗𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 m
𝒗𝒗 =B20 m · 𝑠𝑠kg
= 150 to the right
mB =𝒗𝒗 150 kg = 30 m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the left

⃗⃗(𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃)𝑩𝑩
⃗⃗(𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃)𝑩𝑩 = 30 m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 −1
𝒗𝒗 to the left
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂) = 25 m · 𝑠𝑠 to the left
𝒗𝒗
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂) = 25 m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the left

𝒗𝒗
⃗⃗(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂)𝑩𝑩 =?
𝒗𝒗
⃗⃗(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂)𝑩𝑩 =?
𝒗𝒗
1.1 The total linear momentum of an isolated system is constant.
1.11.1
TheThe total linear momentum
it is veryof an isolated system is constant.
total linear momentum of an isolated system is constant.
1.2 When we work in Physics important to represent a problem using a diagram; here we are
working with vector quantities, so it is important to indicate direction with all elements (positive or
1.2 When we work in Physics it is very important to represent a problem using a diagram; here we are
negative)
1.2 When
working withwe work
vector in Physics
quantities, it is
so it is very important
important to indicate to represent
direction with alla elements
problem(positive
using aordiagram; here we are working
negative)
with vector quantities,Positive
so it direction
is important to indicate direction with all elements (positive or negative)
VA = 20 m.sPositive direction VA = 25 m.s-1


-1
y VB = 30 m.s-1
VA = 25 m.s-1
y VA = 20 m.s-1 VB = 30 m.s-1

A B A B
A B A B
Before After x
Before After x
In order to find the velocity of trolley B after the collision, the law of conservation of momentum must
be applied. Learners' attention must be addressed to the general characteristics of this kind of problem,
In order
In to find
i.e.order
when anthe
to find velocity of trolleyof
the velocity
interaction between B trolley
twoafter theBcollision,
bodies afterplace.
takes the thecollision,
law of conservation
Firstly, wethehavelaw ofof conservation
momentum
to identify mustofwe
which bodies momentum must be applied.
be applied.
are going Learners'
to considerattention
as ourmust be addressed
“system”. to theimportant
This is a very general characteristics of this kind
step, since momentum of problem,
is only conserved
i.e.Learners’
when
in closed andattention
an interaction
isolated musttwo
between
systems. beIn addressed
bodies
this problem, to the
takes place.
trolleys Ageneral
Firstly, weBhave
and characteristics
to identify
integrate of this
which Once
the system. bodies kind of problem, i.e. when an
wewe
have
are identified
going to consider
the as of
bodies ourthe
“system”.
system, This
we is a very
have to important
identify the step, since between
interaction momentum the is only conserved
bodies of the system
interaction
in closed and
between
isolated with
two bodies
systems. In this
takes trolleys
problem,
place. AFirstly,
and
we have to identify which bodies we are going to consider
and the interaction external bodies. Learners know thatBwhen
integrate the system.
we have any kind Once we have a
of interaction,
identified the bodies of the system, we have to identify the interaction between the bodies
force will appear (as a measurement of the intensity of any particular interaction). During the collision, of the system
andthe thetwo
interaction with external
trolleys interact bodies.
with the surface Learners
where theyknowmovethat when wethe
on, with have anyand,
Earth kindofofcourse,
interaction, a
with each Commented [G65]: corrected
force will appear
other. The forces(as aacting
measurement of the intensity
on each trolley of any particular
are represented in the next interaction).
diagram: During the collision, Commented [U66]: Pse clarify (surface of what?)
the two trolleys interact with the surface where they move on, with the Earth and, of course, with each Commented [G65]: corrected 23
other. The forces acting on each trolley are represented in the next diagram: Commented [U66]: Pse clarify (surface of what?)
25
as our “system”. This is a very important step, since momentum is only conserved in closed and isolated
systems. In this problem, trolleys A and B integrate the system. Once we have identified the bodies of the
system, we have to identify the interaction between the bodies of the system and the interaction with external
bodies. Learners know that when we have any kind of interaction, a force will appear (as a measurement of
the intensity of any particular interaction). During the collision, the twoytrolleys interact with theFsurface where
FBA
AB
they move on, with the Earth and, of course, with each other. The forces acting on eachNtrolleyA are represented NB
in the next diagram:
y y FAB FBAFAB FBA
yy y
NA
FFABABFABNA FFBABAFBA
NB NB A B
yy FAB
FAB FBA
FBA NNAANA NNB BNB
y NNA y FAB NNB B F F F
A
BAAB
A
BA
B B
NA NA A NB BB BNB
AA A
AA BB FgA FgB
A A B B
y FAB FgA FBA FgB x
FgA F x
FFN
gAgAFgA
A NgBBFFgBgB FgB xx x
FgA
FgA FgBFgB xx wA wB
FgA FgA FgB B FgB x x
wA A w A wB wB
wwAw A A wwBw B B
wwA A wwB B  
 wA  wA wB wB The forces FAB and FBA are the forces exerted by the trolleys on each o
The  forces  are  FABthe and F gA FBA are the forces exerted by the F x
gB trolleys on each other during the interaction, so  
The forces FAB and FBA forces exerted by the trolleys trolleys ononeach other during the interaction, so
The forces FFABABFand FFBABA FBA are the forces exerted by the each other
they during
are the
internal interaction,
forces. so
The so forces N A and Nthey
B are so-called “norma
  TheThe The forces
forces forces andand
and are are
arethe the forces
the forcesforces exerted
exerted byby
exerted the the trolleys
by trolleys
the ontrolleys
on each each other
other
on during
during
each thethe
other interaction,
interaction,
during so
the interaction, so are
FF andFF
ABand BA are
the
are theforces
they
forces are exerted
internal
exerted
AB they
byby the are
thetrolleys
forces. internal
The forces
trolleys on 
on forces.
each
each Nother  The
and
Aother
 forces
Nduring
 during   the
B arethe
N and N
A interaction,
so-called are
B “normal
interaction, so-called
so “normal
so forces”, that is, the reaction forces”, that is, the reaction
AN
AB BA
The forces FAB The they
they
andforces Fthey areFare internal
internal
internal
and forces.
FBAforces. forces.
are The
theThe The
forcesforces
forcesforces
exertedN NAN and
and
and
by N NBeach
the are
NBtrolleys
are areso-called
so-called
so-called
on “normal
“normal forces
“normal forces”,exerted
forces”,
forces”, that
thatthatis,by
is, the
is,thethe
the surface
reaction
reaction
reaction where the trolleys move[G67]: on. These Better like two
internal
Theforces
are
BA forces.
exerted ABthe
andby
forces
forces
The the exerted
exerted
forces
surface by
wby
N
where the and trolleys
surface
the trolleys on
where
are move the other
so-called trolleys
on. weach
during
These move
B“normal
two
other
the forces
during
interaction,
on. These
forces”, the
two so interaction,
forces
that are
is, theinsoequilibrium
reaction with
forces exertedBetter likeby
Commented this
 are in
inequilibrium with 
AB B
Nexerted
Nexerted NbyNBby Commented [G67]: this
einternal
internalforces.
forces.The forces
forces
forces
forces
forces and
A Aexerted Bbyare are
the
the so-called
the so-called
surface
surface
surface “normal
Awhere
A “normal
where
where the
the forces”,
theforces”,
trolleys
trolleys
trolleys thatthat
movemove
move is,
is, the
on.the
on.on.reaction
reaction
These
These
These two
twotwo forces
forces
forces are
areare equilibrium
inis,
inequilibrium
equilibrium with
withwithforces Commented [G67]:
xerted by
exerted
they
bythe
are they
internal
the the
thesurface
surface surface
where
are
forces.
gravitational
where the
internal
the
The
where the
trolleys
trolleys
forces.
forces
forcethe
move
move
N
gravitational The
trolleys
applied and
Aon.on.These
N
forces force
byBmove
These
areN
thetwo Earth
two
and
applied
so-called
on.
A forces N
on
forces
by
These
Bare are
the
“normal
trolleys so-called
Earth
two
areininequilibrium A and on
forces”,
forces
equilibrium
“normal
trolleys
B, withthat 
Fwith
arethe
A
and ingravitational
forces”,
is, and
the
F  B,
 that
reaction
 F
equilibrium
. Finally,
Commented gA
Commented
and the F
force
reaction
with
forces
[G67]:
. w
gB Better
[G67]:
applied
Finally,
the
Better A like
by
gravitational
this
like this
Commented
Commented
w
the Earth
Commentedforce
A
[G67]:
[G67]:
on
[U68]: Pse
Better
trolleys
Better
Commented
applied
check.
like
Better this
likelike
A
[U68]: and B,
thisthis Pse check.
F gA
forces exertedforces the
the
by the gravitational
gravitational
the gravitational
exerted
surfacebywhere  force
theforce
force applied
surface
the applied
applied
trolleyswhere bybyby the
the
move the
theEarth
Earth
Earth
trolleys
on. ononon
These trolleys
trolleys
move trolleys
twoon. AAThese
forcesand
Aandand B,
are B,twoFFgAequilibrium
gA
B,
in Fandand
forces
gA gA and Fare
gB
FgBgB
F.gBinFinally,
.with
Finally,
.equilibrium
Finally, forces
forces
forces
with
CommentedwwAw A A [G67]:
Commented
Commented
Commented
Commented
[U68]:
[U68]:
[G67]:
Better like this
[U68]:Pse check.
PsePse
Better check.
like check.
this
and w are the forces Ftrolleys
FgAgAand
applied FFgBthe
by the trolleys
 on the wwother
horizontal  surface
w B .are (sometimes called weights).
tational force
vitational forceapplied
applied
by
The
the gravitational
the
and
the
by
forces
and
and
wthe
byEarth
force
and
the
B are
wwBw
FEarth
gravitational
Earth
AB on
Bapplied
are
are
andon
the
arethe
the
on
trolleys
FBA
forces trolleys
force
theby
forces
trolleys
forces
are
B
theapplied
forces
A
the
applied AA
Earth
applied
and
applied
and
applied
and
by B,
forces
 on byby
B,
the
by
B,exerted
the
trolleys
the
bythe Earth
the
and
and byon
A and
trolleys
trolleys on
trolleyson on
the
gB .B,.Finally,
trolleys
the
on the
Finally,
.trolleys
Finally,
horizontal
Fhorizontal
the A
and
forces
forces
on
and
horizontal
forces
FgB
horizontal
each
surface
.F
B,surface
surface
AAand
gA and
Finally,
surface
w A
Commented
Fand
during
(sometimes
forces
(sometimes
Commented
(sometimes
(sometimes
the
w
gB Finally,
the
wcalled
AB
called
[U68]:
are
called
[U68]:
forces
interaction, the
Pse
Pse
weights).
forces
called weights).
forces
applied
check.
w A
Commented
weights).
weights).
check.
so applied
by
[U68]:
the
force
Commented
by theonPse
trolleys
 trolleys
Pse check. [U68]:
the
check.
horizontal surfac
B
All the external  forces
 F   (  N ,F N
  ,
 F andgA
F ) are in equilibrium, so there is no net external
A , NB , FgA and FgB )) are in
N  N   N
on the horizontal surface A (sometimes
Fcalled weights). Allso the external
arearethetheforces
forcesapplied
applied All
they
by the
bythe external
aretrolleys
the internalon
trolleys forces
forces.
on the ( The
thehorizontal ,
horizontal forces,
B surface gA N A and
surface and A NB are so-called
(sometimes
(sometimes
B ) are gA in equilibrium,
called “normal
calledweights).
gB weights). so there
All the is
forces”, no that is,forces
net
external external
forces
the (force
force
reaction inequilibrium, so
and w B are  the  All
and All the
w
All the
Bthe external
areexternal acting
external
the forces
 forcesforces
forces ( (N
applied N
( AN , ,AN N
by,BBN F,gAWe
BF
,the
,the Fhorizontal
and
gAand
trolleys and
gB
Fon FgB )the)areare ininequilibrium,
) horizontal
are inequilibrium,
equilibrium,
surface there
so(sometimes
sothere
thereisisno
isnononet
netnet external
external
external force
force
forces applied by theon trolleys
the on
trolleys. can then surface
say (sometimes
that: twocalled are in called
forcesweights). weights).
A gA gBgB
xternal forces
external Nforces
NAA, ,acting
forces( (Nequilibrium,
N ,
acting
BB ,F F onexerted
and
gAgAon so
the
and
the
F F by
trolleys.

there )
trolleys.
gBgB ) the
are 
are surface
We
in
isWe in
no can 
equilibrium,
equilibrium,
net
can
where
then  say
external
then
the
so
say so trolleys
that:
there
there
that:forceis is move
nono net
net
acting on. These
external
external
on thesoforce
force trolleys.
acting onWe equilibrium
thecan trolleys.then We with
saycan that: Commented [G67]: Better like this
then say that:
acting
acting (onN on thethe trolleys.
trolleys.
, FgA( appliedN We We
A, F
can
Ncan , thenthen
)Fare say say that:
that:
FgB
All the external All the
forces external A, N forces and gA and in on) are
equilibrium, insoequilibrium,
there
A andisB,noF netthere is noforce
external net external force
the gravitational gA and FgB . Finally, forces w A
Bforce Bby
gB the Earth trolleys Commented [U68]: Pse check.
n the
on thetrolleys.
trolleys.We Wecan can then
then say
saythat: that:
acting on the acting trolleys. onWe thecan trolleys.
then say We can that:then say that: ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = 0 ∑ ⃗⃗
𝑭𝑭 = 0
and w B are the forces applied by the trolleys ∑on the
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗⃗𝑭𝑭 horizontal
𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆
surface (sometimes called weights).
   ∑ ∑ ∑ ⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆
𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 === 00 0 ∑ ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = 0
∑ ⃗
𝑭𝑭⃗⃗ ⃗ = 0 0
𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 (=N A∆𝑝𝑝
𝑭𝑭𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆
All the external∑ forces , ⃗NB ,⃗⃗FgA and FgB ⃗⃗) are in0equilibrium, so there is no net external force
Since: ∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = Since:
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ ∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = ∑ 𝑭𝑭𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = 0 ∑ 𝑭𝑭𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 =
Since: acting
Since:
Since:
Since: ∑∑ on
𝐹𝐹⃗∑ ⃗the
⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹 = ∆𝑡𝑡trolleys.
=
∆𝑝𝑝
=
⃗ ⃗∆𝑝𝑝⃗
∆𝑝𝑝 We can ∆𝑡𝑡 then say that:
∆𝑝𝑝⃗
= =
⃗⃗
∆𝑝𝑝
∆𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∆𝑡𝑡∆𝑡𝑡∆𝑡𝑡
Since: ∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∆𝑡𝑡∆𝑡𝑡 ∆𝑝𝑝⃗ ∆𝑝𝑝⃗
Then: ∆𝑡𝑡
Since: ∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒Then:
=Since: ∑ 𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = ⃗ Commented [U69]: Pse check all for
Commented [U69]: Pse check all formulas and equations i
Then:
Then:
∆𝑡𝑡
Then:
Then: ∆𝑡𝑡
∑ ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆𝒆 = 0 Commented
Commented
text, Commented
including
text, Pse
[U69]:
[U69]:
brackets[U69]:including
check
PsePse
(1 bracketcheck brackets
allall
check
and 2formulas
all (1 bracket
formulas and
formulas
brackets), and
as and
and
equation
equatio
the equa2
edito
Then: Commented
Commented[U69]:
[U69]:Pse
Psecheck nottext,
checkallallformulas text,
formulasand including
text,
and
know including
including
equations
equations
what ininnot know
isbrackets
brackets
brackets
correct and (1what
(1(1bracket
bracket isand
and
bracket
what not.
correct
and and what
22brackets),
brackets),
2 brackets), not.
asasthe
as ede
thethe
Then: Then: ∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 ∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 text,
text,including
includingbrackets
brackets Commented
(1(1bracket and[U69]:
bracketand not
2 2brackets),know
Commented
not not
Pse
brackets),
Content know
as what
know
the
check
as [U69]:
what
what
editor
the
editing all formulas
editor
is
Content
isrequired.
iscorrect
correct
is and
Pseand
correct
will
will
editing
and what
check
and all
what isnot.
what
equations required.
not.
formulas
in and equations
not.
Since: ∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = ∆𝑝𝑝
∆𝑝𝑝⃗ ∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
∆𝑝𝑝 ===
⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 00 0 not
notknow
knowwhat
whatisiscorrect and
text,
correct andwhat
whatnot.
including brackets
not. Content
text, editing
(1including
Content
Content
bracket editing
editing
and is2isrequired.
brackets is (1 bracket
required.
required.
brackets), andeditor
as the 2 brackets),
will as the edito
∆𝑝𝑝
∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛==00
⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0− 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 editing
Content
Content editingisisrequired.
not know what is correct
required. not know what not.
and what is correct and what not.
∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
∆𝑡𝑡
⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 −−=𝑝𝑝− ⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗0𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 == 00 0 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
=
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗ = 0
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 Content editing is required.
Content editing is required.
⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇−−𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ==00 ⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
Then: 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗ ⃗
𝑝𝑝 ==𝑝𝑝= ⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗ 𝑝𝑝⃗
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇= 𝑝𝑝⃗=𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
− 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 =−
𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 0 𝑝𝑝⃗+𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗
𝑝𝑝
𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) +
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗
𝑝𝑝
= 0 = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = ⃗
𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + ⃗
𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ⃗
𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − ⃗
𝑝𝑝 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0Commented [U69]: Pse check all formulas and equations
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴+
𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝑣𝑣+ ⃗𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑝𝑝+ ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) +=𝑚𝑚 == ⃗⃗𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑝𝑝
𝑣𝑣= ⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ++
𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ⃗𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
=𝑝𝑝+⃗𝑚𝑚 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) text, including brackets (1 bracket and 2 brackets), as the edit
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)++𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)= ⃗
𝑝𝑝 𝑚𝑚
=𝑝𝑝⃗𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝐴 ⃗
𝑣𝑣
⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑝𝑝 =
𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑝𝑝⃗ + 𝑝𝑝
+ ⃗ ⃗+ 𝑚𝑚
+𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃗
𝑣𝑣
⃗+𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 =
𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 ⃗
𝑣𝑣
𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
⃗
𝑣𝑣
𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑝𝑝⃗ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = ⃗
𝑝𝑝 not know
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 what is correct and what not.
𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 ⃗𝑣𝑣𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝑝𝑝
𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝐴𝐴⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑚𝑚
=+ 𝑚𝑚 𝐵𝐵𝑚𝑚 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
0𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ==𝑚𝑚 =𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝑚𝑚 ⃗𝑣𝑣𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ++𝑚𝑚
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵𝑚𝑚 ⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) Content editing is required.
⃗
𝑝𝑝 + ⃗
𝑝𝑝 = + ⃗
𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝⃗
𝐵𝐵 + =
𝑝𝑝⃗ ⃗
𝑝𝑝 + ⃗
𝑝𝑝 ⃗ ⃗ ⃗
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣
⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)++𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)==𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
When ++𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) + 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
thesubstituting the data 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝐵𝐵given inwe the 𝑚𝑚problem, ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)we will have: 𝑚𝑚 𝑣𝑣⃗
𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗When
𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)substituting
+𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝐵𝐵𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑝𝑝 ⃗ +data
− =𝑚𝑚𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗given 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
=in the 0 =+𝑚𝑚 problem,𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) +will 𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣 have: + 𝑚𝑚 ⃗
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑚𝑚 ⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣
𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝐴𝐴𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
When
When When substituting
substituting
substituting 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇the
the the data
data data given
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 givengiven inintheinthethe problem,
problem,
problem, wewe wewill
will will have:
have:have: 𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
tuting the
tituting thedata datagiven givenininthe theproblem,
problem, (120)(20) = we ⃗
𝑝𝑝
we will
will
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 have:have:= 𝑝𝑝 ⃗ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
(120)(20) + (150)(−30) + (150)(−30)
(120)(−25) = 150𝑣𝑣
+ (120)(−25) ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎+ + 150𝑣𝑣⃗
When substituting When thesubstituting
data the in data given in we the problem, will have:𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎
we𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
When (120)(20)
(120)(20)
(120)(20) ++given
substituting + 𝑝𝑝⃗(150)(−30)
(150)(−30)
(150)(−30)
𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
the
the+problem, = data
2400= 𝑝𝑝⃗(120)(−25)
−given
=(120)(−25)
(120)(−25)
𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) 4500
=will
=
𝑝𝑝⃗in
+ +
have:
+the
150𝑣𝑣
150𝑣𝑣
𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
−300 ⃗+
150𝑣𝑣 ⃗problem,
⃗150𝑣𝑣
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎 ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎 we willWhen have:substituting the data given in the problem, we will have:
+(150)(−30)
(150)(−30)==(120)(−25) (120)(−25) 2400
𝑚𝑚+𝐴𝐴+𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
150𝑣𝑣150𝑣𝑣 −
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎
⃗− 4500 + =
𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵= −300
𝑣𝑣⃗=𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) + 150𝑣𝑣
= ⃗
𝑚𝑚 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵−1𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
24002400 2400 −
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎4500
− 4500 4500 −300
=−300 −300 ++ ⃗
𝑣𝑣 150𝑣𝑣
+ 150𝑣𝑣
150𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐴𝐴
−1 ⃗ ⃗ = +6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
(120)(20) (120)(20) +
(150)(−30) (150)(−30)
(120)(−25) =+(120)(−25) ⃗ 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠+ 150𝑣𝑣 ⃗
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
4500=+ ⃗= 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 150𝑣𝑣 = +6 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
2400
2400 −−4500 =−300 −300++150𝑣𝑣 150𝑣𝑣 ⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) −1 −1𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑣𝑣 ==𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎+6
=+6 +6𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚∙𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠∙−1 𝑠𝑠 (120)(20) + (150)(−30) = (120)(−25) + 150𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎
2400
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)When
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) ==+6 −+6 4500 2400
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚∙ ∙𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠=
substituting
−1 −1 −300 −the 4500
+ 150𝑣𝑣 data = −300
given +
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) the ⃗problem,
in 150𝑣𝑣 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) we will have:
Since the answer
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) Since =is+6 the
positive,𝑚𝑚 answer∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1we
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = +6 is
can positive,
𝑚𝑚say ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1that wetrolley can say B will thatmove trolley in B the will move direction
original in the original
2400 −of4500 direction
trolley =a −300 of trolley ⃗a
+ 150𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
Since
Since Since thethethe answer
answer answer isispositive,
before ispositive, the collision.
positive, we we we can
can can say
say say that
that that trolley
trolley
trolley BBwill Bwill move
willmovemove ininthe
inthe original
theoriginal
originaldirection
direction
direction ofofoftrolley
trolley
trolley aaa
(120)(20) before the
+ collision.
(150)(−30) = (120)(−25) + 150𝑣𝑣 ⃗ ⃗
𝑣𝑣 = +6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
nswer is positive,
answer is positive, we before we can
can
before say
beforesay the that
the that
the trolley
collision. B will move
trolley B will move in the original direction of trolley a
collision.
collision. in the original 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎 direction of trolley a 𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
Since the answer Since is the answer
positive, 2400 we is
− positive,
can say thatwe can
trolley say B that
will
150𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) trolley
move in B will
the move
original in the
direction original
of direction
trolley a of trolley a
he
hecollision.
collision.
𝑠𝑠 −1−1 𝑣𝑣⃗in𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓the =4500 𝑚𝑚 ∙ =
6original 𝑠𝑠 −1 −300 in the
direction
+ original
of trolley direction a of trolley a
before the𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 collision.= 6 𝑚𝑚 ∙the
before collision. 𝑣𝑣⃗original =direction
+6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ of 𝑠𝑠of −1
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ==6=6𝑚𝑚6
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑚𝑚∙𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠∙−1 𝑠𝑠 −1ininthe inthe the original
original
𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) direction direction trolley
oftrolley trolley aaa Since the answer is positive, we can say that trolley B will move in the
−1−1in the originalSince
𝑠𝑠 in the original direction
direction the ofofanswer
trolley
trolley aais positive, we can say that trolley B will move in the original direction of trolley A before the
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 1.3 −1𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
in = the 6 𝑚𝑚original −1 1.3
∙ 𝑠𝑠 indirection the original of trolley direction a of trolley a before the collision.
Since
collision.
1.31.3 1.3the answer is positive, we can say that trolley B will move in the original direction of trolley a
before the collision.
1.3 1.3 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 in the original direction of trolley a
26 26
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 6 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 in −1 in the theoriginal original direction direction of trolley of trolley a A 262626
1.3 2626
26 26
1.3
1.3
ma = 120 kg
mA = 120 kg 26
−1
⃗⃗𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 = 20 m · 𝑠𝑠
𝒗𝒗 to the right
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂) = 25 m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the left

𝒗𝒗
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 =?
Let’s take positive to the right: Commented [U70]: Pse check.
24𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = ∆𝑝𝑝
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 − 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 )
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂) = 25 m · 𝑠𝑠
𝒗𝒗 to the left
⃗⃗𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 =
𝒗𝒗
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 20 m · 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right
=?
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨(𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂)
𝒗𝒗
Let’s take positive · 𝑠𝑠 −1
= 25tomthe to the left
right: Commented [U70]: Pse check.
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰
Let’s
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 ∆𝑝𝑝 =?positive
= take to the right:
Let’s
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = take
𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓positive
− 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 ) to the right: Commented [U70]: Pse check.
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 120=(−25
∆𝑝𝑝 − 20)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼= =−5400
𝑚𝑚(𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 𝑁𝑁
− ∙𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑖 )
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼= =5400
120𝑁𝑁(−25
∙ 𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
− 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒
20)𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = −5400 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
Worked Example
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 =2 5400 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Commented [U71]: Formatting: pse standardise appearance of
all equivalent items, including font colour.
Two Worked
cars (S andExample
T) are travelling
2 on a straight road. They approach a robot at velocities of 10 m·s
-1
Commented [G72]: Better like this
East and 18 m·s-1 East, respectively, as shown in the sketch below. Ignore the effect of friction.
worked Example 2 Commented [U71]: Formatting: pse standardise appeara
all equivalent items, including font colour.
Two cars (S and T) are travelling on a straight road. They approach a robot at velocities of 10 m·s-1 Commented [G72]: Better like this
East and 18 m·s-1 East, respectively, as shown in the sketch below. Ignore the effect of friction.
Car T suddenly stops and car S collides with car T. After the collision, the two cars move off together
as a Two cars
unit. The (S andmass
combined T) are travelling
of each car withon
theadriver
straight road.
is 1500 kg. They approach a robot at velocities of 10 m·s-1 East and
18 m·s-1 East, respectively, as shown in the sketch below. Ignore the effect of friction.
2.1 State the law of conservation of linear momentum in words. (2)
2.2 Calculate the speed
Car T suddenly of the
stops andtwo
car cars immediately
S collides with carafter the collision.
T. After the collision, the two cars move (4) off together
Research
as aT
Car has
unit. shown that
The combined
suddenly a force
stops massgreater
and of than
each
car car85with
S collides000theN during
carisa T.
driver
with collision
1500 kg. may
After the cause fatal the
collision, injuries.
two cars move off together as a
The collision described above lasts for 0,08 s.
unit. The the
2.3 Determine,
2.1 State combined
by means mass of each
of calculations,
law of conservation car
of whether
linear with
the theindriver
collision
momentum aboveis
words. 1500
could kg.in a fatal injury.(4)
result (2)
2.2 Calculate the speed of the two cars immediately after the collision. (4)
The cars have crumple
Research has shown zones,
thatseat belts,
a force air bags
greater thanand85 padded interiors
000 N during that canmay
a collision reduce thefatal
cause chance
injuries.
2.1
of death State
Theorcollision
serious theduring
injury
described law of conservation
lasts for 0,08 s.of linear momentum in words.
accidents.
above (2)
Commented [U73]: Part of 2.3 or 2.4?
2.4 Use
2.3 principles
Determine, of by
Physics
means toof
explain how airwhether
calculations, bags can thereduce theabove
collision risk ofcould
injuryresult
or death.
in a fatal injury.(4)
2.2
Solution Calculate the speed of the two cars immediately after the collision.
The cars have crumple zones, seat belts, air bags and padded interiors that can reduce the chance
(4)
of death or serious injury during accidents. Commented [U73]: Part of 2.3 or 2.4?
2.1 The2.4 total
Uselinear
Research hasmomentum
principles of an
of Physics
shown that toaisolated
explain and
force how closed
air bags
greater system
thancan remains
85reduce
000 Ntheconstant aincollision
magnitude
risk of injury
during and cause fatal injuries. The
or death.may
direction. OR In an isolated system, the total linear momentum of a system before a
collision
Solution described
collision/interaction above
is equal to lasts
the total formomentum
linear 0,08 s. of the system after the collision. Commented [U74]: Formatting/re-typing: pse standardise line
2.2 What to look for: breaks, indentation, etc. of all equivalent items.
2.1 The total linear momentum of an isolated and closed system remains constant in magnitude and
2.3 Determine,
direction. by means
OR In an isolated system, theof calculations, whether
total linear momentum of athe collision
system beforeabove
a could
27 result in a fatal injury.(4)
collision/interaction is equal to the total linear momentum of the system after the collision. Commented [U74]: Formatting/re-typing: pse standardis
2.2 What to look for: breaks, indentation, etc. of all equivalent items.
The cars have crumple zones, seat belts, air bags and padded interiors that can reduce the chance of death
or serious injury during accidents. 27
2.4 Use principles of Physics to explain how air bags can reduce the risk of injury or death.
Solution
2.1 The total linear momentum of an isolated and closed system remains constant in magnitude and
direction. OR In an isolated system, the total linear momentum of a system before a collision/interaction
is equal to the total linear momentum of the system after the collision.
2.2 What to look for:
(i) In which direction are the cars travelling?
(ii) What is the mass of each car?
(iii) Is there a possibility of the cars moving together or moving separately after the collision?
(iv) What will happen to the speed of the cars after collision?
(v) What is the most appropriate equation for the scenario?
25
h direction are the cars travelling?
the mass of each car?
a possibility of the cars moving (i) In which direction
together or moving are the cars travelling?
separately after the
? (ii) What is the mass of each car?
ill happen to the speed of(iii) the cars
(i)
Is there
In which afteracollision?
possibility of the cars moving together or moving separately after the
direction are the cars travelling?
the most appropriate equation collision?
for the scenario?
(ii)
(iv) What will
What is the mass to
happen of the
each car? of the cars after collision?
speed
(iii) Is there is athe possibility of the cars moving together or is:
moving separately after the
or conservation The of momentum general
(v) is:
(i)
equation
What
collision?
for conservation
most appropriate
In which direction are the cars travelling?
of momentum
equation for the scenario?
The general (iv) equation

(ii) What will isforthe happen
mass to
conservation of the
each speed
of car?
momentumof the cars is: after collision?
∑ 𝒑𝒑 (iii)
(v) = ∑
⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 Is
What there is athe
⃗𝒑𝒑⃗𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 possibility
most appropriateof the cars moving for
equation together
the scenario?or moving separately after the
collision?
Thetwo general (iv) wereequation
What forhappen
will conservation to the of
speed⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃
𝒑𝒑
∑momentum of the ∑is: ⃗𝒑𝒑⃗after
= cars 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 collision?
blem statement the cars moving separately before collision but
However, (v) from What the is problem
the most statement
appropriate the two
equation for cars
the were moving separately before collision but moved
scenario?
nit after the collision so the most appropriate equation to use is: Commented [U75]: Pse check/re-write – not understood.
However, from
together as athe unit problem
afterstatementthe collision the
∑ two socars the=were∑ ⃗𝒑𝒑⃗moving
most appropriateseparately before collision
equation butis:
⃗⃗𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃
𝒑𝒑 𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂 Commented [G76]:to use
I think it is better in this way
𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠 + 𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇 )𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) The
moved general
together equation as a unit for conservation
after the collision of momentum
so the most is:appropriate equation to use is: Commented [U75]: Pse check/re-write – not understood.
= 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) (1500+1500) Commented [G76]: I think it is better in this way

However, from the problem statement the two cars were moving separately before collision but
−1 𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠 + 𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 𝑇𝑇 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠 + 𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇 )𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) ∑ 𝒑𝒑
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) = 5 𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑠𝑠 moved together as a unit after the collision⃗⃗so the most
𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃𝒃 ⃗𝒑𝒑⃗𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂𝒂
= ∑appropriate equation
Commented to use
[G77]:is: Symbols corrected Commented [U75]: Pse check/re-write – not understood.
(1500)(10)+(1500)(0) = 𝑣𝑣 (1500+1500)
hat the accident was fatal, the net force has𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) to be calculated using the Commented [G76]: I think it is better in this way
However,
𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑠𝑠 + 𝑚𝑚from (𝑣𝑣𝑚𝑚 =statement
5 𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑠𝑠−1
Commented [G77]: Symbols corrected
𝑇𝑇 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 𝑇𝑇the= problem 𝑠𝑠 + 𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇 )𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) the two cars were moving separately before collision but
𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆)
2.3
moved In order
together to proveas
(1500)(10)+(1500)(0) = 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) (1500+1500) a that
unit the
after accident
the was
collision fatal,
so the the net
most force
appropriate has to be calculated
equation to use using
is: the Commented [U75]: Pse check/re-write – not understood.
equation:
em statement, if the answer obtained 𝑣𝑣exceeds 𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) = 5 85
𝑚𝑚 000
∙𝑠𝑠−1 N, then the accident Commented [G76]:
[G77]: ISymbols
think it is better in this way
corrected
he accident was 2.3 𝐹𝐹
𝑚𝑚
not
2.3 𝑠𝑠 +
∆𝑡𝑡
𝑠𝑠 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
fatal.
In
= 𝑚𝑚
order In
𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣
The toorder
⃗𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖mass
𝑇𝑇 𝑣𝑣 𝑇𝑇 = (and
prove to𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠prove
that +the that
𝑚𝑚accident
velocity 𝑇𝑇 )𝑣𝑣of thewasaccident
either
𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) offatal,
the cars was
before
the net force fatal, hastheto benet force has
calculated using tothebe calculated using the equation:
be used. According
(1500)(10)+(1500)(0) to the problem statement,
= 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) (1500+1500) if the answer obtained exceeds 85 000 N, then the accident
equation:
was fatal. If not, then𝑣𝑣the accident = 5 𝑚𝑚 was
∙𝑠𝑠−1 not fatal. The mass and velocity of either of the cars before
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑓𝑓(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) Commented [G77]: Symbols corrected
and after collision can be used.
2.3
According In ordertotothe prove problem that the accidentif was
statement, fatal, theobtained
the answer net force has to be
exceeds 85 calculated
000 N, then using the
the accident
) equation:
was fatal. If not, then the accident was not fatal. The mass and velocity of either of the cars before
𝐹𝐹⃗ ∆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣⃗
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
According
and 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 after
∆𝑡𝑡 ⃗to the
collision
= 𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣 canproblem
be used. statement, if the answer obtained exceeds 85 000 N, then the accident was fatal. If
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (0,08) =
According to 1500
the problem (5-0) statement, if the answer obtained exceeds 85 000 N, then the accident
not, then
⃗⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (0,08)
𝐹𝐹
was
𝐹𝐹 fatal. If=the⃗7500
not, accident
then the accident was not wasfatal. TheThe
not fatal. massmassand and velocity
velocity ofof either
either of cars
of the the before
cars before and after collision can
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 7500
𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣
𝐹𝐹⃗⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (0,08)
and after
= collision can be used.
be
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛used. 0,08= 1500 (5-0)
greater than 85 000 N, so the accident will be fatal.
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (0,08)
= 93 = 750 7500 𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑡 = 7500𝑚𝑚∆𝑣𝑣⃗ ⃗
of the impact during In
𝐹𝐹 both = cases,
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛the collision 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 is greater
𝐹𝐹depends than 85 000 N, so the accident will be fatal.
⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (0,08) = 1500
0,08 (5-0) on the relationship between the Fnet Commented [U78]: Pse check.
ollision when the𝐹𝐹⃗⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛momentum= 93 750 is constant.
𝑁𝑁 When the air bag inflates during the
𝐹𝐹
2.4 (0,08)
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 The magnitude = 7500 of the impact during the collision depends on theCommented [G79]: I think it is better in this way
relationship between the Fnet Commented [U78]: Pse check.
tact time of the passenger
In both cases,
7500 or driver with
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛of the airthan
iscollision
greater bag 85 is longer
000 N,than
so the without
accident air will be fatal.
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = and the time when the momentum is constant. When the air bag inflates during the
force on the passenger0,08 or driver is reduced according to the equation (F net Commented [G79]: I think it is better in this way
collision, the contact time of the passenger or driver with the air Commented
⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 collision. bag is longer than
[U80]: Psewithout air
p is constant for 𝐹𝐹 the
2.4 =The 93magnitude
750 𝑁𝑁 of the impact during the collision depends on the relationship between check.
the F Commented [U78]: Pse check.
bag and thus the force on the passenger or driver is reduced according to the equation (F net net
In both andcases,the time ⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛ofiscollision
𝐹𝐹 greater when
than the
85 000momentum
N, so the is constant.
accident will When
be the
fatal. air bag inflates during the
In both = ∆𝑡𝑡 cases,
∆𝑝𝑝
), becauseisΔp greater
is constant than for85 the000 N, so the accident will be fatal.
collision. Commented [G79]: I think
[U80]: Pse it is better in this way
check.
collision, the contact time of the passenger or driver with the air bag is longer than without air
s time graph is shown 2.4 bag The
in the and
magnitude
graph thus below theofforce the on
forimpact
a cartheinitially
passenger
during or driver
the collision
moving is reduced
depends
horizontally according
on the to thebetween
relationship equationthe (F net
Fnet Commented [U78]: Pse check.
shown below. 1.4 and ∆𝑝𝑝 the time of collision when the momentum is constant. When the air bag inflates during the
The
= ∆𝑡𝑡 magnitude
), because Δp is constantof the impact during the collision depends on the relationship between
for the collision. the[G79]:
Commented
Commented [U80]: Iand
Fnet Pse it the
check.
think is better in this way
The momentum collision, the versus
contact time timegraphof the is passenger
shown in the or graph
driver below with the forair
a bag
car initially
is longermoving horizontally
than without air
towards bag time
the and EAST.ofthus collision
Is
theshown forcewhen below. the momentum
on the passenger or driver is constant.
is reduced When
according theequation
to the air bag(Finflates net during the collision, the
∆𝑝𝑝 Commented [U80]: Pse check.
The momentum = contactversus
∆𝑡𝑡
), because time of Δp is
time thegraph
constantpassengeris shown or
for the collision.
in thedrivergraph with below theforair bag
a car is longer
initially movingthan without air bag
horizontally and thus the force
towards the EAST. Is shown below.
on the passenger or driver is reduced according to the equation (Fnet = ), because Δp is constant for the
collision.
The momentum versus time graph is shown in the graph below for a car initially moving horizontally
towards the EAST. Is shown below.
The momentum versus time graph is shown in the graph below for a car initially moving horizontally towards
the EAST. Is shown below.
28
28
28
28
26
1.1 Define momentum. (2)
1.2 What is the value of the initial momentum? (1)
1.3 In which time interval is the momentum of the car constant. (1)
1.4 At what time (s) did the car stop? (3)
1.5 Compare the direction in which the car is moving from: 0 to10 s; 10 to 15 s; and 15 to 25 s. (2)
1.6 There are many reasons for the change in momentum. Give any two possible reasons that could have
caused the momentum of the car to change from 10 s to 20 s. (2)
1.7 Define impulse of a force. (2)
1.8 Calculate the change in momentum of the car from the starting point to 15s. (3)
[16]
PROJECTILE MOTION PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
Step 1: Read the problem as many times as you need to, then draw a sketch of the situation (translate the
words into a sketch).
Step 2: List all the given information and convert it to SI units, if necessary.
Step 3: Draw a free-body diagram.
• If the only force acting on the object is the gravitational force, then it is a projectile and the equations of
uniformly accelerated motion can be used.
Step 4: Select the formula or equation that will be used to answer the question. In some cases, more than one
equation is needed to calculate the answer.
Step 5: Substitute numerical values into an appropriate equation.
Step 6: Check your answer once you have and answer, check if it makes sense:
• Does it has the correct unit?
• Is the numerical value reasonable?
27
Exercise 1
A boy is standing on top of a building. He throws a ball vertically upwards from a position 3.5 m above
the ground, with an initial velocity of 10 m∙s-1. Ignore the effects of air resistance and answer the following
questions:
1.1 What is the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of the ball?
1.2 Calculate the maximum height above the ground that the ball reaches.
1.3 What was the velocity of the ball at its maximum height?
1.4 Calculate the time taken by the ball to reach its maximum height.
1.5 How much time did the ball take to reach its maximum position and return to the position from which it
was thrown?
1.6 Calculate the total time taken by the ball to reach the ground.
1.7 Calculate the velocity with which the ball hits the ground.
1.8 Draw a rough sketch of the velocity-time graph. Show relevant points on the velocity and time axis.
1.9 Draw a position-time graph.
Exercise 2
A boy is standing on the top of a building and throws a tennis ball vertically upwards. The graph below shows
the velocity of the ball from the moment it is thrown until it hits the ground for the second time. Ignore air
resistance.
Graph of velocity versus time
2.1 Describe the motion of the tennis ball in words.
2.2 What is the initial velocity of the tennis ball?
2.3 Calculate the height of the building.
2.4 Is the collision of the tennis ball with the ground elastic or inelastic? Explain.
28
2.5 Draw the position-time graph.
4.4 Work Energy Power
PROBLEM-SOLVING STRATEGY FOR WORK ENERGY POWER
STEP 1: Read and model the situation
• Read the problem as many time as you need to, in order to understand it.
• Draw a sketch of the situation (if not given) and identify which objects are parts of the system. Some
problems may need to be sub-divided into two or more parts (scenarios).
STEP 2: Visualize
Draw aPROBLEM-SOLVING STRATEGY FOR WORK ENERGY POWER

free-body diagram that show all the forces acting on the object (objects). Identify the type of force
acting on the object (conservative
PROBLEM-SOLVING or non-conservative)
STRATEGY FOR WORK ENERGY POWER
STEP 1: Read and model the situation
 ReadPROBLEM-SOLVINGthe problem STRATEGY as many time FOR as WORKyouENERGYneed to,POWER in order to understand it.
STEP  3: STEP
Draw Solve a1: Readofand
sketch themodel
situation the(ifsituation
not given) and identify which objects are parts of the system. Some
 problems
Read the may problem needastomany be sub-divided
time as you into twoto,
need or inmoreorderparts (scenarios).it.
to understand
STEP
Draw a1:
 STEP 2:sketch
Visualize
Read of themodel
and situation the (if not given) and identify which objects are parts of the system. Some
situation
• Collect
Draw athe the
free-body data andbewrite
diagram that it in symbol form.
PROBLEM-SOLVINGSTRATEGY problems
Read FOR may
WORK
problem need asto
ENERGY many timeshow
sub-divided
POWER as you allinto
thetwo
need forces acting
to,orinmore onunderstand
orderparts
to the object (objects).
(scenarios). it. Identify the type of
force
STEP acting
2: on the object (conservative or non-conservative)
Visualize
•  Draw
Select a sketch of the situation (if not given) and identify which objects are parts of the system. Some
Draw a3:the
STEP
problems
Solve
free-bodyequation,
may need diagram law that
to be sub-divided
(principle)
show all into
orforces
thetwo theorem
or more acting that
on the
parts
you can(objects).
object
(scenarios).
apply to solve
Identify the
the problem.
type of
STEP 1: Read and  modelCollect
force the the
acting
STEP 2: Visualize data
situation
on and
the write
object it in symbol
(conservative form.or non-conservative)
 Read the problem • asIfSelect the asystem
STEP
many
Draw 3:
the
time Solve
equation,
as you
free-body isdiagram
isolated
law to,
need inand
(principle)
that order
show non-dissipative,
or theorem
toall
understand
the forces thatit. youthen
acting canonapplytheobject
the total
to solve mechanical
the problem.
(objects). Identifyenergy
the typeisofconserved:
 Draw a sketch of the If
forcethe system
Collect
 situation the
acting data
(if noton is given)
isolated
and
the write
object and and it innon-dissipative,
identify symbol
(conservative which form.
objects
or thenare theparts
non-conservative) totalofmechanical
the system. energy
Someis conserved:
problems may need  to𝐸𝐸
STEPbe+sub-divided
Select
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝐸𝐸3:the
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 =equation,
Solve 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 +into𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃law= 𝐸𝐸(principle)
two or = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑀𝑀 more or theorem
parts (scenarios). that you can apply to solve the problem.
STEP 2: Visualize IfIf there
 Collect the system are data
the is isolated
and writeand
non-conservative forces
it innon-dissipative,
symbol acting
form.(externalthen theortotal dissipative),
mechanicalthen energyuse is conserved:
equation:
Draw a free-body • diagram 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
IfSelect
𝑊𝑊 there +that𝐸𝐸the show
=equation,
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃are 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 all
+=𝐸𝐸the
non-conservative
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∆𝐸𝐸
law
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 forces
=+
𝐾𝐾 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀
∆𝐸𝐸= acting
(principle)
𝑝𝑝 ontheorem
the object
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
forces
or actingthat(objects).can Identify
(external
you applyor tothe typetheof problem.
dissipative),
solve then use equation:
force acting on the object If the
For
If there (conservative
both are
system or non-conservative)
non-conservative
conservative
is isolated and forces acting (external
andnon-conservative
non-dissipative, forces
then the or
acting,dissipative),
total you can use
mechanical then
theuse
energy workisequation:
energy theorem:
conserved:
STEP 3: Solve 𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊
𝐸𝐸 +=𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 ∆𝐸𝐸=𝐾𝐾 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + =
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∆𝐸𝐸=
𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 +𝑀𝑀∆𝐸𝐸
𝐾𝐾 𝐸𝐸 =𝑝𝑝𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
 Collect the data and  write
Kinematics
For
If there it inare
both symbol
equations
conservative form. and
non-conservative andsome other
non-conservative
forces laws(external
acting must
forces be acting,
used with
yousome
or dissipative), can use problems.
then theuse
work energy theorem:
equation:
 Select the equation,  law (principle)
Substitute
𝑊𝑊 = ∆𝐸𝐸 the or theorem
values in thethat you canequation.
selected apply to solve the problem.
 If the system• For both conservative and
𝑊𝑊 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝐾𝐾
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = ∆𝐸𝐸 𝐾𝐾 + ∆𝐸𝐸 𝑝𝑝 non-conservative forces acting, you can use the work energy theorem:
is isolated and
Kinematics non-dissipative,
equations and andthensome the totalothermechanical
laws must energy
usediswith
beacting, conserved:problems.
 For both conservative non-conservative forces you some
can use the work energy theorem:
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 Substitute
= 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾the values in the selected equation.
 If there are non-conservative  Kinematics forces acting (external
equations and someorother dissipative),
laws mustthen use equation:
be used with some problems.
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = wORKEd ExamPLE
 ∆𝐸𝐸 𝐾𝐾 + ∆𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝 the
Substitute values in the selected equation.
• Kinematics equations
 For both conservative and non-conservative forces acting, you can use the work energy and some other laws must be used with some problems.
theorem:
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾 1. ThewORKEd sketch ExamPLE below shows a 2,0 kg block sliding from A to B along a frictionless surface. When the block
 Kinematics equations • reaches
Substitute
and some B, other
it the
continues
values
laws to slide
must inbethe along
used a horizontal
selected
with some equation.surface (BC), where a kinetic frictional force acts on
problems.
 Substitute the values the
1. wORKEd
The
in block.
the sketch
selectedAs a result,
below
ExamPLE shows
equation. theablock 2,0 kg slows
blockdown, slidingcoming
from Ato torest
B alongat C.aThe kinetic energy
frictionless surface.ofWhen
the block at A
the block
is 40,0 J;B,
reaches theit height
continues of Atoand slide B is 14,0am
along and 8,0 m
horizontal above(BC),
surface the ground,
where arespectively.
kinetic frictional force acts on
WORKED 1. Thethe block. EXAMPLE
sketch As
below a result,
shows thea block
2,0 kgslows block down,slidingcoming
from A to to Brest at C.
along The kinetic surface.
a frictionless energy of the block
When at A
the block
is 40,0 J;B,the
reaches height of A
it continues toand slideBalong is 14,0 m and 8,0 surface
a horizontal m above(BC), the ground,
where arespectively.
kinetic frictional force acts on
WORKED EXAMPLEthe block. As a result, the block slows down, coming to rest at C. The kinetic energy of the block at A
1. The sketch below shows a 2,0 kg block sliding from A to B along a frictionless surface. When the block
is 40,0 J; the height of A and BAis 14,0 m and 8,0 m above the ground, respectively.
1. The sketch below shows reaches a 2,0 kg B,block sliding fromtoA slide
it continues to B along along a frictionless
a horizontal surface. When the
surface blockwhere a kinetic frictional force acts on
(BC),
reaches B, it continues to slide along a horizontal hAsurface A m(BC), where a kinetic frictional
= 14,0 force acts on
B C kinetic energy of the block at A is
the block. As a result,the theblock.block slows As adown, result, coming the block to rest at slows
C. The down,
kineticcoming
energy oftothe rest
block at atC.A The
hB= hc= 8,0 m
is 40,0 J; the height of A and B is 14,0 m and 8,0h m above
40,0 J; the height of A and A= A 14,0B ismthe 14,0 ground, respectively.
m and 8,0 m above B the ground, C respectively.
hB= hc= 8,0 m
1.1. Is the total mechanical hA=energy 14,0 mof the block conserved as Bthe block goes from C A to B? Why or
why not? h B= hc= 8,0 m
1.2. A the block reaches point B, has its kinetic energy INCREASED, DECREASED or
1.1. When Is the total mechanical energy of the block conserved as the block goes from A to B? Why or
REMAINED
why not? THE SAME? Provide a reason for your answer.
1.2. hIs
1.3.
1.1.
A = 14,0 the
Calculate
When mtheblock
the total mechanical
speed of the block
reaches energy point when
of the
it reaches
B,Bblock
has its B. Cenergy INCREASED, DECREASED or
kinetic
conserved as the block goes from A to B? Why or
1.4. Is the total mechanical
REMAINED THE SAME? energy Provideof the a hB=conserved
block
reason hfor
c= 8,0
your manswer.
as the block goes from B to C? Justify
why not?
1.3. When your
Calculate answer.
1.2. thethe speed
block of the block
reaches point when B, has it reaches
its kineticB. energy INCREASED, DECREASED or
1.5.
1.4. REMAINEDHow
Is themuch total work
mechanical does the kinetic
energy of frictional
the blockforce do during
conserved as thethe block
BC segment
goes from of the
B totrip?
C? Justify
THE SAME? Provide a reason for your answer.
1.1. Is the total mechanical 1.3. Calculate your energyanswer. of
thethe speed block of conserved
the block when as the block goes
it reaches B. from A to B? Why or
SOLuTION:
1.5. Is How
why not?
1.1. Is 1.4. the themuch
total total work does the
mechanical
mechanical energy
energy
kineticof
ofthe
frictional
theblockblock
force do during
conserved
conserved as the theblock
BC segment
as thegoes block
of B
from the
goes totrip?
C?
fromJustify
A to B? Why or why not?
1.2. When the block STEP reaches 1: Read point and B,model has its kinetic energy INCREASED, DECREASED or
your answer.
REMAINED THE There
SOLuTION:
SAME? is a Provide
sketch ofa the reason situation,
for yourso answer.
we do not need to draw the sketch.
1.5. How much work does the kinetic frictional force do during the BC segment of the trip?
1.3. Calculate the speed The
STEP block
of1: isblock
theRead interacting
and
when model itwith
reachesthe surfaceB. B, has and the Earth.
1.2. When the block reaches point its kinetic energy INCREASED, DECREASED or REMAINED THE
1.4. Is the total mechanical There
SOLuTION: is a
energy sketch of of
the the
block situation,
conserved so we as do
thenot need
block to draw
goes from the B tosketch.
C? Justify
SAME?
The
your answer. STEP 1: Read and model block Provide
is interacting a reason
with the for your
surface answer.
and the Earth. 31
1.5. How much workThere does is thea kinetic
sketch frictional
of the situation, force dosoduring we dothe notBC need segment
to draw ofthe
thesketch.
trip?
The block is interacting with the surface and the Earth. 31
SOLUTION:
STEP 1: Read and Model 31
There is a sketch of the situation, so we do not need to draw the sketch. 29
The block is interacting with the surface and the Earth.
31
1.3. Calculate the speed of the block when it reaches B.
1.4. Is the total mechanical energy of the block conserved as the block goes from B to C? Justify your
answer.
1.5. How much work does the kinetic frictional force do during the BC segment of the trip?
SOLUTION:
STEP 1: Read and Model
There is a sketch of the situation, so we do not need to draw the sketch.
The block is interacting with the surface and the Earth.
System: block-surface-Earth
STEP 2: Visualize
STEP 2: Visualize
Free-body
Free-body diagram diagram
Part 1 (from A to B) the only two forces acting are gravitational force and normal force. Commented [U88]: Pse check/clarify.
Sliding down Sliding up
STEP Part 1 (from A to B) the only two forces acting
2: Visualize are gravitational force and normal force.
Commented [GI89]: Better like this
Free-body diagram⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
Part 1 (from A to B) the only two forces acting are gravitational force and normal force. Commented [U88]: Pse check/clarify.
Sliding down
Sliding(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
down 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 Sliding up Sliding
(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 up
𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 Commented [GI89]: Better like this
⃗⃗ − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝑁𝑁 ⃗⃗ − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 - Conservative
(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
From A to B there are \only conservative forces acting therefore the system is isolated. Commented [U90]: Formatting: pse ensure that no text is
Part 2 Sliding𝐹𝐹⃗on a horizontal surface (from B to C)
- Conservative
obscured on a page or disappears off a page.
𝑔𝑔
Commented [U91]: Pse check/clarify.
From A to B there are \only conservative forces acting therefore the system is isolated. Commented
Commented [GI92]:
[U90]:Better like thispse ensure that no text is
Formatting:
𝑁𝑁
Part 2 Sliding on a horizontal surface (from B to C) obscured on a page or disappears off a page.
(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Commented [GI92]: Better like this
𝑁𝑁
Non- conservative
(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Non- conservative
From BFromto C the frictional
A to B thereforce
areis acting
\only on the block which
conservative is not acting
forces conservative therefore
therefore thethe system is isolated.
system
is not isolated. 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 - Conservative Commented [U93]: Pse check/clarify.
STEP 3: Solve Commented [GI94]: Better like this
Data Part 2 Sliding on a horizontal surface (from B to C)
From B to C the frictional force is acting on the block which is not conservative therefore the system
m= 2,0 kg
is not isolated. Commented [U93]: Pse check/clarify.
EKA= 40 J
STEP 3: Solve
hA= 14,0
Data
Fromm B to C the frictional force is acting on the block which is not conservative therefore the system
Commented is like
[GI94]: Better notthis
hB= hc= 8,0 m
vB-? isolated.
m= 2,0 kg
EKA= 40 J
Wff-?
h = 14,0 m
1.1.A The total mechanical energy is conserved if the net work done by the non- conservative forces
hB= hSTEP
= 8,0 m3: Solve
isc zero, or only conservative forces act on the object, or W nc = 0J. Only two forces act on the
vB-?
block during its trip from A to B: the gravitational force, which is conservative; and the normal
Wff-?
force, which is conservative in this case. Thus, we conclude that W nc = 0 J, with the result being
1.1. Data
The total mechanical energy is conserved if the net work done by the non- conservative forces
that the total mechanical energy is conserved during the AB part of the trip.
is zero, or only conservative forces act on the object, or W = 0J. Only two forces act on the
1.2. As we have seen, the total mechanical energy is the sum of thenckinetic and gravitational potential
m=
energy,2,0which
force, kgit is
and remains constant from A to B. Therefore, as one type of energy decreases, the
conservative in this case. Thus, we conclude that W nc = 0 J, with the result being
other must increase, in order for the sum to remain constant. Since B is lower than A, the
that the total mechanical energy is conserved during the AB part of the trip.
gravitational potential energy at B is less than that at A. As a result, the kinetic energy at B must
1.2. EAs = we40have
J seen, the total mechanical energy is the sum of the kinetic and gravitational potential
be KAgreater than that at A.
energy, and it remains constant from A to B. Therefore, as one type of energy decreases, the
1.3. From A to B, total mechanical energy is conserved.
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
hgravitational
A
= 14,0 m potential energy at B is less than 1
that at A. As a result, the kinetic energy at B must
be greater than that at A. 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐴𝐴 = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐵𝐵
1.3. From A to B, total mechanical energy is conserved. 2
1
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐸𝐸+ 𝐸𝐸
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 +
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
𝐴𝐴 +
= 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣=2 𝐸𝐸
𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
+𝑀𝑀𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ 𝐵𝐵
2 1 𝐵𝐵
2
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐴𝐴 = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐵𝐵
2 32
30 1
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐴𝐴 = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝐵𝐵
2
A to B there are \only conservative forces acting therefore the system is isolated. Commented [U90]: Formatting: pse ensure that no text is
Sliding on a horizontal surface (from B to C) obscured on a page or disappears off a page.
𝑁𝑁
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
hB= hc= 8,0(𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
m 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Non- conservative
vB-?
Wff-?
B to C the frictional force is acting on the block which is not conservative therefore the system
isolated. Commented [U93]: Pse check/clarify.
3: Solve 1.1. The total mechanical energy is conserved if the net work done by the non- conservative forces is zero,
or only conservative forces act on the object, or Wnc = 0J. Only two forces act on the block during its trip
0 kg
40 J from A to B: the gravitational force, which is conservative; and the normal force, which is conservative
4,0 m in this case. Thus, we conclude that Wnc = 0 J, with the result being that the total mechanical energy is
= 8,0 m
conserved during the AB part of the trip.
The total mechanical energy is conserved if the net work done by the non- conservative forces
1.2. As we
is zero, or only conservative forceshaveact on seen, the total
the object, or W nc mechanical
= 0J. Only two energy is the
forces act sum of the kinetic and gravitational potential
on the
energy, and it remains constant from A to B. Therefore, as one type of energy decreases, the other must
force, which is conservative in this case. Thus, we conclude that W nc = 0 J, with the result being
that the total mechanicalincrease, in orderduring
energy is conserved for thethe sum
AB part to ofremain
the trip. constant. Since B is lower than A, the gravitational potential
As we have seen, the total mechanical energy is the sum of the kinetic and gravitational potential
energy from
energy, and it remains constant at BAistoless than thatasatone
B. Therefore, A.type
As aof result, the kineticthe
energy decreases, energy at B must be greater than that at A.
gravitational potential energy at B is less than that at A. As a result, the kinetic energy at B must
1.3. From A to B, total mechanical energy is conserved.
be greater than that at A.
From A to B, total mechanical energy is conserved.
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
1
2
1
2
32
1
40 + (2 × 9,8 × 14) = × 2 × 𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + (2 × 9,8 × 8)
2
40 + 274,4 = 𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + 156,8
314,4 − 156,8 = 𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2
1
𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 =
40 + (2 × 9,8 157,6
× 14) = × 2 × 𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + (2 × 9,8 × 8)
2
𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵40=+√157,6
274,4 = 𝑣𝑣 2 + 156,8
𝐵𝐵
𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵 = 12,55 m·s-1 314,4 − 156,8 = 𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2
𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 = 157,6
1.4. During the trip from B to C, the frictional force acts on the block. This force is non-conservative
1.4. During the trip from
and does work on
B to C, the frictional
the block, consequently. The
force 𝑣𝑣 𝐵𝐵 =
acts
net√157,6
on the block. This force is non-conservative and does
work done by the non–conservative force
𝑣𝑣
is 𝐵𝐵 =
not 12,55
zero (Wm·s
≠
-1
work on the block,ncconsequently. The net work done
0), so the total mechanical energy is notby the non–conservative
conserved during the BC part force
of the is not zero (W ), so
nc
trip.
the
1.5. total
1.4.mechanical
During During
the theenergy
BC part, trip
thefrom
total isBmechanical
not
to C,conserved
the frictional
energyforce during
is notacts theon BC
conserved, part
the block. of the
This
because trip.
aforce is non-conservative
kinetic frictional
and does work on the block, consequently. The net work done by the non–conservative force
force is present.
is not zero (W nc≠ 0), so the total 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛mechanical
= ∆𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 energy is not conserved during the BC part of the
1.5. During the BC trip.part, the total mechanical energy is not conserved, because a kinetic frictional force is
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾 + ∆𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝
present. 1.5. During the BC part, the=total
(𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾mechanical energy is not conserved, because a kinetic frictional
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ 𝐶𝐶 − ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
force is present. 1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶2 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2𝑊𝑊+ 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ
= ∆𝐸𝐸𝐶𝐶𝑀𝑀− ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
2 2
1 1 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾 + ∆𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 2 × 02 −𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 2 × (12,55)2 + 2 × 9,8 × (8 − 8)
2 2 = (𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ𝐶𝐶 − ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 01− (12,55) 2
12 + 02
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ𝐶𝐶 − ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =2 −157,50 2 𝐽𝐽
The work done by frictional force𝑊𝑊 is –157,50 1 J, 2because 1 this force2 points in the opposite direction of
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 2 × 0 − 2 × (12,55) + 2 × 9,8 × (8 − 8)
the displacement. 2 2
Alternative solution: 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 − (12,55)2 + 0
Applying the work energy theorem: 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −157,50 𝐽𝐽
The work done by frictional force is 𝑊𝑊 –157,50 J, because this force points in the opposite direction of
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾
The work done the displacement.
by frictional force 𝑊𝑊 is𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 –157,50
+ 𝑊𝑊𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 𝑊𝑊J, 𝑁𝑁 =because
(𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾this
) force points in the opposite direction of the
Alternative solution: 1 1
displacement.Applying the work 𝑊𝑊 energy theorem:
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 90 + 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁90 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 )
0 0 2
2 2
1 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛1 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 0 + 0 = 𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑊𝑊𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 𝑊𝑊𝑁𝑁 = (𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 2𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 )
( 2 × 0 2
− 2 × (12,55)
2 2
2 1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑊𝑊 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 090
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 −0(12,55)
+ 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁900 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶2 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 )
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −157,50 𝐽𝐽 2 2
The work done by frictional force is –157,50 1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 0J,+because0 = ( 2this × 02force
− 2points in the
× (12,55) 2 opposite direction of
the displacement. 2 2
STEP 4: Assess 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 − (12,55)2
The results have the correct units for speed (m·s-1)𝑊𝑊and 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =for −157,50
work (J), 𝐽𝐽 they are reasonable and answer
The work done by frictional force is –157,50 J, because this force points in the opposite direction of
the questions.
the displacement.
STEP 4: Assess
The results have the correct units for speed (m·s-1) and for work (J), they are reasonable and answer
the questions.
31
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = (𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ𝐶𝐶 − ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶2 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(ℎ𝐶𝐶 − ℎ𝐵𝐵 )
2 2
1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ( 2 × 02 − 2 × (12,55)2 + 2 × 9,8 × (8 − 8)
2 2
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 − (12,55)2 + 0
Alternative solution: 𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −157,50 𝐽𝐽
the displacement.
Applying the work energy
Alternative theorem:
solution:
Applying the work energy theorem:
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑊𝑊𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 𝑊𝑊𝑁𝑁 = (𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 )
1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 900 + 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁900 = ( 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐶𝐶2 − 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝐵𝐵2 )
2 2
1 1
𝑊𝑊𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 0 + 0 = ( 2 × 02 − 2 × (12,55)2
2 2
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 − (12,55)2
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −157,50 𝐽𝐽
the displacement.
The work doneSTEPby4:frictional
Assess force is –157,50 J, because this force points in the opposite direction of the
The results have the correct units for speed (m·s-1) and for work (J), they are reasonable and answer
displacement.the questions.
STEP 4: Assess
The results have the correct units for speed (m·s-1) and for work (J), they are reasonable and answer the
questions.
33
32
Exercise 1
A donkey pulls a cart of mass 600 kg from rest along a horizontal road. The donkey applies a constant force
of magnitude 191,7 N at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. The cart accelerates and reaches a speed of 3
m.s-1 in 5 minutes. The average frictional force that acts on the cart is 160,02 N. Ignore the effect of the
rotation of the wheels of the cart.
Exercise 1
A donkey pulls a cart of mass 600 kg from rest along a horizontal road. The donkey applies a
constant force of magnitude 191,7 N at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. The cart accelerates and
reaches a speed of 3 m.s-1 in 5 minutes. The average frictional force that acts on the cart is 160,02
N. Ignore the effect of the rotation of the wheels of the cart.
1.1 State the work-energy theorem in words. (2)

1.2 Use the WORK-ENERGY THEOREM to calculate the distance covered by the cart in 5
minutes. (5)
1.3 Calculate the power developed by the donkey in 5 minutes. (3)
The donkey now applies a force of the same magnitude on the cart, during the same
time period and over the same distance, but at a SMALLER ANGLE to the horizontal.
1.1 State the work-energy theorem in words. (2) Commented [U95]: Plse check.
1.2 1.4 Use the WORK-ENERGY
How does the THEOREM
power developed
to calculateby
thethe donkey
distance nowbycompare
covered the cart into the power developed
Commented [U96]: Formatting/re-typing: pse standardise
by the donkey in QUESTION 1.3? Write down only GREATER THAN,
5 minutes. (5) SMALLER
appearance of terminology in text. Repetitive problems seen.
1.3 Calculate the power developed by the donkey in 5 minutes. (3)
THAN or EQUAL TO.
The donkey now applies a force of the same magnitude on the cart, during the same (2)
time period and over the same distance, but at a SMALLER ANGLE to the
Give a reason for the answer. (No calculations are required.)
horizontal.
1.4 How does the power developed by the donkey now compare to the power developed
[12]
by the donkey in QUESTION 1.3? Write down only GREATER THAN, SMALLER
Exercise
THAN or2 EQUAL TO.
Give a reason for the answer. (No calculations are required.) (2)
[12]
A 2 kg block, initially at 4 m height, is released and slides downhill from rest on
Exercise 2
a frictionless ramp, and then
moves along a horizontal surface. It then moves on a 10 m length rough horizontal surface with coefficient of
A 2 kg block, initially at 4 m height, is released and slides downhill from rest on a frictionless ramp,
kinetic
and then movesfriction =0,2, until
along aµkhorizontal reaches
surface. It thenamoves
roughonramp
a 10 mwith therough
length same coefficient
horizontal surface of friction and slides on it for 5 m
with coefficient of kinetic friction µk =0,2, until reaches a rough ramp with the same coefficient of friction
until it stops.
and slides on it for 5 m until it stops.
5m
h
θ
A 10 m B
2.1. State the law (principle) of conservation of mechanical energy in words.

2.2. State the lawCONSIDERATIONS
Use ENERGY (principle) of conservation ofspeed
to calculate the mechanical energy
of the block in words.
at the bottom of the ramp.
2.3. State the work energy theorem in words.
2.4. Use the WORK ENERGY THEOREM to calculate the speed of the block when passing position
2.1.
B. Use ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS to calculate the speed of the block at the bottom of the ramp.
2.5. Use the LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY to calculate the height reached by the block
2.2. Statetothe
until it comes rest.work energy theorem in words.
2.6. Calculate the angle at θ.
2.3. Use the WORK ENERGY THEOREM to calculate the speed of the block when passing position B.
34
2.4. Use the LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY to calculate the height reached by the block until it
comes to rest.
2.5. Calculate the angle at θ.
33
4.5 Doppler Effect
4.5 Doppler Effect
Worked Example
worked Example
Doppler Effect
AAman is standing on a pavement when he hears an ambulance approaching. The siren of the ambulance is
man is standing on a pavement when he hears an ambulance approaching. The siren of the
ked Example emitting
ambulance a wave sound
is emitting withsound
a wave a frequency of 500 Hz.
with a frequency The
of 500 Hz.ambulance is moving
The ambulance at ata aconstant speed of 30 m·s-1.
is moving
constant speed of 30 m·s-1. Calculate the frequency of the sound the man hears. Take the speed of
an is standing Calculate
on
theasound
pavement the frequency
in thewhen
air ashe
of the sound the man hears. Take the speed of the sound in the air as 340 m·s-1.
340hears
m·s-1.an ambulance approaching. The siren of the
ulance is emitting a wave sound with a frequency of 500 Hz. The ambulance is moving at a
stant speed of 30Solution
m·s-1. Calculate the frequency of the sound the man hears. Take the speed of
Solution
sound in the air as 340 m·s-1.
𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿
ution 𝑓𝑓𝐿𝐿 = ( ) 𝑓𝑓
𝑣𝑣 ± 𝑣𝑣𝐿𝐿 340  0
( ) 𝑓𝑓 fL  ( )  500
340  30
340  0
( )  500
f L  1,10  500
340  30
f L  550Hz
 1,10  500
 550Hz 4.6 EElectrostatics

lectrostatics
4.6
worked example
Worked example
Electrostatics QuESTION 1 (Question 3 - Spring School material, Northern cape)
ked example
QUESTION
Two identically1 charged
(Question 3 - Spring
spheres (a and B)School
are 30 material, Northern
cm apart, with a chargeCape)
of +3 x 10-4 C and
ESTION 1 (Question 3 - Spring School material, Northern cape)
–2 x 10 C, respectively. A small positive charge (c) of +10 C is placed 10 cm from sphere a, as
-4 -8
Two
shown
identically charged identically charged
in the diagram
spheres (a and are spheres
below.
B) 30 cm apart, andaB)
(A with are 30
charge cmx apart,
of +3 with
10-4 C and a charge of +3 x 10-4 C and –2 x 10-4 C,
respectively.
10-4 C, respectively. A small
A small positive A positive
charge (c) ofCcharge
+10-8 C is(C) of +10
placed 10 cmCfrom
Bis placed
-8
10ascm from sphere A, as shown in the diagram
sphere a,
wn in the diagrambelow.
below.
10 cm B
A C
30 cm
1.1 10 cm
State Coulomb’s law in words.
30 cm
1.2 Calculate the magnitude of the force exerted on the small positive charge c by charge a.
1.3law in
State Coulomb’s words. the magnitude of the force exerted on the small positive charge c by charge B.
Calculate
1.1
1.4 State
Calculate the magnitude
Coulomb’s
Calculate
of the force
law ofinthe
the magnitude
exerted on
words.
the resultant
small forcecharge
positive exerted
c on
by the a.positive charge c.
small
charge
1.5 Define
Calculate the magnitude electric
of the forcefield at a on
exerted point
theinsmall
words.
positive charge c by charge B.
1.2 Calculate the magnitude of the force exerted on the small positive charge C by charge A.
point c,charge
1.6 Calculate
Calculate the magnitude the magnitude
of the resultant of the electric
force exerted on thefield at positive
small c. a, as a result of charge a.
10 cm from
Define electric1.7
field atNow thein
a point small charge c is removed. Calculate the resultant electric field at a point situated at
words.
1.3 Calculate the magnitude of the force exerted on the small positive charge C by charge B.
the of
Calculate the magnitude centre point between
the electric a andc,B.10 cm from a, as a result of charge a.
field at point
Now the small charge c is removed. Calculate the resultant electric field at a point situated at
1.4 Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force exerted on the small positive35charge C.
the centre point between a and B.
1.5 Define electric field at a point in words.

35
1.6 Calculate the magnitude of the electric field at point C, 10 cm from A, as a result of charge A.
1.7 Now the small charge C is removed. Calculate the resultant electric field at a point situated at the centre
point between A and B.
1.8 Charge C makes contact with charge B until the total charge between B and C is distributed. Calculate
the new charge on C.
34
SOLUTION
1.8 Charge c makes contact with charge B until the total charge between B and c is distributed.
The
1.1 1.8 Calculate
Charge c makesof
magnitude contact with charge B force
theonelectrostatic exerted
until the by one
total charge B and
point
between c is distributed.
charge (Q1) on another point charge (Q2)
the new charge c.
Calculate the new charge on c.
is directly proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges and inversely proportional to the
SOLuTION
square of the distance (r) between them.
SOLuTION
1.1 The magnitude of the electrostatic force exerted by one point charge (Q 1) on another point
1.1 The magnitude of the electrostatic force exerted by one point charge (Q 1) on another point
charge (Q2) is directly proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges and
1.2 Data charge (Q2) is directly proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges and
inversely proportional to the square of the distance (r) between them.
1.2 Datainversely proportional to the square of the distance (r) between them.
1.2
QAData
= +3x10-4 C
qc =Q+10
A = +3x10
-8
C -4 C
q = +10 C x 10-2 m
rAC =c 10 cm-8=10
r AC = 10
9 cm =10
2
k = 9 x10 N9 m  C x2 10-2 m
2 2
k ==9?x10 N  m  C
FAonC
FAonC = ?
KQAqC
FAonC  KQ 2 q
FAonC (rAC ) A 2C
(rAC )
9 x10 9  3  10 4  10 8
FAonC  9 x10 9  3 21024  10 8
FAonC  (10  10 )2 2
(10  10 )
27  10 3 3
FAonC  27  10
FAonC100
  10 4
100  10 4
FAonC = 0, 27x101N = 2,70 N
FAonC = 0, 27x101N = 2,70 N
1.3 Data
1.3 1.3Data
Data
QB = – 2 x 10-4 C
QB = – 2 x 10-4 C
qc = +10-8 C
rBCq=c 20
= +10
cm-8=C20 x 10-2 m
r BC = 20
9 cm = 220 x210-2 m
k = 9  10 N m C
9 2 2
? 10 N  m  C
k = =9 
FAonC
FAonC = ?
KQB qC
FBonC  KQ
(rBC ) 2 B q2C
FBonC 
(rBC )
9 x10 9  2  10 4  10 8
FBonC  9 x10 9  2 21024  10 8
FBonC  (20  10 )2 2
(20  10 )
18  10 3 3
FBonC  18  10
4
FBonC 400
  10 4
400  10
FBonC = 0,045x101 N = 0,45 N
FBonC = 0,045x101 N = 0,45 N
1.4 There are two electrostatic forces acting on point charge C; the gravitational force is
1.4 There are two electrostatic forcesit acting
ignored because on point
is too small charge to
in comparison C;the
theelectrostatics
gravitational force
forces, is ignored because it is
36 therefore we
too small in comparison
musttoapply
the electrostatics forces, therefore
the principle of superposition we must apply the principle
of forces. 36 of superposition of
forces.
F  F AC  F BC (it is a vector equation)
F R = F AC + F BC (it is Ra vector equation)
We must draw a free body diagram showing the electrostatic forces acting on the point
We must draw a free bodychargediagram showing
and choose the direction.
the positive electrostatic forces acting on the point charge and choose
the positive direction.
𝐹𝐹⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝐹𝐹⃗𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 Xx
Working with the

Working with the magnitudes magnitudes
of the forces:of the forces:
FR = FAC + FBC
Substitution:
FR = 2,70 N + 0,45 N 35
𝐹𝐹 R = 3,15 N
Working with the magnitudes of the forces:

Working with the magnitudes of the forces:
FR = FAC + FBC
FR = FAC + FBC
FR = FAC + FBC
Substitution:
Substitution:
Substitution:
F =FR2,70
= 2,70
NN++0,45
0,45 N
N
FR = 2,70 RN + 0,45 N
𝐹𝐹 R = 3,15 N
𝐹𝐹 R = 3,15
RN
= 3,15 N
2.3 The electric field at a point is the electrostatic force experienced per unit of positive
2.3 2.3 electricThe
The electric
field
charge fieldatat
at a point
placed
is athe
thatpoint
point.is the electrostatic force experienced per unit of positive charge placed at that point.
electrostatic force experienced per unit of positive
charge placed at that point.
F 2,7
2.3 F2.4 E = 2,7 E = 8 E = E82,7 x 10x8 N∙C
= 2,7 108 N∙C
-1 -1
2.4 E= E = q8 E 10
= 2,7 x 10 N∙C-1
q 10
1.71.7 Each charge has an electrostatic field around it, therefore there are two electric fields at
Each charge has an electrostatic field around it, therefore there are two electric fields at the point, and we
1.7 Each charge has an electrostatic field around it, therefore there are two electric fields at
the point, and we must apply the principle of superposition of fields.
must
the point, apply
and we mustthe principle
apply of superposition
the principle of superpositionofoffields.
fields.
E R E=R E
 EA A+ EBB (it is a vector equation)
E R  E A  E B (it is a vector (it is a vector equation)
equation)
We must draw the vector electric field of each charge at a point.
We mustWe must
draw draw electric
the vector the vector electric
field of each charge field at
ofaeach
point.charge at a point.
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐴𝐴
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐴𝐴
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐵𝐵 X x
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐵𝐵 X x
BothBothelectric
electricfiled
filed vectors point
vectors point in the
in the same same direction,
direction, therefore
therefore we add
we add them them together: Commented [U97]: Pse check – not understood.
together:
Both electric filed
KQ vectors point in the same
9 2direction,
2 therefore
4 we add them together: Commented [U97]:
9 x10 Nm C x3x10 C 5 2 Pse check[G98]:
– not understood.
27 x10 Nm C
Commented Corrected
=R = E2AA+ EB EA =
EA E EA = Commented [G98]: Corrected
ER = EA + EB r (15 x10 2 m) 2 225 x10 4 m 2
KQ
A 9 x10 9 Nm 2 C 2 x3x10 4 C 27 x10 5 Nm 2 C
EA = KQ KQAEA = 9 x1099xNm
10 9 2Nm
C 22xC3x210 C 4ECA = 27 x10
x3x410 10 52 2Nm
275x4Nm C 2C
EA =ErA2 =2 A 2 E9 A =EA = (15 x810 2 m2-1) 2 2 2 EA =E225
A =x10 m 24 2
EA = 0,12
r rx 10 = 1,2 x 10
(15 xN∙C mto
15 x10
(10 ) mthe
) right 4
10 x10
225 x225 m m
37
EA = 0,12 x 109 = 1,29 x 108 N∙C9-18 to the right 37
AKQ
-1 to2-1 2
= 0,12
EA =E0,12 x 10x9 10
B 910xx810
= x1,2
= 1,2 N∙CNm
10 N∙C C to
the the
right10 4 C
x2 xright 18 x105 Nm2C
EB = 2
EB = EB =
KQBr
4
9 x10 9 Nm 2 (15
C
92 x
2 x10  2m
22 x10
4 )2
C 18 x105 Nm 225
2
C x10 m2
EB = KQ 2 B
KQBEB = 9 x109 xNm
9
10 Nm C 2 2
xC22 x10
x2 x10
 4
C EC
4
B= 10522Nm
185x4Nm
18 x10 C 2C
EB =ErB =2 2 EB =EB = (15 x10 m2 ) 2 2
2
EB =E B =x10 m  4
225
r rx 1099 = 0,8 x (10
EEBB== 0,08 15tox10
158x8(10 m
the) mright
) m2 m2
10 x410
225 x225
0,08 x 10 = 0,8 x 10 to the right
EB = 0,08 x 109 = 0,89 x 108 to the right
EB =E0,08
B = 0,08
x 10x98810 = x0,8
= 0,8 10x8 10 to right
to888the the right
EERR== 1,2 x 10
10 ++ 0,8
0,8xx10
10
ER = 1,2 x 108 + 0,8 x 108
ER =E1,2
R= x1,2
10x8 10 + x0,8
+80,8 10x8 108
EER== 2 x 108 N∙C
ER =
N∙C-1-1 to
tothe
theright
R 2 x 108 N∙C-1 to the right
right
ER =E2R x= 10
2 x8 10 8 N∙C
N∙C -1 to-1 to right
the the right
1.8 Since
1.8 Since
1.8 thethe system
Since
system isthe issystem
isolated,
isolated, then
theniswe weapply
isolated,
must must
then apply
thewe the
lawmust
of law of conservation
apply
conservationtheof law of charge.
of conservation
charge. of charge.
Commented Commented
[U99]: [U99]:
Alignment problem Alignment
/ missing item problem / missing
1.8 1.8 Since
Since the system
the system is isolated,
is isolated, thenthen we must
we must apply
apply the law
the law of conservation
of conservation of charge. problem?
of charge. Commented
Commented problem?
[U99]:
[U99]: Alignment
Alignment problem
problem / missing
/ missing item item
problem?
problem?
𝑄𝑄𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑄𝑄𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑄𝑄=𝑐𝑐 𝑄𝑄 +𝑐𝑐𝑄𝑄+ 𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 Commented [U100]: Commented [U100]: Pse check/complete.
Pse check/complete.
𝐵𝐵 = Commented
Commented [U100]:
[U100]: Pse check/complete.
Pse check/complete.
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐=+𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑄𝑄= +=
𝑐𝑐 𝐵𝐵 𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 Commented [G101]: Corrected [G101]: Corrected
Commented
Commented
Commented [G101]:
[G101]: Corrected
Corrected
After
Afterbeing in contact
being (𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐 =(𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵 = = 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 = 𝑄𝑄 Commented [U102]: Pse check.
AfterAfter
After being inin
being
being contact
in contact
incontact
contact (𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵= =
(𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐 (= 𝐵𝐵𝑄𝑄= 𝑄𝑄 )
𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵 Commented
Commented
Commented
[U102]:
[U102]:
[U102]: Pse check.
Pse check.
Pse check.
𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐 + 𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵 = 2𝑄𝑄

𝑄𝑄 +𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑐𝑐𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵
+ =𝐵𝐵2𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄
𝐵𝐵= 2𝑄𝑄
= 2𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑐𝑐 + 𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵
𝑄𝑄 = 𝑄𝑄 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄2𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐++ + 𝑄𝑄𝐵𝐵
𝑐𝑐𝑄𝑄
𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵
𝑄𝑄 =𝑄𝑄 =2 2
𝑄𝑄 =
2
(110 8 )8 ( 2 10 4 )4 04,000110 4 4 2 410 4 4 1,9999 10 4 4 4
Qc = (110 )8 8()
(110 2(10 )=4 )0,0001
2 10 0,0001
1010  2 2
10 10 4
1 , 1
9999,9999 =10
42 10
- 1,00 x10-4 C -4
Qc =Q(c1=10 2)  (2 10 =) = 0,0001 2 10 4  2 10 1,9999 = = -41,00
- 10
1,00 x10-4x10
C C
Qc = 2 2 = 2 2 2 2 = - 1,00 x10-4 C
2 2 2
Exercise 1
Exercise
Exercise 1 1
Two small,
Exercise 1identical metal spheres (a and B), carrying charges of +30nC and -14nC,
TwoTwo small,
small, identical
identical metal
metal spheres
spheres (a and B), B),
(a and carrying
carrying charges
charges of +30nC
of +30nC and and -14nC,
-14nC,
respectively, are mounted on insulated stands; these are placed at a certain distance r from
Two small, identical
respectively,
respectively, are are
mountedmetal
mounted spheres
on insulated
on insulated (a and
stands;
stands; B),
arecarrying
these
these are at charges
placed
placed aat of distance
a certain
certain +30nC
distance rand
r from from-14nC,
each other, as shown below.
each other,
each other, asare
respectively, as shown
shown below.
below. on insulated stands; these are placed at a certain distance r from
mounted
each other, as shown below.r r r
30 nC
30 nC30AnC B
A A r B -B14 nC
- 14 nC
- 14 nC
36 30 nC
A B
- 14 nC
2
(110 8 )  (2 10 4 ) 0,000110 4  2 10 4 1,9999 10 4

Qc = =  = - 1,00 x10-4 C
2 2 2
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
Two small, identical metal spheres (a and B), carrying charges of +30nC and -14nC,
Two small, identical metal spheresare
respectively, and B),on
(Amounted carrying charges
insulated of +30nC
stands; these and -14nC,
are placed respectively,
at a certain are mounted
distance r from
each other, as shown below.
on insulated stands; these are placed at a certain distance r from each other, as shown below.
r
30 nC
A B
- 14 nC
1.1. Define electric field in words.

1.1. Define electric field in words.
1.2. Sphere B is moved and makes contact with sphere a. It is then moved back to its original
Sphere B is moved position. The contact

magnitude of the electrostatic force between them is now x 10 N.position. The
6,4original -4
1.2. and makes with sphere A. It is then moved back to its
magnitude of the1.2.1
electrostatic force
Sketch the field between
pattern them is
surrounding thenow 6,4 x 10-4 N.
charges.
1.2.2 Calculate the magnitude of the charge on each sphere after contact.
1.2.1 Sketch the field pattern surrounding the charges. 38
1.3. Determine the original distance between the spheres.
1.2.2 Calculate the magnitude of the charge on each sphere after contact.
Exercise 2
1.3. Determine the original
Two smalldistance
objects (abetween
and B) arethe spheres.
equally positively charged; these are placed in a vacuum, as
shown in the figure below.
Exercise 2
A B
200 cm
Two small objects (A and B) are equally positively charged; these are placed in a vacuum, as shown in the
Charge B repels charge a with an electrostatic force of 3,0 x 10-6 N.
figure below.
2.1 State Coulomb’s law in words.
2.2 What is the magnitude of the electrostatic force that A exerts on B?
Charge B repels charge A with an electrostatic force of 3,0 x 10-6 N.
2.3 Draw the resultant electric field lines of the electric field around charges a and B.
2.1 2.4law
State Coulomb’s Calculate the magnitude of charge a and B.
in words.
2.5 Calculate the electric field strength at a point in the centre of charge a and B.
2.2 What is the magnitude of the electrostatic force that A exerts on B?
2.3 STRATEGY
Draw the resultant electric fieldTO SOLVE
lines PROBLEMS
of the ON ELECTRIC
electric field CURRENT
around charges A and B.
 Read the problem carefully, as many times as you need to.
2.4 Calculate the magnitude of charge A and B.
 If not given, draw a circuit diagram.
2.5 Calculate the electric field
 Write strength
down atinasymbolic
the data the centre of charge A and B.
point inform. Commented [U103]: Pse c
Commented [GI104]: corr
 Indicate the conventional direction of the current, from high-potential to low-potential
(+ to -).
 Re-draw the circuit diagram to simplify it, if necessary.
 Identify the type of connection (series/parallel).
 Analysing circuits:
1 – The algebraic sum of the changes in potential in a complete transversal of any loop
of a circuit must be zero (ε= Ir+ Ir).
2. The sum of the currents entering any junction must be equal to the sum of the currents
leaving that junction:
39
37
2.6
STRATEGY TO SOLVE PROBLEMS ON ELECTRIC CURRENT
 Read the problem carefully, as many times as you need to.
 If not given, draw a circuit diagram.
 Write down the data in symbolic form.
 Indicate the conventional direction of the current, from high-potential to low-potential (+ to -).
 Re-draw the circuit diagram to simplify it, if necessary.
 Identify the type of connection (series/parallel).
 Analysing circuits:
1 – The algebraic sum of the changes in potential in a complete transversal of any loop of a circuit must be
zero (ε= Ir+ Ir).
2. The sum of the currents entering any junction must be equal to the sum of the currents leaving that
junction:
i = i1+i2+…+ in
 Write down the formula/ equation that solves the question.
 Find the unknowns, if needed (multi-concept problems).
 Do the calculations and write down the final answer.
 Check your answer. Check if it makes sense, i.e.:
- Is the numerical value reasonable?
38
 Do the calculations and write down the final answer.
 Check your answer. Check if it makes sense, i.e.:

WORKED EXAMPLE
- Is the numerical value reasonable?
wORKEd ExamPLE
In the circuit diagram below, the voltmeter V reads 12 V when switch S is open. When switch S is closed, the
In the circuit diagram below, the1 voltmeter V1 reads 12 V when switch S is open. When switch
reading drops to 10 S V. The resistance
is closed, the readingofdrops
the Ammeter andresistance
to 10 V. The the wiresofisthe
negligible.
Ammeter and the wires is
negligible.
𝑉𝑉1
1
S 𝑉𝑉2
R A 3A
6Ω
𝑉𝑉3
4Ω
-
1.1 What is the reading of the ammeter when the switch is open? Commented [GI105]: corrected
1.1 What is the reading of the ammeter when the switch is open? Commented [U106]: Formatting/
1.2 What is the emf of the battery? points from blank lines in text – repet
Pse use either bullets or numbers – no
1.2 What is the emf
1.3 ofWhat
the battery?
is the reading of voltmeter 2? items/sub-items. Repetitive problems
1.4 Calculate the equivalent resistance of the resistors connected in parallel.

1.3 What is the reading of voltmeter 2?
1.5 Determine the reading of voltmeter 3?
1.4 Calculate the1.6 Calculateresistance

equivalent the internal of
resistance of the battery?
the resistors connected in parallel.
1.7 Determine the total resistance of the circuit?
1.5 Determine the reading of voltmeter 3?
1.8 What is the resistance of the resistor R?
1.6 Calculate the1.9 How would the reading of voltmeter V2 change if the 6 Ω resistor is removed from the
internal resistance of the battery?
circuit? Write down INCREASE, DECREASE or REMAIN THE SAME. Explain your
1.7 answer.
Determine the total resistance of the circuit?
1.8 What is the resistance of the resistor R?

40
1.9 How would the reading of voltmeter V2 change if the 6 Ω resistor is removed from the circuit? Write down
INCREASE, DECREASE or REMAIN THE SAME. Explain your answer.
SOLUTION Commented [U107]: Formatting: pse use formatting to ma
items legible – repetitive problems seen, including use of bullet
point/not using bullet points, line spacing, alignment, indentatio
1.1. Zero (when the circuit is open there is no flow of charges therefore no current in the
SOLUTION standardisation of formatting, etc. (It is difficult to understand w
belongs with what in the text because of the lack of attention to
formatting.)
1.1. 1.2.Zero
12 V (when
(when there is no electric
the circuit is opencurrent flowing
there is noin flow
the circuit, the reading
of charges of the voltmeter
therefore no current in the
Commented [U108]: Pse check ‘bullet’ points at items
throughout – pse standardise appearance of all with equivalent
items and remove bullet points from items that are not bullet
connected across the terminals of the battery is equal to the emf of the battery, because points. There appear to be repetitive problems in the text.
1.2. 12 V (when there is no electric current flowing in the circuit, the reading of the voltmeter connected across
Commented [GI109]: corrected
there is no energy dissipated.
the terminals of the battery is equal to the emf of the battery, because there is noCommented
energy dissipated.
[U110]: Pse check/ complete.
Pse re-check the text in its entirety: the editor is an English
specialist, not a Physics specialist, but there appear to be multip
1.3. 1.3.Zero
Zero (there
(thereisiscurrent in the
current in circuit, but thebut
the circuit, resistance is negligible:
the resistance V=IR=(I)(0)=0
is negligible: V)
V=IR=(I)(0)=0 V)
problems with the drafting of the text.
1.4. 1.4.The
The resistors of of
6 Ω6and 4 Ω are
4 Ωconnected in parallelin parallel Commented [U112]: Formatting required: text should not b
resistors Ω and are connected obscured – repetitive problem seen in text.
Where there are two resistors we can

1 solve
1 in
1 the following way
= +
𝑅𝑅1 𝑅𝑅2 (6)(4) 𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 𝑅𝑅1 𝑅𝑅2
𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 = = = 2,4 Ω
𝑅𝑅1 + 𝑅𝑅2 6+4
1 1 1 5
= + =
𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 6 4 12
𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 = 2,4 Ω
1.5 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 = 3 × 2,4 39
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 = 7,2 𝑉𝑉
𝑃𝑃 𝑅𝑅 + 𝑅𝑅
1𝑅𝑅1 + 2𝑅𝑅2 6 6
++4 4
1 1 1 5
= + =
𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 6 4 12
11 11 11 55
== ++ ==
𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃= 6
𝑅𝑅 6Ω
2,4 4 4 1212
𝑃𝑃
1.5
1.5 𝑅𝑅
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝𝑃𝑃𝑅𝑅== 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝑃𝑃 =
2,42,4ΩΩ
1.5
1.5𝑉𝑉 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝==3 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
× 2,4
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝==3 3××2,4
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 = 7,2 𝑉𝑉 2,4
𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝==7,2
7,2𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉 of the voltmeter 3 is 7,2 V.
The reading
The reading of the voltmeter 3 is 7,2 V.
1.6 The
𝜀𝜀 =reading
The reading
𝑉𝑉 ofofthe
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 + 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 thevoltmeter
voltmeter3 3isis7,2
7,2V.V.
1.6 1.6 𝜀𝜀 𝜀𝜀===𝑉𝑉𝜀𝜀𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒

1.6𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑉𝑉− ++𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉= =− 𝜀𝜀 𝜀𝜀−𝑉𝑉−𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝜀𝜀=
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
3𝑟𝑟𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼=
==𝜀𝜀12
𝜀𝜀−−
𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
− 𝑉𝑉
10
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
3𝑟𝑟==0,67
𝑟𝑟 3𝑟𝑟 =1212−
Ω−1010
𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟==0,67
0,67ΩΩ
1.7 𝜀𝜀 = 𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
1.7
1.7
1.7𝜀𝜀 𝜀𝜀==𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
12 = 3𝑅𝑅𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
1212==3𝑅𝑅
3𝑅𝑅
Rtotal = 4 Ω 41
Rtotal = 4 Ω 4141
1.8
1.8 Option 1 Option 2

𝑅𝑅𝑇𝑇 = 𝑅𝑅𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 + 𝑟𝑟 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 𝑉𝑉2 = 𝑉𝑉1
𝑅𝑅𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 7,2 = 10
𝑅𝑅𝑇𝑇 = 𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 𝑅𝑅𝑃𝑃 + 𝑟𝑟 3𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 7,2 = 10
4 = 𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 + 2,4 + 0,67 𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 0,93 Ω
𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 0,93 Ω
1.8 1.8 INCREASE

INCREASE
If the bulb of 6 Ω is removed, the total resistance of the circuit increases, then the
If the bulb of 6 Ω is removed, the total resistance of the circuit increases, then the reading of the ammeter
reading of the ammeter decreases, because the current decreases due to the
decreases, because the current decreases due to the increasing external resistance; but the reading of the
increasing external resistance; but the reading of the voltmeter increases, because the
voltmeter increases, because the drop of potential in the internal resistance also decreases; but the emf of the
drop of potential in the internal resistance also decreases; but the emf of the battery is
battery isconstant,
constant, according
according to Vloadto= V Vint==εε -- V
ε -load Ir.int = ε - Ir.
Exercise
Exercise 11
Three resistors ( 2 Ω, 4 Ω and Rx ) are connected to a battery, as shown in the circuit

diagram below. With switch S1 open and S2 closed, the reading on the voltmeter is 10 V.
With both switches closed, the reading on the voltmeter is 8 V and the ammeter is 1 A.
S1
4Ω
Rx
S2
2Ω
1.1 Write down the value of the emf of the battery. (1)
1.2 Calculate the:
40 1.2.1 resistance of the unknown resistor Rx. (7)

1.2.2 internal resistance of the battery. (3)
drop of potential in the internal resistance also decreases; but the emf of the battery is
constant, according to Vload = ε - Vint = ε - Ir.
Exercise 1
Three resistors (Three

2 Ω, resistors
4 Ω and( R 2 xΩ,) are
4 Ω connected
and Rx ) are to a battery,
connected to aas shown
battery, as in the circuit
shown diagram below. With
in the circuit
switch S1 open and S2 closed,
diagram the reading
below. With switch Son the and
1 open voltmeter is 10
S2 closed, theV.reading
With both
on theswitches
voltmeterclosed,
is 10 V.the reading on the
With
voltmeter is 8 V and both
the switchesisclosed,
ammeter 1 A. the reading on the voltmeter is 8 V and the ammeter is 1 A.
S1
4Ω
Rx
S2
2Ω
1.2 Calculate the:
1.2 Calculate the:
1.2.1 resistance of the unknown resistor Rx. (7)
1.2.1 resistance of the
1.2.2 internal unknown
resistance resistor Rx.
of the battery. (3) (7)
1.2.2 internal resistance of the battery. (3)
1.3 How will the reading on the voltmeter be affected if the switch
42
S1 is closed while S2 is opened.
1.3
Write How
downwill the reading
only on the voltmeter
INCREASES, be affected if the
DECREASES orswitch S 1 is closed
REMAINS THEwhile
SAME. (4)
S2 is opened.
Briefly explain
Write down onlythe answer.
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
(4)
[15]
Exercise 2 Briefly explain the answer.
[15]
Exercise 2
In the circuit diagram below, the emf of the battery is 6 V and its internal resistance is 0,10 Ω. The resistance
In the circuit diagram below, the emf of the battery is 6 V and its internal resistance is 0,10 Ω.
(R) is UNKNOWN.
The resistance (R) is UNKNOWN.
V
6V
0,10 Ω
4Ω R
2.1 Explain the term internal resistance. (2)

2.1 Explain the term internal resistance. (2)
2.2 Write down an equation for the terminal potential difference using the values given. (2)
2.3 2.2 a sketch
Draw Write down an equation
graph for the
of terminal terminal potential
potential differencedifference
versususing the values
current. given.the follow-
Indicate (2) (3)
ing2.3in theDraw
graph:
a sketch graph of terminal potential difference versus current. Indicate the (3) Commented [U113]: Pse check.
following in the graph:
• The value
 Theofvalue
the emf.
of the emf.
 The current at which the terminal potential difference is zero.
• The current at which the terminal potential difference is zero.
2.4 The energy dissipated in 4 Ω resistance is 40 J; the energy dissipated in resistance R
2.4 The energy dissipated in 4 Ω resistance is 40 J; the energy dissipated in resistance R is
is 60 J.
60 J.
Calculate:
Calculate:
2.4.1 Resistance R (4)
2.4.2 Total current in the circuit (3)
2.4.3 Reading of the voltmeter (3)
2.5 A 7 Ω resistor is now connected in parallel to the 4 Ω resistor. How will this action 41
affect the reading of the voltmeter? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or
2.4.1 Resistance R (4)
2.4.2 Total current in the circuit (3)
2.4.3 Reading of the voltmeter (3)
2.5 A 7 Ω resistor is now connected in parallel to the 4 Ω resistor. How will this action affect
the reading of the voltmeter? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS
THE SAME.
Briefly explain your answer. (4)

(4)
[21] [21]
4.8 Electrodynamics
4.8 Electrodynamics
Problem
Problem Solving
Solving Strategy
Strategy for Electrodynamics
for Electrodynamics
 With
• electrical machines,
With electrical look at the
machines, energy
look at theconversions to identifytothe
energy conversions type ofthe
identify electrical
type of electrical machine.
machine.
 Re-draw
• the circuit
Re-draw thediagram to simplify
circuit diagram toit,simplify
if necessary.
it, if necessary.
 Identify the type of connection (series/parallel).
• Identify the type of connection (series/parallel).
Worked example
Worked example
The simplified diagrams below represent an electric motor and a generator.
The simplified diagrams below represent an electric motor and a generator.
X Y
1.1
1.1 Which
Which ONE
ONE of of
thethe diagramsabove
diagrams aboverepresents
representsa asimplified
simplifieddiagram
diagramofofan
anelectric
electricmotor? Give
motor? for
a reason Give a reason
your answer.for your answer.
1.2
1.2 What type
What of of
type generator (AC
generator oror
(AC DC) is is
DC) represented
representedininthe
thesimplified
simplifieddiagrams
diagramsabove? Give a
reason for Give
above? your aanswer.
reason for your answer.
1.3
1.3 State ONE
State ONEmethod
methodof of
increasing the
increasing induced
the inducedemf
emfofofthis
thisgenerator.
generator.
1.4 Write down ONE use of electric motors.
1.4 Write down ONE use of electric motors.
1.5 The maximum potential difference produced by this generator is 12 V
1.5 The maximum potential difference produced by this generator is 12 V and the
and the frequency is 50 Hz.
frequency is 50 Hz.
1.1. Sketch a graph of the induced potential difference versus time.
1.1. Calculate
1.5.2. Sketch a graph of the
the induced rms
induced potential differencedifference.
potential versus time.
1.5.2.
1.5.3. Calculate thethe
Calculate induced rms potential
average power difference.
dissipated if a 5 Ω resistor is
1.5.3.connected
Calculate the average
to thispower dissipated if a 5 Ω resistor is connected to this
generator.
generator.
SOLUTION
SOLUTION
44
42
1.1 X. It converts electrical energy into mechanical energy.
1.2 AC generator. It has slip rings.
1.1
1.1 X. W electrical
X.ItItconverts
converts electricalenergy
energyinto
intomechanical
mechanicalenergy.
energy.
1.31.2 ANY ONE of the
ACgenerator.
generator. following:
1.2 AC ItIthas
has sliprings.
slip rings.
WW
1.3
1.3 Increasing
ANYONE
ANY the
ONEofofthe speed/frequency
thefollowing:
following: of rotation
Increasing
Increasingthe
Increasing the
the number of coils
speed/frequency
speed/frequency ofofrotation
rotation
Increasingthe
Increasing thenumber
numberofofcoils
coils
Increasing the strength of the magnetic field
Increasingthe
Increasing thestrength
strengthofofthe
themagnetic
magneticfield
field
Insert a soft iron core
Insertaasoft
Insert softiron
ironcore
core
1.4 ANY ONE of the following:
1.4
1.4 ANYONE
ANY ONEofofthe
thefollowing:
following:
Pumps
Pumps
Pumps
Fans
Fans
Fans
Compressors
Compressors
Compressors
Hair dryers
Hairdryers
Hair dryers
1.5.1
1.5.1
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.2
1.5.2 VVmax/
VVrms / wgk 
maks
max/maks
rms/ wgk 
22
12
Vrms / wgk  12 
Vrms / wgk  2 
2
Vrms / wgk  8,49 V 45
45
Vrms / wgk  8,49 V
1.5.3
1.5.3 V 2 / wgk
1.5.3 Pave / gem  V rms
2 
Pave / gem  rmsR/ wgk 
R
(8,49) 2
Pave / gem  (8,49) 2 
Pave / gem  5 
5
Pave / gem  14,42 W
Pave / gem  14,42 W
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
A team of grade 12 learners conducted a practical investigation to investigate the
relationship between the root mean square value of voltage generated and the frequency
43
of rotation of the armature of the generator using the device shown in the figure below.
ave / gem
5
Pave / gem  14,42 W
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
A team of grade 12 learners conducted a practical investigation to investigate the relationship between the root
mean square value of voltage generated and the frequency of rotation of the armature of the generator using
the device shown in the figure below.
The following table shows

The thetable
following results obtained.
shows the results obtained.
Frequency Hz) 0 10 20 30 40 50
Frequency Hz) Vrms(V) 00 1 10 2 20
3 4 305 40 50
Vrms(V) 0 1 2 3 4 5
1.1. What type of generator

1.1. What was
type used by the was
of generator learners
used during
by thethe practical
learners investigation?
during the practical Give a reason for
your answer. investigation? Give a reason for your answer.
1.2. Write an investigative question for this investigation.
1.2. Write an investigative
1.3. Whatquestion
could the for this investigation.
learner’s hypothesis have been for this experiment?
1.4. What is the dependent variable in this experiment? Commented [GI114]: corrected
1.3. What could1.5.
the learner’s
Use the hypothesis
data to draw ahave
graphbeen
on thefor thispaper
graph experiment?
provided. Commented [U115]: Pse check.
1.6. Write the conclusion for the results obtained.

1.4. What is the dependent variable in this experiment?
46
1.5. Use the data to draw a graph on the graph paper provided.
1.6. Write the conclusion for the results obtained.
1.7. Calculate the root mean square value of the voltage when the amplitude of the voltage is 5 V.
1.8. If a resistor of 5 Ω is connected to the generator, determine the root mean square value of the current
through the resistor when the frequency of rotation of the armature is 50 Hz.
1.9. Calculate the average power dissipated through the resistor when the frequency of rotation of the
armature is 50 Hz.
1.10. Draw the graph of instantaneous voltage vs time when the armature rotates with constant frequency of
50 Hz.
1.11. List the advantages of alternating current (AC) over direct current (DC).
44
Exercise 2
The diagram below shows one of the electrical machines studied in class.
2.1 Is this electrical machine a DC motor or a DC generator? Give a reason for your answer.
2.2 What is the direction of rotation of the loop: clockwise or anti-clockwise?
2.3 Label the parts of this electrical machine indicated by A, B and C.
2.4 Write three applications of this electrical machine.
45
5 Revision Questions - Set 2 (master an
additional 20%)
5. 5.1 Newton’s
Revision 5.
Questions - SetLaws
Revision Questions - Set
2 (master an 2 (master
additional an additional 20%)
20%)
5.1 Newton’s5.1
Laws Newton’s Laws
Exercise 1
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Two
Two blocks
blocks ofofthethe
Two same
blocks
same materials
of the are
materials same are connected
materials
connected are
by by
connected
a light, a light,
by a
inelastic inelastic
light,
rope. Arope.
inelastic
Block has rope. Block
BlockofA
a mass hasaamass
A has mass
of of 5 kg; block
B5 has a mass
kg; block
5.B has 5ofkg;
a3mass
kg.
Revision Another
blockofB3has -rope
Set 2is
kg. aAnother
Questions mass of 3fixed
rope kg.
(master to additional
block
is Another
fixed
an B and
rope
to block a aforce
isB fixed
20%) and toforce
block ))ofof100N
(( B𝐹𝐹⃗ and a100N
forceis (is
𝐹𝐹⃗ applied
) of 100Nhorizontally.
is The
blocks
appliedare moving5.1
applied
horizontally. along
The a horizontal
Newton’s
blocks Laws
horizontally.
are moving frictionless
The blocks
along are movingsurface.
a horizontal along a horizontal
frictionless frictionless surface.
surface.
Exercise 1
𝐹𝐹⃗ 𝐹𝐹⃗
a aB
Two blocks of the same materials are connected byBa light, inelastic rope. Block A has a mass of
5 kg; block B has a mass of 3 kg. Another rope is fixed to block B and a force ( 𝐹𝐹⃗ ) of 100N is
1.1 1.1
Draw separate Draw separate
appliedlabelled labelled
free-body
horizontally. The free-body
diagrams
blocks areofmovingdiagrams
all the force’saof
along all the
action onforce’s
horizontal the action surface.
blocks.
frictionless on the blocks.
1.1
1.2 Draw separate
1.2
Calculate labelledthe
Calculate
the acceleration offree-body
blocks.diagrams
acceleration
the of all the force’s action on the blocks.
of the blocks.
1.3 Calculate1.3 Calculateofthe
the magnitude themagnitude
tension inof
thethe tension in the rope.
rope. 𝐹𝐹⃗
1.2 a
Calculate the acceleration of the blocks. B
Thenow
The two blocks are twopulled
blocksover
are now pulled
another over another
surface surfaceexperience
and the blocks and the blocks experience
friction. friction. The blocks
The blocks
1.3 Calculate the
accelerate at magnitude
accelerate
8,972 at of
m·s-2. The them·s
8,972
force tension
-2. The in
exerted the
byforce
the rope.
exerted
rope by the
on block A rope onN.
is 62,5 block A is 62,5 N.
1.1 Draw separate labelled free-body diagrams of all the force’s action on the blocks.
1.2 Calculate the acceleration of the blocks.
The
1.4 twoCalculate
blocks1.4 arekinetic
the now pulled
Calculate theover another
kinetic
coefficient for surface
coefficient
of friction A. and
of friction
block forthe blocks
block A. experience friction. The blocks accelerate
1.3 Calculate the magnitude of the tension in the rope.
at1.5
8,972If m·s -2
.1.5
the two Theblocks
force exerted
If thehave
two the by
blocks the
same rope
have onsame
the
surface block surface
area, A is block
will 62,5 N.
area, will block
B have B have a different
a different
coefficient
The two coefficient
of blocks
friction? nowofpulled
areExplain friction?
your overExplain
answer.
anotheryour answer.
surface and the blocks experience friction. The blocks
1.4
1.6 Calculate thefrictional
Calculate1.6
the kinetic
Calculate coefficient
theexacted
force offorce
frictional
by friction
the foron
exacted
surface block
the A.
byblocksurface
B. on block B.
accelerate at 8,972 m·s . The force exerted by the rope on block A is 62,5 N.
-2
1.7 1.7action-reaction
Name two Name two pairs
action-reaction pairs in the system.
in the system.
1.5 If the two blocks have the same surface area, will block B have a different coefficient of friction?
1.4 Calculate the kinetic coefficient of friction for block A.
Explain
Exercise 2 your answer.
Exercise
1.5
2
If the two blocks have the same surface area, will block B have a different
coefficient of friction? Explain your answer.
A 4 kgCalculate
1.6 the
kg frictional
block on Aa 4horizontal,
block on a force
rough exacted
horizontal,
surface isroughby thetosurface
surface
connected is on block
anconnected
8 kg blocktobyan
a8B.kg inextensible
light block by a light inextensible
1.6 Calculate the frictional force exacted by the surface on block B.
string
string that passes overthat passes over
a frictionless a frictionless
pulley, as shownpulley,
below.asThe
shown below.of
coefficient The coefficient
kinetic of kinetic (dynamic)
(dynamic)
1.7 Name two action-reaction pairs in the system.
1.7 Name two action-reaction
friction between friction between
the block of 4 kgthe pairs
andblock in the
of 4 kg and
the surface system.
the surface is 0,6.
is 0,6.
Exercise 2
Exercise 2
4 kg 4 kg
 
A 4 kg block on a horizontal, rough surface is connected to an 8 kg block by a light inextensible
A 4 kg block on a horizontal, rough surface is connected to an 8 kg block by a light inextensible string that
string that passes over a frictionless pulley, as shown below. The coefficient of kinetic (dynamic)
passes over a frictionless pulley, as shown below. The coefficient of kinetic (dynamic) friction between the
friction between the block of 4 kg and the surface is 0,6.
block of 4 kg and the surface is 0,6. 8 kg 8 kg
4 kg

49 49
8 kg
49
2.1 Draw a free-body diagram of all the forces acting on both blocks.
2.2 Write down Newton’s second law of motion in words.
2.3 Calculate the acceleration of the system.
46
2.4 Calculate the magnitude of the tension in the string.
2.5 Calculate the magnitude of the frictional force that acts on the 4 kg block.
2.6 Calculate the apparent weight of the 8 kg block.
2.7 How does the apparent weight of the 8 kg block compare with its true weight? Write down only,
GREATER THAN, EQUAL TO or LESS THAN.
2.8 How does the apparent weight of the 4 kg block compare with its true weight? Write down only,
GREATER THAN, EQUAL TO or LESS THAN.
Exercise 3
ZACUBE-1 is the first South African satellite. It was designed and built by
postgraduate students, following the CubeSat Programme at the French
South African Institute of Technology (F’SATI), in collaboration with the
South African National Space Agency (SANSA). ZACUBE-1 was lunched on
21 November 2013 and is orbiting at a height of 600 km from the surface of
Earth. Weighing 1.2 kg, this CubeSat is about 100 times smaller than Sputnik
- the first satellite launched into space in 1957.
3.1 State Newton’s Law of Universal Gravitation in words. (2)
3.2 How would the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted by the Earth on ZACUBE-1
compare with the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted by the Earth on Sputnik, if
both satellites were orbiting at the same height?
Write down only LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or THE SAME. Explain the answer. (4)
3.3 Calculate the gravitational force exerted by the earth on the
satellite ZACUBE-1. (5)
3.4 Calculate the height the satellite must be orbiting at for the value
(6)
of the acceleration due to gravity to be 25% of the gravitational
acceleration on the surface of the Earth. [17]
Exercise 1 (Integration of: Law of Conservation of Momentum, Newton’s Laws and Equations of Motion)
The sketch below shows a missile launcher of mass 4800 kg at rest on a frictionless horizontal
surface
Thenext to thebelow
sketch base of a smooth
shows inclined launcher
a missile plane. It fires
of amass
rocket4800
of mass
kg100
at kg horizontally,
rest on a frictionless horizontal surface next
and recoils up the inclined plane, rising to a height of 6 m.
to the base of a smooth inclined plane. It fires a rocket of mass 100 kg horizontally, and recoils up the inclined
plane, rising to a height of 6 m.
6m
𝜃𝜃
1.1. State the law of conservation of linear momentum in words.

1.2.1.2. Why Why
is the is the system
system formed
formed by by the
the missile missile
launcher andlauncher
the rocket and the
is said rocket
to be is said to be isolated?
isolated?
1.3. Calculate the initial speed of the rocket.
Answer: 520,32 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
47
Exercise 2
1.2. Why is the system formed by the missile launcher and the rocket is said to be isolated?
1.3.
1.3. Calculate
Calculate thethe initial
initial speed
speed of theof the rocket.
rocket.
Answer:
Answer: 520,32 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
Exercise 2
Exercise 2
A Aconstant
constant force tothe
force to theright
rightis is applied
applied to Trolley
to Trolley A; it A;
hasitahas
mass a mass 10 kg3during
10 kg during 3 s and starts moving from rest
s and starts
onmoving
a horizontal
from restfrictional surface.
on a horizontal Aftersurface.
frictional the 3 s,After
thethetrolley moves
3 s, the trolleywith constant
moves velocity and collides with Trolley
with constant
B,velocity
whichand hascollides
a mass withofTrolley
8 kg B, and is athas
which rest. After
a mass of 8the
kg collision, the After
and is at rest. two the
trolleys stick together and move as a
collision,
system. The graph below shows how the momentum of Trolley A changes
the two trolleys stick together and move as a system. The graph below shows how the momentum with time just before and after the
collision.
of Trolley a changes with time just before and after the collision.
P= kg·m·s-1
Momentum versus time graph for trolley A
80
P= kg·m·s-1
Momentum versus time graph for trolley A

70
0,0 3,0 4,0 4,2 7 51

80 t (s)
70
2.1 the term

2.1 Define Define the of
impulse term impulse
a force of a force in words.
in words.
2.2 Use the information in the graph to calculate:
2.2 Use the information
0,0 in the graph
3,0 4,0to4,2
calculate: 7 t (s)
2.2.1. The impulse of the force exerted on the trolley during the three first seconds. Commented [U119]: Is this one item? Is this complet?
Pse check all – repetitive problems are suspected, with items that
2.2.1
2.2.2 Velocity The
of Trolley impulse
A before of the force exerted on the trolley during the three first seconds.
the collision. belong together being split into different items.
2.2.3 Velocity of the2.1
system formed
Define by Trolley
the term impulseAof
and B after
a force in the collision.
words.
2.2.2 2.2
2.2.4 The average Velocity
force of Trolley A before the collision.
Use the information in the graph to calculate:collision.
exerted by trolley B on trolley A during the Commented [U121]: Pse check/correct.
2.2.1. The impulse of the force exerted on the trolley during the three first seconds.
Commented [U123]: Are theseCommented [U119]: Is this one ite
2.2.3 Velocity of the system formed by Trolley A and B after the collision. sub-items of something?
Pse check all – repetitive problems are
5.3 Vertical Projectile2.2.2
Motion
Velocity of Trolley A before the collision. belong together being split into differe
Exercise 1 2.2.4 The average
2.2.3 force
Velocity of exerted
the system by trolley
formed B on
by Trolley trolley
A and A during
B after the collision.
the collision.
2.2.4 The average force exerted by trolley B on trolley A during the collision. Commented [U121]: Pse check/co
A falling stone takes 0,28 s to travel past a window that is 2,2 m in height. Ignore air friction.
5.3 Vertical Projectile Motion Commented [GI122]: corrected
Commented [U123]: Are these su
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
A falling stoneAtakes
falling0,28
stonestakes
to travel
0,28 spast a window
to travel that isthat
past a window 2,2ism2,2inmheight. Ignore
in height. Ignoreair
air friction.
friction.
1.1. From what height above the top of the window was the stone dropped?
52
52
48
1.2. Draw the position vs time graph for the motion of the stone for the period of time from when it was
dropped until it reached the base of the window.
1.3. Draw the velocity vs time graph for the motion of the stone for the period of time from when it was
dropped until it reached the base of the window.
Exercise 2
A very small rocket (A) is launched vertically upwards with an initial velocity of 100 m.s-1. At the same time,
a stone (B), which is initially at a height of 150 m, is dropped from the top of the very high building. Ignore air
resistance.
2.1 Calculate the velocity of stone B when it hits the ground.
2.2 Calculate the time taken for A and B to pass each other.
2.3 Calculate the fly time of the small rocket (A).
2.4 Draw the velocity versus time graph for the motion of the small rocket (A) from the moment it is launched
until it strikes the ground. Indicate the respective values of the intercepts on your velocity-time graph.
49
QUESTION 1
The diagram
The diagram below illustrates
below illustrates a roller-coaster track. Sections
a roller-coaster A, B and
track. C are frictionless.
Sections A, B and C are
There is friction on sections D and E. The sled has a total mass of 24,7 kg and is at rest at
frictionless. There is friction on sections D and E. The sled has a total mass of
the top left position.
24,7 kg and is at rest at the top left position.
1.1 How does the total mechanical energy of the sled at the top left position compare to
the total mechanical energy of the sled at the end of section D. Write down
GREATER THAN, LESS THAN or EQUAL TO. Then explain your answer. (3)
1.1 1.2 HowState thethe
does work-energy in words.
theoremenergy
total mechanical of the sled at the top left position compare (3) (2)
1.3 to The
the speed
total mechanical
of the sled atenergy of the sled
the beginning at theBend
of section of section
is 24,25 m·s-1 ; D.
theWrite
speeddown
of the
sled at the end of section D is 18 m·s -1
.
GREATER THAN, LESS THAN or EQUAL TO. Then explain your answer. (4)
1.3.1 Use the work-energy theorem to calculate the frictional force that acted on (5)
the sled in section D.
1.3.2 Use the LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY (ENERGY PRINCIPLE) to
calculate the minimum length of section E required for the sled to come to (6)
rest, if it has the same frictional force as calculated in 1.3.1. [16]
5.5 Doppler Effect

Exercise 1
1.2 State the work-energy theorem in words. (2)
The siren of a stationary police car emits sound waves at a frequency of 620 Hz. A
1.3 stationary listener
The speed watches
of the sled atthe
thepolice car approaching
beginning of section B him at constant
is 24,25 m·s-1 ; velocity
the speedonof
a straight
the (4)
sled
road. at the end
Assume that of
thesection
speedDofissound
18 m·s . is 340 m·s .
in air
-1 -1
1.1 How does the wavelength of the sound waves heard by the listener compare to (4)
the wavelength of the sound produced by the siren of the police car when it
approaches the listener? Write down LONGER THAN, SHORTER THAN or
EQUAL TO. Then explain your answer.
1.3.1 Use the work-energy theorem to calculate the frictional force that (5)
1.2 Name the phenomenon observed in QUESTION 1.1. (1)
acted on the sled in section D.
1.3.2 Use the LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY (ENERGY
PRINCIPLE) to calculate the minimum length of section E
(6) 54
required for the sled to come to rest, if it has the same frictional
force as calculated in 1.3.1. [16]
50
5.5 Doppler Effect
Exercise 1
The siren of a stationary police car emits sound waves at a frequency of 620 Hz. A stationary lis-
tener watches the police car approaching him at constant velocity on a straight road. Assume that
the speed of sound in air is 340 m·s-1.
1.1 How does the wavelength of the sound waves heard by the listener compare to the (4)
wavelength of the sound produced by the siren of the police car when it approaches the
listener? Write down LONGER THAN, SHORTER THAN or EQUAL TO. Then explain
your answer.
1.2 Name the phenomenon observed in QUESTION 1.1. (1)
1.3 Calculate the wavelength of the sound waves detected by the stationary lis- (6)
tener if the police car moves toward him at a speed of 110 km·h-1.
1.4 How will the answer to QUESTION 7.3 change if the police (1)
car moves away from the listener at 120 km·h-1? Write down
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
1.5 Write down ONE application of the Doppler effect in medicine. (1)
[13]
5.6 Electrostatics
Exercise 1
A group of grade 12 learners obtained the following set of values when investigating Coulomb’s
law.
Distance between charges (m) Electrostatic force (N)

1 1600
2 400
4 100
8 25
1.1 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)
1.2 Write down the dependent variable. (1)
1.3 Write down one controlled variable in this investigation. (1)
1.4 Using the results in the table above, plot a graph of electrostatic (2)
force versus distance between the charges.
51
1.5 Write down a conclusion for this investigation. (2)
Two small identical positively charged spheres are used in this
1.6 investigation.
1.6.1 Draw the electric field pattern for the system of the two (2)
charged spheres.
1.6.2 Calculate the magnitude of the charges used in this (4)
investigation.
1.6.3 One of the charges is removed and the other one is mounted
on an insulated stand, as shown in the sketch below.
Calculate the electric field at a point 25 cm from the
charge.
+ (3)
25 cm
[19]
(3)
Exercise 1 + (3)
25 cm
In the circuit diagram, below the emf of the battery is 12 V and the internal resistance is 0,4 Ω. [19]
The ammeter reading is 3 A. The resistance of the three resistors is the same. Ignore the
[19]
resistance of the wires.
Exercise 1 5.7 Electric Circuits

V
Exercise 1
In the circuit diagram, below

In the circuit thebelow
diagram, of 12
emf the theV
emf ofbattery is 12
the battery is 12V Vand
and the internal
the internal resistance
resistance is 0,4 Ω. The
is 0,4 Ω.
ammeter reading Theisammeter
3 A. The resistance
reading is 3 A. of
Thethe three resistors
resistance of the three isresistors
the same. Ignore
is the same. the resistance
Ignore the of the
resistance of the wires. S
wires. 2
A
V
R1 R2 R3
12 V
S1 S2
A
1.1 Write down TWO differences between electromotive force (emf) and terminal (2)
potential difference. R1 R2 R3
1.2 State ohm's law in words. (2)
1.3 Calculate the current passing through resistor R 2. (6)
1.4 S1
Determine the reading of the voltmeter. (3)
1.5 How will the reading on the voltmeter be affected if switches S 1 and S2 are
1.1 Write down TWO differences between electromotive force (emf) and terminal (2)
1.1 Write closed?
down TWO differences between electromotive force (emf) and (2)
potential difference.
Write down INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
1.2 State ohm's law in words. (2)
terminal potential difference.
Then explain the answer. (4)
1.3 Calculate the current passing through resistor R 2. (6)
1.2 State Ohm’s law in words. [17]
(2)
1.4 Determine the reading of the voltmeter. (3)
1.3 Calculate the current passing through resistor R2. (6)
Exercise 1.5
2 How will the reading on the voltmeter be affected if switches S 1 and S2 are
1.4 Determine the reading of the voltmeter. (3)
closed?
Then explain the answer. (4)
56
[17]
Exercise 2
52 56
1.5 How will the reading on the voltmeter be affected if switches S1 and
S2 are closed?
Then explain the answer.

(4)
[17]
Exercise 2
Thabo is a grade 12 learner. He is investigating the relationship between potential difference and
Thabo is a grade 12 learner.
current using a He is investigating
resistor with unknownthe relationship
resistance. between
He sets potential
up the circuit showndifference and current using
in the diagram.
a resistor with unknown resistance.
Thabo adjusts the currentHe setscircuit
in the up the circuit
using shown He
the rheostat. in the
takesdiagram. Thabo
the ammeter adjusts
reading while the current in
the circuit usingthe
the rheostat.
voltmeter He takes the
is disconnected. He ammeter
then measuresreading while the
the potential voltmeter
difference is the
across disconnected.
unknown He then
measures the potential difference across the unknown resistor for each current value
resistor for each current value I. From the readings taken from the ammeter and voltmeter, he I. From the readings
taken from the ammeter and the
could complete voltmeter,
following he could complete the following table.
table.
Experiment Current Potential

difference
number (A)
(V)
1 0,02 6
2 0,04 12
3 0,06 18
4 0,08 24
2.1. Writeinvestigative
2.1. Write a possible a possible investigative
questionquestion
for thisforpractical
this practical investigation.
investigation.
2.2. What could Thabo’s hypothesis have been for this investigation? Commented [GI125]: Better lik
2.2. What could Thabo’s hypothesis have been for this investigation?
2.3. What is:
2.3. What is:
2.3.1. the dependent variable Commented [GI126]: corrected
2.3.1. the dependent variable
2.3.2. the independent variable?
2.3.2. the2.4.
independent
Plot a graph variable?
of current vs. potential difference with the experimental data collected. Commented [GI128]: Better in
Commented [U129]: Pse check
2.5. Calculate
2.4. Plot a graph of currentthevs.
gradient of thedifference
potential graph. with the experimental data collected.
2.6. What quantity does the gradient of the graph represent?
2.5. Calculate the gradient of the graph.
2.7. Write a conclusion for this investigation. Commented [GI130]: Better fo
2.6. What quantity does the gradient of the graph represent?
5.8 Electrodynamics
Exercise 1 for this investigation.
2.7. Write a conclusion
57
53
5.8 Electrodynamics
Exercise 1
The diagram below represents an electrical machine; P is a split ring (commutator).
The diagram below represents an electrical machine; P is a split ring (commutator).
1.1
1.1 Identify
Identify theoftype
the type of electrical
electrical machine andmachine
write downand write conversion
the energy down thethat
energy
takes conversion that
takes
place place
in this in this
electrical electrical machine.
machine.
(2) (2)
1.2
1.2 Explain
Explain the function
the function of the component
of the component P. P. (2) (2)
1.3
1.3 The split ring (commutator) is replaced by slip rings. Which ONE of
The split ring (commutator) is replaced by slip rings. Which ONE of the following voltage- the following volt-
age-time
time graphs
graphs (Graph (Graph
A or A or
Graph B) Graph B)with
corresponds corresponds with the above change?
the above change?
12 V 12 V
Voltage
time
Voltage
time
Graph B
Graph A
Explain your answer.

Explain your answer. (3)
(3)
1.4 The light bulb shown in the circuit dissipates energy of 6 J per second. An identical light (5)
1.4 The
bulb light bulb
is connected showntoin
in parallel the circuit
it. Calculate the dissipates
rms current inenergy
the circuitofunder
6 J the
pernew
second. An identical (5)
light bulb
conditions. is connected
Assume in parallel
the emf remains to it. Calculate the rms current in [12]
unchanged. the circuit under
the new conditions. Assume the emf remains unchanged. [12]
58
54
Exercise 1
The work function of potassium is 3,52 x 10-19 J. An electromagnetic radiation strike on the surface of this metal
produces the photoelectric effect. The maximum kinetic energy of the electrons ejected is 4,20 x 10-19 J.
1.1 Define work function.
1.2 Define photoelectric effect.
1.3 Calculate:
1.3.1 The frequency of the incident radiation.
1.3.2 The wavelength of the incident radiation.
1.3.3 The threshold/cut-off frequency.
1.4 The intensity of the incident radiation on the metal plate is increased, whilst maintaining a
constant frequency. State and explain what effect this change has on the following:
1.4.1 kinetic energy of the emitted photo-electrons
1.4.2 number of photo-electrons emitted.
55
mber of photo-electrons emitted. Commented [GI131]: Better in this way

r answers - Set 6.1
1 Newton’s Laws
Laws
Exercise 1
Commented [U132]: Pse check right-hand item below.
1.1 1.2 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
Applying Newton's second law on the y-direction.
y-axis. (upwards as positive

y-axis
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ +𝑭𝑭𝐹𝐹𝑨𝑨⃗y-axis
𝑁𝑁 ⃗
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 + 𝐹𝐹 𝑔𝑔 = 0
59
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 y-axis
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒐𝒐
𝑁𝑁⃗⃗+ 𝐹𝐹 sin 37𝑜𝑜 − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 0
𝑭𝑭𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 𝑵𝑵⃗⃗⃗x-axis
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨 𝑜𝑜
𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨= 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⃗⃗⃗
⃗𝑁𝑁 𝑵𝑵− 𝐹𝐹 sin ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗37
⃗⃗ ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 𝑨𝑨
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 𝒐𝒐
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒐𝒐 y-axis
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨 x-axis
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ 𝑵𝑵 x-axis
𝑭𝑭 𝑨𝑨𝑨𝑨
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭 x-axis
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘
1.3 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 OR 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =
𝑁𝑁
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭
To calculate the frictional force, we apply Newton's second law in the x-direction.
𝑓𝑓
1.3 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 OR 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘
𝑁𝑁
1.3
1.3 as
x-axis. (Right = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 OR 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 positive)
𝑁𝑁
Commented [U133]: Pse check (including punctuation). (all)
To calculate the frictional

Exercise 2 force, we apply Newton's second law in the x-direction.
To
To𝐹𝐹calculate
⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
calculate thefrictional
= 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 the frictional force,
force, we apply
we apply Newton’s
Newton's second
second law law in the x-direction.
in the x-direction.
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑘𝑘 x-axis.
+ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 =(Right
0 2.1 as positive) Commented [U133]: Pse check (including punctuation). (a
x-axis.
x-axis.
𝑜𝑜 (Rightasas
(Right positive)
positive) Commented [U133]: Pse check (including punctuation). (
−𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 + 𝐹𝐹 cos 37 = 0
⃗ 𝑜𝑜= 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝐹𝐹 cos𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 37 𝑵𝑵
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 ⃗⃗
𝑭𝑭
⃗
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 =𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘30 ⃗
+ cos
𝐹𝐹𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴37 = 𝑜𝑜0
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑘𝑘 + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑜𝑜𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 0
−𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 +𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝐹𝐹=cos 37 𝑁𝑁= 0
23,96
−𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 + 𝐹𝐹 cos 37𝑜𝑜 = 0 ⃗⃗ 𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝐹𝐹 cos 37𝑜𝑜
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 23,96 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝐹𝐹 cos 37𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = = = 0,31 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 30 cos 37
𝑁𝑁 79,95
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 𝒐𝒐= 30 cos 37𝑜𝑜
𝑓𝑓𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝑘𝑘 = 23,96 𝑁𝑁
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 23,96 𝑁𝑁 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑓𝑓 23,96
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 23,96= 0,31
𝑁𝑁 79,95
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘 =2.2 = 0,31 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 𝜃𝜃
𝑁𝑁 79,95
1.4.1
1.4.1
We do not know the magnitude of the gravitational
We apply Newton's second law force, butx we
in the can calculate it.
direction.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (20)(9,8) = 196 𝑁𝑁
1.4.1 Now we can calculatex-axis (Right as positive)
the component:
1.4.1
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 30𝑜𝑜 = 196 sin 30𝑜𝑜 = We98apply
𝑁𝑁 Newton's second law in the x direction.
60
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 We apply Newton's second law in the x direction.
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑘𝑘 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 x-axis (Right as positive)
x-axis (Right as positive)
2.3 −23,96 = 10𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
2.4 We apply Newton's second 60 law in the Commented [U134]: Below and all instance
We apply Newton's second 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅law
= in
𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎the
⃗𝑥𝑥 y- 60 Commented [GI135]: Corrected (in in both
⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 x-direction.
direction.
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑘𝑘 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 Commented [U136]: Formatting: pse align
correctly (with the number). Repetitive problem
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦 𝑓𝑓⃗𝑘𝑘 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 correct all.
−23,96 = 10𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0 −23,96 = 10𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
56 𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 61
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0
200 + (−98) + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 = (20)(2)
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 cos 30𝑜𝑜 = 0
y-axis
y-axisy-axis
y-axis ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵y-axis
𝑵𝑵 𝑵𝑵
⃗⃗⃗
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇y-axis
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 𝒌𝒌
𝒇𝒇 ⃗⃗
⃗⃗
⃗⃗ 𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌𝒌𝒌 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌 x-axis
x-axis
x-axis
⃗⃗ x-axis
𝒇𝒇𝒌𝒌
x-axis
x-axis 𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈
⃗𝑭𝑭 ⃗𝒈𝒈
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭
Exercise 2
Exercise
Exercise 2 2
Exercise 2 2
Exercise
Exercise 22.1
2.1 2.1 2
Exercise
2.1
2.1
2.1
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵
2.1 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗
𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗ ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗
𝑭𝑭
𝑵𝑵
⃗⃗
𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇 ⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔 ⃗⃗
𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔𝒔𝒔
⃗⃗
𝒇𝒇𝒔𝒔
𝒐𝒐
⃗⃗ 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒐𝒐𝒐𝒐 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒇𝒇𝒐𝒐𝒔𝒔 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈 𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒐𝒐 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈 𝒈𝒈
𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝒐𝒐 2.2 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈
𝑭𝑭
𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 𝜃𝜃
2.2 2.2
2.2 𝜃𝜃
2.2 𝐹𝐹 =𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹⃗
= ⃗sin
𝒈𝒈𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃sin
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑭𝑭sin
2.2 𝐹𝐹We
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 =do 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹not sinknow𝜃𝜃 the magnitude of the gravitational force, but we can calculate it.
We We
do do
not not knowknow thethe magnitude
𝜃𝜃 magnitude ofof
the gravitational
the force,
gravitational butcan
we calculate
can we
calculate
it. it.
force, but force,
we can but can
it. calculate it.
We
2.2 do not know the magnitude of the gravitational force, but we
We do not𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 know
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin
= 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (20)(9,8)of
the magnitude = the
196gravitational
𝑁𝑁 calculate
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
We = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
=know =
(20)(9,8) (20)(9,8) = 196 𝑁𝑁
= 196 𝑁𝑁 of the gravitational force, but we can calculate it.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =do𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚not=
Now (20)(9,8) the magnitude
we can=calculate 196 𝑁𝑁 the component:
We
Now
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =weNow
dowe not
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚can we
canknow can
calculate
(20)(9,8)
= calculate=the calculate
the magnitude
the the
𝑁𝑁 component:
component:
196 of the gravitational force, but we can calculate it.
Now 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑜𝑜sin 30component: 𝑜𝑜
= 𝑜𝑜196 𝑜𝑜sin 30𝑜𝑜 = 98 𝑁𝑁
Now
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
Now = we𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹=can
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹=𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
we sin 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 calculate
sin
(20)(9,8)
30 30196
= == 196
sinthe
196 sincomponent:
𝑁𝑁
30 3098=𝑁𝑁98 𝑁𝑁
=
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹cansincalculate
30𝑜𝑜 = 196 the sincomponent:
30𝑜𝑜 = 98 𝑁𝑁
Now we can calculate
𝑜𝑜
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 30 = 196 sin 30 = 98 𝑁𝑁 the component:
𝑜𝑜
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 sin 30𝑜𝑜 = 196 sin 30𝑜𝑜 = 98 𝑁𝑁

2.3 2.4 We apply Newton's second law in the Commented [U134]: Below and all instance
2.3 2.3
2.3 We apply Newton's second law in the 2.4y-We 2.4 apply We apply Newton's Newton's
second second lawthe
law in in the Commented
Commented [U134]:[U134]:
Below Below
and all and all instances
instances : in or
: in or on?
2.3 We apply We apply Newton's second
Newton's second law in the y- law in the y- 2.4 We apply Newton's second law in the Commented [U134]: Commented Below[GI135]:
and all instances
Corrected : in (in
or on?
in both
We apply Newton's second law in the y- x-direction. Commented
Commented [GI135]:
[GI135]: Corrected
Corrected (in in both(in incases)
both cases)
2.3 direction. 2.4 x-direction.
x-direction.
We apply Newton's second law in the Commented [U134]: [GI135]:
Commented Below and all
(ininstances
[U136]:
Corrected inFormatting:: in or
both cases) pseon?align
direction.
We direction.
apply Newton's second law in the y- x-direction. Commented
Commented [U136]:[U136]:
correctly Formatting:
Formatting:
(with the pse align
number). pseitems
alignvertically
Repetitive items
problemve
2.3 direction. 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦 2.4 We apply Newton's second law in the
Commented
Commented
correctly [GI135]:
[U136]:
[U134]:
(with the Corrected
Formatting:
Below
number).and (in
allpse inalign
Repetitive both
instances cases)
items
: in
problems vertically
or on?
seen inP
x-direction. 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
correctly (with the number).
correct all. Repetitive problems seen in text.
We
direction.=𝐹𝐹⃗ 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎=
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 apply ⃗ Newton's
𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ second law in the y- correctly (with all.
correctcorrect
Commentedall. the number). Repetitive problems seen in text. P
[U136]: Formatting:
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ⃗⃗ 𝑦𝑦 ⃗ ⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = ⃗
𝐹𝐹 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎=
x-direction. ⃗ 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ Commented
correct all. [GI135]: Corrected pse
(in in align
both items
cases) vertically
direction. 𝑁𝑁 + 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 ⃗ 𝑥𝑥 ⃗ correctly (with the number). Repetitive problems seen in text. P
𝐹𝐹
𝑁𝑁⃗⃗ += ⃗⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹 ⃗𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎
+= ⃗𝐹𝐹⃗𝑦𝑦𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
0 =0 𝐹𝐹 + 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 Commented
correct all. [U136]: Formatting: pse align items vertically
61 (with the number). Repetitive problems seen in text. P
⃗𝑁𝑁⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅+ ⃗
𝐹𝐹 = 0 ⃗ ⃗ ⃗
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅+ = ⃗ ⃗
++⃗𝐹𝐹𝑥𝑥𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 + ⃗
=𝐹𝐹𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎
𝑓𝑓 = ⃗𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
𝐹𝐹⃗⃗⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 =⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ 𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0 𝐹𝐹 + ⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝐹𝐹 𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 ⃗ 𝑥𝑥 61 61 correctly
𝑁𝑁 + − 𝐹𝐹𝑁𝑁 −=𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 0 =0 ⃗⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 =⃗ 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 ⃗200 + (−98)
𝐹𝐹 + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 = (20)(2) 61 correct all.
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 0 𝑁𝑁 −𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 cos 30𝑜𝑜 = 0 𝐹𝐹
200 + 𝐹𝐹
+200 ++𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓(−98)
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔(−98) = 𝐹𝐹⃗⃗𝑓𝑓⃗+
+ 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 ⃗(20)(2)
𝑥𝑥 𝐹𝐹
= 𝑓𝑓 = (20)(2)
⃗𝑁𝑁 ⃗ ⃗ 200 + (−98) + 𝐹𝐹 = (20)(2) 61
𝑁𝑁 + − 𝐹𝐹 𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔−
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 ==𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
cos 0030cos = 𝑜𝑜
300 = 0 ⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝐹𝐹⃗102
𝐹𝐹 +𝑓𝑓𝐹𝐹
= 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 ⃗⃗𝑥𝑥𝑓𝑓 = 40
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 cos𝑁𝑁30=𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 0cos 30𝑜𝑜 200
102 + (−98)
𝐹𝐹⃗⃗𝑓𝑓 +=𝑓𝑓𝐹𝐹⃗40 =𝐹𝐹⃗40𝑓𝑓 = (20)(2)
102 𝑓𝑓+ 61
𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 −=𝐹𝐹𝑁𝑁 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔==
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 cos𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 030 cos𝑜𝑜
𝑜𝑜 30 𝑜𝑜 102 + 𝐹𝐹 = 40
𝑁𝑁 − = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 coscos 30 30𝑜𝑜 = 0
𝑓𝑓 ⃗𝑓𝑓 +
200 + (−98)
⃗𝑓𝑓−= 𝐹𝐹 = ⃗
𝐹𝐹40 = − 102
(20)(2)
𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹⃗ =+
102 𝐹𝐹⃗40
𝑓𝑓𝐹𝐹= 4010240 − 102 𝑓𝑓
𝑁𝑁 − = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹cos cos30 30𝑜𝑜 = 0 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 40 − 102
102 ⃗
𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 cos 30𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑓𝑓 =+40 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓−=102 40
⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 = 40 − 102
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘
2.5 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 OR 𝜇𝜇𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = 𝑁𝑁
2.5 2.5
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 OR 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑁𝑁
62
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘62= = 0,365
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 169,7
= 0,365
169,7
6.2 Solutions: Momentum and Impulse

Exercise 1 Solutions
1.1 Momentum is the product of an object’s mass and its velocity.
1.1 1.2
Momentum
25 kgm.s is-1the product
[Read of an object’s
the graph; mass and its
initial momentum velocity.
is where the graph starts].
1.2 1.3
25 kgm.s -1
From 1s [Read
to 10the graph;
s the graphinitial
is amomentum is where
horizontal line – theretheisgraph starts].or decrease; the slope
no increase Commented [U137]: Pse check item, includ
1.3 Fromof1s thetograph
10 s the graph is a horizontal line – there is no increase or decrease; the slope
is zero. Commented [U137]: Pse check item, including bra
of the
1.4 Atgraph
15 s, is 25zero.
s and 30 s [These points correspond to the 0 value for both the x and y axis.] Commented [GI138]: corrected
1.4 1.5
At 15From
s, 250-15
s and 30 sobject
s the [These points correspond
is moving in the sametodirection
the 0 value for both
(East); thenthe x andaty15
it stops axis.]
s; BUT it
1.5 Frommoves
0-15 sinthe theobject
oppositeis moving
direction in the
fromsame direction
15s to 25 s. (East); then it stops at 15 s; BUT it
moves
1.6 Theinobject
the opposite
could havedirection from 15sstopped
decelerated, to 25 s. and changed direction. / The object could have
1.6 The collided
object couldwith have
anotherdecelerated,
object at 10s, stopped and changed
and stopped for 5 sdirection.
from 10-15/ The objectmoved
s, then could in
have
the
collided with another
opposite directionobject
from at 10s,s.and stopped for 5 s from 10-15 s, then moved in the
15-25 57
opposite
1.7 directionoffrom
The product 15-25acting
the force s. on an object and the time the force acts on the object.
1.7 1.8
The Fproduct
net ∆t of = the force acting
∆p [using on anfrom
the values object
theand the time the force acts on the object.
graph]
1.8 FnetF∆t = ∆p
net ∆t = 0-25[using the values from the graph]
1.1 Momentum is the product of an object’s mass and its velocity.
1.2 25 kgm.s-1 [Read the graph; initial momentum is where the graph starts].
1.3 From 1s to 10 s the graph is a horizontal line – there is no increase or decrease; the slope of the graph
is zero.
1.4 At 15 s, 25 s and 30 s [These points correspond to the 0 value for both the x and y axis.]
1.5 From 0-15 s the object is moving in the same direction (East); then it stops at 15 s; BUT it moves in
the opposite direction from 15s to 25 s.
1.6 The object could have decelerated, stopped and changed direction. / The object could have collided
with another object at 10s, and stopped for 5 s from 10-15 s, then moved in the opposite direction from
15-25 s.
1.7 The product of the force acting on an object and the time the force acts on the object.
1.8 Fnet ∆t = ∆p [using the values from the graph]
Fnet ∆t = 0-25
= -25 kgm.s-1
Impulse = 25 kgm.s-1 to the West
It is important to make a sketch of the situation and to select positive direction. In this case, let’s use positive
direction upwards. If a drawing is not provided, drawing the situation will help in solving the problem.
1.1 a =g= 9,8 (m.s-2 ) downwards.
1.2 H= hi + ∆y
v2= vi2+2g∆y
At the maximum height, the velocity of the projectile is zero:
58
02 = (10)2+2 (-9,8) ∆y
-100 = - (19,6) ∆y
∆y = 5,10 m
H = 3,5 + 5,10 = 8,60 m
1.3 1.1 Zero.

a =g=[The9,8 ball
(m.smakes
-2 a turn, here so it stops momentarily.]
) downwards.
1.2 H= hi + ∆y
1.4 The timevrequired
2
= vi2+2g∆y is from point 0 of projection to the maximum height where the stone turns back
At the maximum
towards the ground height, thev velocity
and the = 0 m.s-1of the projectile is zero:
f
0 = (10) +2 (-9,8) ∆y
2 2
-100 = - (19,6) ∆y
1.1 a =g= 9,8 vf =(m.s
vi +-2 )gdownwards.
Δt
1.2 H= hi + ∆y
∆y = 5,10 m
)vdownwards.
1.1 a =g= 9,8 (m.s-2 0
2
= vi2+2g∆y H = 3,5 + 5,10 = 8,60 m
= 10+ (-9,8)
At the maximum height,Δt
the velocity of the projectile is zero:
1.2 H= hi + ∆y
v2=1.3vi2+2g∆y0Zero.
2
= (10) 2
+2 (-9,8)
[The ball ∆y makes a turn, here so it stops momentarily.] Commen
At the maximum
1.4 -100
-10height,
The =
= (-9,8) -
time(19,6)
the Δt ∆y of the
velocity
required is projectile
from point is zero:
0 of projection to the maximum height where the stone turns back square brac
02 = (10)2+2 ∆y (-9,8)
= 5,10∆y m items.
towards
H = 3,5 the ground and the vf = 0 m.s -1
-100 = - (19,6) ∆y + 5,10 = 8,60 m Commen
∆y = 5,10 Δtm= 1,02 s
1.3 HZero.
= 3,5[The
+ 5,10 vf = mvia+turn,
ball= makes
8,60 g Δthere so it stops momentarily.] Commented [U139]: Formatting/re-typing: Commen
pse check u
1.4 The time required0is=from 10+point (-9,8) 0 ofΔt projection to the maximum height where the stone turns back square brackets – standardise use throughoutseen text with
withequ
c
1.3 1.5 towards Time the
Zero. [The ball makes a -10 taken
ground from
and
turn,=here the
sothe
vit =point
0 m.s of
-1
f stops momentarily.] projection the maximum height and the time from the maximum
items. height
(-9,8) Δt Commented [U139]: Formatting/re-typing: pse check use of
Commented
– standardise[GI140]: corrected
1.4 The time
required the is from
point point 0 of projection
ofsprojection aretoequal
the maximum height where the stone turns back square brackets use throughout text with equivalent
v Δt = =
v +1,02
towards the ground and the vf = 0 m.s
f i g Δt -1 items. Commented [U141]: Re-typing required – repetitive pr
0 = 10+ (-9,8) Δt Commentedseen with character
[GI140]: spacing – pse standardise throughout.
corrected
vf = vi + g-10
tΔt==tup (-9,8)
+tdown Δt Commented [U141]: Re-typing required – repetitive problems
0 =Δt = 1,02
10+
1.5 (-9,8)
Time s Δt taken from the point of projection the maximum height and the seen time from the maximum
with character spacing – pse standardise throughout.
Commen
tup
-10 = (-9,8) Δt = tdownthe
height when point theofball reachesare
projection the equal
projection point use of italic
Δt = 1,02 s
t = t +t
1.5 Time taken from the point of projection the maximum height and the time from the maximum
up down Commented [U142]: Formatting: Pse check Commen
need for a
height tthe = 2t pointup of tupprojection
= tdown when are equal the ball reaches the projection point use of italics (pattern not seen by editor).
Commen
1.5 Time taken t the
= tuppoint
+tdownof t == 2t2,04 CommentedCommented [U143]:Pse
fromt = projection the maximum height and the time from the maximum [U142]: Formatting: Pse check.
=2tdown
x 1,02 ballsreaches the projection point
up check need for ad hoc
height the point oftupprojection when
t are
= 2the
equal
x 1,02 = 2,04 s
use of italics (pattern not seen[GI144]:
Commented by editor).corrected
t = tup+tdownt = 2tup Commented [U143]: Pse check.
1.6 when The total
t = 2totalx 1,02 time
=reaches
2,04for the motion of the stone is the time taken by the stone from the point of projection
t up= tdown The
1.6 the ball
time for sthe themotion
projection of point
the stone is the time taken by the stone from the point
Commented [GI144]:of corrected
projection to
1.6 t The total
= 2tup to the
time formaximum
the motion height,
of the plus
stone is the
the time
time for
taken the
by stone
the stone from
from the
the maximum
point of height
projection to the ground. Commen
t to the the
maximum maximum
= 2 x 1,02 = 2,04 s height, height,
plus the 1 plus
time the
for thetime
stone for the
from stone
the from
maximum the maximum
height to the height
ground. to the ground.
Commen
1.6 The total time for the motion Δyof 1=the viΔt + is g
stone theΔt
2
time taken by the stone from the point of projection Commented [GI146]: corrected
Δy = viΔt + g Δt2 2
to the maximum height, plus 2the time for the stone from the maximum height to the ground. Commented [U145]: Pse check.
From 1 the2 From maximum theheight
maximum height to the ground:
to the ground: Commented [GI146]: corrected
Δy = viΔt + g Δt
2 1 1
From themaximum -8,60 = (0-8,60
maximum Δt) += (0
xheight xthe
(-9,8)
to Δt)
Δt 2
+ (-9,8) Δt
ground: 2
From the height to the
2 ground: 2
-8,60 =- 4,9 1 Δt 2
-8,60 = (0 x Δt) + -8,60 (-9,8) Δt =-2 4,9 Δt2
8,60 2
t  Δt2
-8,60 =-4,9
4,9t 
8,60
 1,76 
 1,76 
8,60Δt = 1,33 s 4,9
t   1,76 
4,9 tt = t1 (upwards) + t
Δt = 1,33 s
2 (downwards)
Δt = 1,33 stt = 1,02+ t1,33 = 2,35 s

t = t1 (upwards) + t2 (downwards)
tt = t1 (upwards) + t2 (downwards)
1.7 tvt f==1,02+
vi + g 1,33
Δt = 2,35 tt =s 1,02+ 1,33 = 2,35 s
vf = 0 + (-9,8)1,33
1.7 v f = vi + g 1.7
1.7 Δt vf = vi + g Δt
vf = 0 + (-9,8)1,33 vf = 0 + (-9,8)1,33 63
vf = 0 – 13,03 63
vf = - 13,03 m.s-1 63
vf = 13,03 (m.s-1 ) downwards
downwards
Thetime
The timetaken
takenby
by the
the object
object to
to go
go up
up is
is less
less than
than the
the time
time taken
taken for
for itit to
to come
come down
down from
from the
the maximum
maximum height. Therefore, the area of the triangle representing motion of the stone up will be
height. Therefore,
less than the areathe area
of the of the representing
triangle triangle representing
the objectmotion
movingof from
the stone up will
maximum be less
height than the area of
to the
ground.
the triangle representing the object moving from maximum height to the ground.
59
1.8
ground. maximum height. Therefore, the area of the triangle representing motion of the stone up will be
less than the area of the triangle representing the object moving from maximum height to the
ground.
1.8
1.8
1.8

1.9 The position vs time graph is actually a mind-map of the actual path travelled by the object.
10
Theposition
1.9 1.9 The positionvs vs
timetime graph
graph is actually
is actually a mind-map
a mind-map of path
of the actual the actual
travelledpath travelled
by the object. by the object.
9
8 10
7 9
6 8
y (m)
5 7
4 6
y (m)
3 5
2 4
1 3
2 t (s)
0
0 1 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
t (s)
0
Exercise 2 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
Solution:Exercise 2
Exercise 2
2.1 Solution:
Solution:
2.1 64
2.1 64
 From 0 to 1 s, the velocity of the ball decreases from 10 m∙s-1 to zero, and the acceleration of the ball
is constant.
 From 1 to 2 s, the velocity of the ball increases from zero to (– 10 m∙s-1) with constant acceleration. At 2
s, the ball is at the point of projection.
 From 2 to 3 s, the velocity of the ball increases from (– 10 m∙s-1) to (– 20 m∙s-1). At 3 s, the ball hits the
ground and bounces back.
 From 3 to 4 s, the velocity of the ball decreases to zero at the maximum height.
 From 4 to 5 s, the velocity of the ball increases with constant acceleration, until it hits the ground for the
second time.
60
ball
ballhits
hitsthe
theground
groundand
andbounces
bouncesback.
back.
 From 0 to1From
s,From 3 3toto4of4s,the
the velocity s,the
the
ballvelocity
velocityoffrom
decreases ofthe
theball
10 balldecreases
m∙s -1
decreases
to zero, and to tozero
the zeroatatthe
accelerationthemaximum
maximumheight.
height.
of the ball is
 From constant.
From4 4toto5 5s,s,the thevelocity
velocityofofthe
theball
ballincreases
increaseswith withconstant
constantacceleration,
acceleration,until
untilit ithits
hitsthe
the
 From 1 to 2 s, the velocity of the ball increases from zero to (– 10 m∙s ) with constant
-1
ground
ground for
forthethe second
second time.
time.
acceleration. At 2 s, the ball is at the point of projection.
 From 2 to 3 s, the velocity of the ball increases from (– 10 m∙s-1) to (– 20 m∙s-1). At 3 s, the
2.2
ball
2.22.2 1010
hits the m∙s
ground
10m∙s
m∙s upwards
-1 -1 -1
andupwards
bounces
upwards back.
 From 3 to 4 s, the velocity of the ball decreases to zero at the maximum height.
 From 4 to 5 s, the velocity of the ball increases with constant acceleration, until it hits the
2.3
ground
2.3
2.3Option
for 11 1 time.
the second
Option
Option Option 2
Option
Option 22
2.2 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻=
10 m∙s -1 = |∆𝑦𝑦|
upwards
|∆𝑦𝑦|
2.3 Option 1 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓++𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 Option 2

𝐻𝐻 = |∆𝑦𝑦|
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻==( ( ) ∆𝑡𝑡
) ∆𝑡𝑡
22
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 + 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖
𝐻𝐻 = (
2 −20
) ∆𝑡𝑡 (−10)
−20++(−10)
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻==( ( ))(3(3−−2)2)
22
−20 + (−10)
𝐻𝐻 = ( ) (3 − 2)
2
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻==1515𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐻𝐻 = 15 𝑚𝑚
11
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻==𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴==𝐴𝐴1𝐴𝐴1++𝐴𝐴2𝐴𝐴2==𝑏𝑏ℎ𝑏𝑏ℎ++ 𝑏𝑏ℎ𝑏𝑏ℎ
1
𝐻𝐻 = 𝐴𝐴 = 𝐴𝐴1 + 𝐴𝐴2 = 𝑏𝑏ℎ + 𝑏𝑏ℎ 22
2 11
1
𝐻𝐻 = (1)(−10) + (1)(−10)𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻==(1)(−10)
(1)(−10)++ (1)(−10)
(1)(−10)
2 22
𝐻𝐻 = −10 + (−5) = 15 𝑚𝑚 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻== −10++(−5)
−10 (−5)==1515𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
2.4 Inelastic, because after bouncing, the speed of the ball is less than the speed it hits the
2.4
2.4
2.4
ground then Inelastic,
Inelastic,
Inelastic,
kinetic energy because
because
isbecause
not after
after
conserved. after
bouncing,
bouncing,
bouncing, the the thespeed
speed speed ofof
of the the
the
ball ball
is ball
lessisisthan
less
lessthe
than
than the
thespeed
speed
Commenteditspeed itPseithits
hits the
[U147]:
hits the
ground
check
thethen
– not understood.
ground
groundthen
thenkinetic
kineticenergy
energyisisnot
notconserved.
kinetic energy is not conserved.
conserved. Commented
Commente
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Position vs. time (taking ground as level
zero)
25
Position
Positionvs.
vs.time
time(taking
(takingground
groundasaslevel
level
20 zero)
zero)
15 2525
y (m)
10
2020
5
0 1515
y (m)
y (m)
-5 0 1
1010
2 3 4 5 6
t (s)
55
Or
00
Or
-5-50 0 11 22 33 44 65 5 5 66
Position vs. time (taking top of
building as level zero) t (s)
t (s)
10
5
0
6565
-5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Y (m)
-10
-15
-20
t (s)
Work Energy Power

Exercise 1
1.1 The net (total) work (done on an object/particle) is equal to the change in kinetic energy
(of the object/particle).
1.2 Data Free-body diagram
m = 600 kg
FA = 191,7 N
61
Θ = 300
ff = 160,02 N
-20
t (s)
Exercise 1
1.1 The net (total) work (done on1an object/particle) is equal to the change in kinetic energy
Exercise
6.4 Work Energy 1.1
Power
The net (total) work (done on an object/particle) is equal to the change in kinetic energy
Exercise 1
1.1 The net (total) work (done on an object/particle) is equal to the change in kinetic energy (of the
object/particle).

1.2 Data m = 600 kg
m = 600
mkg
= 600 kg FA = 191,7 N
FA = 191,7 N Θ = 300
FA = 191,7 N ff = 160,02 N
Θ = 300
Δx = ?
ff = 160,02
Θ =N300
Δx = ?
ff = 160,02 N
Δx = ?
The work-energy theorem can be applied for both conservative and non-conservative forces:
W net = ΔEK 
Wfr +be
The work-energy theorem can W Aapplied
+W g+ Wfor
N = ΔE
both
K conservative and non-conservative forces:
mvi2 mv2f
ff Δx cos 1800 + FΔx cos 300 + FgΔx cos 900 + NΔx cos 900 = 
The
W =work-energy
ΔEK  2 2
theorem can be applied for both conservative and non-conservative forces:
net
W net = ΔEK 
Wfr fr++WW
W A
+W
A +W
g
+g+
WWN
= ΔE
=NΔEK
K 66
mv2f mv 2
ff Δx cos 1800 + FΔx cos 300 + FgΔx cos 900 + NΔx cos 900 =  i
2 2
6003
2
600(0) 2
160,02 Δx (-1) +(191,7) Δx (cos 30 ) + 0 + 0 = 0
 
2 2 66
(-160,02+ 166.017...) Δx= 2700
(-160,02+ 166.017...) Δx= 2700
(5,997...) Δx =2700
Δx = 450,22
(5,997...) m
Δx =2700
6003 600(0) 2
2
160,02 Δx (-1)
1.3= 450,22
Power +(191,7)
is the Δx (cos
rate at which 300is
work ) +done:
0+0P =W   
Δx m 2 2
t
(-160,02+
Fxcos 166.017...)
 Δx= 2700 W0 6003
2
600(0) 2
P
1.3 Power
(5,997...) is the
Δx =2700 rate at which
160,02 Δx work
(-1) is done:
+(191,7) ΔxP =
(cos 30 ) +
 0 + 0 = Alternative
  answer
∆t 2 2
t
Δx = 450,22 m (-160,02+ 166.017...) Δx= 2700
We must
F∆xcos convert
θ minutes(5,997...) into seconds:
Δx =2700 W P=F v 
5P minutes
1.3 = Power=is300 the srate at which
Δx = 450,22 m work is done: P  
∆t t
191
F ,7
xcos  450
 , 22  cos
1.3 30 o is the rate at which work is done: P  W 
Power 30
P 
P  t P=191,7answer
Alternative cos 300   )
We must  convert
t 300
minutesFintoxcosseconds:
  2 
P Alternative answer
P = must
We 249,03 W minutes
convert t seconds:
into P=F v 
51.4
5 Greater
minutes
minutes than
== 300
300 ss We must convert minutes into seconds: P = 249,03
P=F v  W
The work done will 5be minutes = 300 s
greater.
o
191,7  450,22  cos 30,7  450,22  cos 30 o 30 
0  0 3
P θ decreases, cosP θ 191
As increases;

 therefore, the horizontal component
P=191,7 will
cosbe
P=191,7 30 30   0)
greater.
cos  )
300 300  2 2 
P = 249,032W P = 249,03 W
Exercise
P = Greater
249,03 W 1.4 Greater than P = 249,03 W
1.4 than
2.1 The total mechanical energy
The work done will(the sum of gravitational potential
be greater. P = 249,03
energyWand kinetic energy) in
The work done
an isolated will be
system greater.
remains
As constant.
θ decreases, cos θ increases; therefore, the horizontal component will be greater.
1.4
As θGreater thancos θ increases; therefore, the horizontal component will be greater.
decreases,
Exercise 2
2.1 The total mechanical energy (the sum of gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy) in
Exercise
The 2
work done will beangreater.
isolated system remains constant.
an θ
As isolated system
decreases, cosremains constant.
θ increases; therefore, the horizontal component will be greater.
2.2 From top to bottom of the inclined plane:
Data
m= 2 kg Data Free body diagram
hi=624m m= 2 kg Free body diagram
hf = 0 m
2.2 hi= 4 m
From top to bottom of the inclined plane:
vi= 0 m·s-1 hf = 0 m
Data vi= 0 m·s-1
5 minutes = 300 s 300  2 
We must convert minutes
P = 249,03 W into seconds: P=F v 
191,7 = 450
5Pminutes 300
1.4,Greater
22
s  cos 30 o
than 30
  PP=191,7
= 249,03 W
cos 300   )
 cos 30cos θ increases; therefore, the horizontal component will be greater. 0  32 0 
The
300 work done willo be greater.
191,7  450
As ,θ22
decreases,
PP =249,03 W  P=191,7 cos 30   )
300  2 
1.4 Greater than
Exercise Exercise 2
2 W P = 249,03 W
P = 249,03
The work done 2.1will
Thebetotalgreater.
mechanical energy (the sum of gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy) in
1.4
As θGreater than
an isolated system remains constant.
decreases, cos θ increases; therefore, the horizontal component P = 249,03 W
will be greater.
The work
2.1 Thedone
total will be greater.
mechanical energy (the sum of gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy) in an
As θ decreases,
isolated
Exercise 2 cos θremains
system increases; therefore, the horizontal component will be greater.
constant.
Exercise
2.2 2 system
From
an isolated top to bottom of the
remains inclined plane:
constant.
2.1 The total
Data
mechanical energy (the sum of gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy) in
an isolated
Data m=system
2 kg remains constant. Free body diagram
hi= 4 m
hf = 0 m
m= 2 kg vi= 0 m·s-1
g= 9,8 m·s-2
2.2 hi= 4 m v
From topi=?
to bottom of the inclined plane:
Data
2.2
m= 2 kg From top to bottom of the inclined Freeplane:
body diagram
Data h= 0 m
hi= 4f m
m=
hf= 02 m kg Only conservative energy acting Free on
body
the diagram
object, the system is isolated therefore mechanical
hi= v = 0 m·s -1 energy is conserved.
vi= 04i m·s
m -1 Commented [U148]: Pse check –
𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 used so that all readers can easily un
h = 0 m
g= 9,8 m·s-2
f We can apply the principle of conservation of mechanical energy to solve the problem:
– repetitive problems seen.
=?0g=m·s
vvii= 9,8-1m·s-2 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
g= 9,8 m·s-2 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
vi=?vi=? 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2
+ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖 = + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓
2 2
Only conservative energy acting on the object, the system is isolated therefore mechanical energy is
Only
conserved. conservative energy acting on the object, the system is isolated therefore mechanical
energy is conserved. 67 Commented
Only
𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 =conservative
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 energy acting on the object, the system is isolated therefore mechanical used so that al
– repetitive pro
energy
We canisapply conserved.
the principle of conservation of mechanical energy to solve the problem: Commente
𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 used so that
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀can = 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
We apply the principle of conservation of mechanical energy to solve the problem: – repetitive p
We
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + can𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾apply
= 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾the + principle
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 of conservation of mechanical energy to solve the problem:
𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 2 2
𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓
𝑖𝑖
𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + +𝐸𝐸𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝑖𝑖 =
𝐸𝐸 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 +2 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
22 2
𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓
+ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖 = + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓
2 2
2 × 02 2𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2
2×0 2 2
+ 2 × 9,8 × 4 = 2
2𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 2 + 2 × 9,8 × 4 67
+ 2 × 9,8 × 4 = + 2 × 9,8 × 4
2 0 + 78,4 = 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 + 0 2 67
v2 = 78,4
0 + 78,4 = 𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 + 0
v = 78,4 v = 8,85 m∙s-1
v2 = 78,4
v= 78,4 v2.3
= The
8,85net/total
m∙s-1work done on an object is equal to the change in the object’s kinetic energy.
2.4 From A to B.
Free
2.3 The
2.3 The net/total
net/total work on
work done done
an onbody
andiagram
object object
is equalistoequal to the in
the change change in thekinetic
the object’s object’s kinetic energy.
energy.
Data:
2.4 From Aµkto
= 0,2
B.
Δx = 10 m
2.4 From A m∙s
vi = 8,85 to B.
-1
Free body diagram
Data: vi =
Data:
µk = µ k = 0,2
0,2
Δx = 10 m
vi = 8,85
Δx = 10 m
m∙s-1
vi = The work energy theorem can be applied to both conservative and non-conservative forces.
vi = 8,85 m∙s-1
Wnet  Ek
Wfr  WFg  WN  Ek f  Eki
vi =
mv 2f mvi2
f K x cos180 0  Fg cos 90 0  N cos 90 0  Ek f  Eki  K Nx(1)  
2 2
The work energy theorem
mv 2f mvcan
2
be applied to both conservative and non-conservative forces.
  K mg.x  i
 63
2 2
Wnet  E k
2
v f v 2
K g.x   i
2.3 The net/total work done on an object is equal to the change in the object’s kinetic energy.
2.4 From A to B. Free body diagram

The
The work
work
Data: energy
energy theorem
theorem canapplied
can be be applied
to bothtoconservative
both conservative and non-conservative
and non-conservative forces. forces.
µk = 0,2
Δx = 10 m
viW m∙s-1E k
net 
= 8,85
vi =
Wfr  WFg  WN  Ek f  Eki
mvi2 mv 2f
0
f K x cos180  Fg cos 90  N cos 90  Ek f  Eki 0 0
 K Nx(1)  
2 2
2
mv f canmv
The work energy theorem 2
be applied to both conservative and non-conservative forces.
  K mg.x   i
Wnet  Ek 2 2
2
Wfr  WFg  WN  vEkf f  Evki2
  K g.x   i mv 2f
f K x cos180  Fg cos 902
2 mvi2
0 0
 N cos 90 0  Ek f  Eki  K Nx(1)  
2 2
v f  (vi  22g.x2 )
2 2
mv f
mv
 2K mg.x  2  i
v f  (8,85) 2  2 2 0,2  9,8 10)
2 v 2f vi2
vfK g.78
x ,32 39 ,2
2 2
v 2v vi2  39
f  ( 2g,12
.x)
f
v2f  (8,85)2  2  0,21 9,8 10)
v f  6,25m.s
v 2f  78,32  39,2
2.5. From bottom to top.
v f  39,12
Data:
2.5. From bottom
1 to top.
v f  6,25m.s
⃗⃗ (𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
𝑁𝑁
2.5. From bottom to top.
Data:
v  6,25m.s 1
Data:
i
⃗⃗ (𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
𝑁𝑁
vi  6,25m.s 1 𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 68
𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 68
(𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐) 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
(𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐) 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
m = 2 kg
hi = 0 m
vi  0 m.  s 1
hm
f
==?2 kg
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 0,2
hi = 0 m
When
hf = ? there are non-conservative forces acting on a system, we can apply the principle of conservation of
When there
energy (laware of non-conservative
conservation offorces acting on a system, we can apply the principle of
energy).
conservation of energy (law of conservation of energy).
𝑊𝑊𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = ∆𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾 + ∆𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∆𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 180 = (𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐸𝐸𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 ) + (𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝐸𝐸𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 )
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑓𝑓2 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖2
𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇∆𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 180 = ( − )+ (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓 − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖 )
2 2
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑓𝑓2 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖2
𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇∆𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 180 = ( − )+ (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓 − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖 )
2 2
2×02 2×(6.25)2
0,2 × 2 × 9,8 × 5(−1) = ( − )+ (2 × 9,8 × ℎ𝑓𝑓 − 2 × 9,8 × 0)
2 2
−19.6 = 0 − 39,0625 + 19,6ℎ

h = 0,99 m
ℎ = ∆𝑥𝑥 sin 𝜃𝜃
2.6 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0,99 = 5 sin 𝜃𝜃
Opposite 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = sin 𝜃𝜃 = 0,198
ℎ𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
θElectrostatics side θ = 11,450
6.6
Exercise 1
1.1 electric field is a region of space in which an electric charge experiences a force. The
64 direction of the electric field at a point is the direction that a positive test charge would move
if placed at that point.
𝑓𝑓 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖
𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇∆𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 180 = ( − )+ (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑓𝑓 − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖 )
2 2
2×02 2×(6.25)2
0,2 × 2 × 9,8 × 5(−1) = ( − )+ (2 × 9,8 × ℎ𝑓𝑓 − 2 × 9,8 × 0)
2 2
−19.6 = 0 − 39,0625 + 19,6ℎ

2.6 h = 0,99 m
2.6 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0,99 = 5 sin 𝜃𝜃
Opposite 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = sin 𝜃𝜃 = 0,198
ℎ𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
θElectrostatics side θ = 11,450
6.6
Exercise 1
6.5 1.1Electrostatics
Electric field is a region of space in which an electric charge experiences a force. The
direction of the electric field at a point is the direction that a positive test charge would move
Exercise 1
if placed at that point.
1.1
1.2.1Electric field is a region of space in which an electric charge experiences a force. The direction of the
electric field at a point is the direction that a positive test charge would move if placed at that point.
1.2.1
1.2.2 The system is isolated, so we must apply the law of conservation of charge:
69
1.2.2 The system is isolated, so we must apply the law of conservation of charge:
𝑄𝑄𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
After being in contact (𝑄𝑄1 = 𝑄𝑄2 = 𝑄𝑄 Commented [U149]: Pse check. (brackets) Pse check all ite
Afterbeing
After beinginincontact
contact(𝑄𝑄(𝑄𝑄1==𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄2==𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 Commented
in text.
Commented
[U149]: Pse check. (brackets) Pse check all item
[U149]: Pse check. (brackets) Pse check all items
1 2 in text.
in text.
𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 2𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 2𝑄𝑄
1 + 𝑄𝑄2 = 2𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄1 + 𝑄𝑄2
𝑄𝑄 =𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄1++𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄2
𝑄𝑄 = 1 22
𝑄𝑄 =
22
30nC  14nC 16nC
30nC 14
(Charge on each) Q =30 nC 16
14nC 16nC  8nC  8  109 C 9
(Chargeon each)QQ== nC  2
oneach)  nC2  8nC  8  109 C
(Charge 2 
22  8nC  8  10 C 2
1.3. To calculate the electrostatic force exerted by one charge on the other we must apply the
1.3.
1.3.
1.3. To
ToTocalculate theelectrostatic
calculate
calculate the electrostatic
the forceexerted
electrostatic
force exerted
forcebybyone
onecharge
exertedcharge onthe
by one
on the otherwe
charge
other wemust
on must applythe
the apply
other the
we must apply the mathematical
mathematical expression of Coulomb’s law:
mathematical expression of Coulomb’s
mathematical expression of Coulomb’s law: law:
expression of Coulomb’s law:
kQ  QB
FE kQ kQAA Q Q
FFE E A r2r2 B
2 B
r
9 1099  8  1099  8 x1099
6,4  1044 9910
109 8810 x109
1029 88x10 r = 0,03 m
66,4,410
10 4  r2
r
2
r r ==0,03
0,03mm
r
Because the charges are equal, we can also solve this in the following way:
Becausethe
Because
Because thecharges
the chargesare
charges are
areequal, wecan
equal,
equal, we can alsosolve
wealso
can solve this
alsothis ininthe
solve the following
this way:
in theway:
following following way:
kQ  QB kQ2
FE kQ kQAA Q QB QA=QB kQ222
FE kQ
FFE E A r2r2 B FFE  r2
2
QQ A=QB
A=QB E 
r r r2
9 9 2
9  109  (8  109 )2
6,4  1044 9910
109 (8(82 10
109 ) 2)
6 , 4  10
6,4  10 4  r2
r r
2
r = 0,03 m
r r==0,03
0,03mm
Exercise 2
Exercise22
Exercise
2.1 The magnitude of the electrostatic force exerted by one point charge (Q1) on another
2.1 The
2.1 Themagnitude
magnitudeofofthe theelectrostatic
electrostaticforce
forceexerted
exertedbybyone
onepoint
pointcharge
charge(Q (Q)1)on
onanother
another
1
point charge (Q2) is directly proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges
pointcharge
point charge(Q(Q)2)isisdirectly
directlyproportional
proportionaltotothe
theproduct
productofofthethemagnitudes
magnitudesofofthe thecharges
charges
2
and inversely proportional to the square of the distance (r) between them.
andinversely
and inverselyproportional
proportionaltotothe thesquare
squareofofthe
thedistance
distance(r)(r)between
betweenthem.
them.
2.2 According to Newton’s third law, when one body exerts a force on a second body, the
2.2 According
2.2 AccordingtotoNewton’s
Newton’sthird thirdlaw,
law,when
whenoneonebody
bodyexerts
exertsaaforce
forceon
onaasecond
secondbody,
body,the
the 65
second body exerts a force of equal magnitude in the opposite direction on the first
second body exerts a force of equal magnitude in the opposite direction
second body exerts a force of equal magnitude in the opposite direction on the first on the first
body, therefore:
body, therefore:
Exercise 2
2.1 The magnitude of the electrostatic force exerted by one point charge (Q1) on another point charge
(Q2) is directly proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges and inversely proportional to the
square of the distance (r) between them.
2.2 According to Newton’s third law, when one body exerts a force on a second body, the second body
exerts a force of equal magnitude in the opposite direction on the first body, therefore:
2.3
2.4 2.4
2.4
kQ1Q2
F= 2 kQ1Q 2
Fr =
r2
QA = QB = Q
QA = QB = Q
(9,0  109 )Q 2
3,0  10 6  (29,0  109 )Q 2
3,0  10 6 2
22
(9,0  109 )Q 2
3,0  10 6  (29,0  109 )Q 2
3,0  10 6 2
22
6
(3,0  10 ) 4
Q2  (3,09  10 6 ) 4
Q92,0 10
9,0  10 9
QA = QB = 3,65 x 10-8 C
QA = QB = 3,65 x 10-8 C
2.5
2.5 2.5
We must draw the electric field vectors at the middle point:
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐵𝐵 𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐴𝐴
𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐵𝐵 𝐸𝐸⃗⃗𝐴𝐴
X x
X x
E R  E A  E B (It is a vector equation.)
E R  E A  E B (It is a vector equation.)
ER= EA + EB
The vectors are pointing in(Itdifferent
is a vector equation.)
directions and positive is taken in the positive direction of
The vectors are pointing in different directions and positive is taken in the positive direction of
the X axis; therefore:
The
the vectors
X axis; are pointing in different directions and positive is taken in the positive direction of the X axis;
therefore:
E R  Etherefore:
A  BB
E R  EA  BB
TheE R = E A −ofBthe
magnitude B charges are equal and the distance from the charge to the middle
The magnitude of the charges are equal and the distance from the charge to the middle
point are the same; hence:
point are the same; hence:
71
71
66
The magnitude of the charges are equal and the distance from the charge to the middle point are the same;
EA  BB
hence:
EA  BB
KQ
E 2
r
KQ
E 2
r
9  109  3,65  108
E
12
9  109  3,65  108
E
12
E R 3 28,5  3 28,5
E R 3 28,5 -13 28,5
E R 0 N  C
E R  0 N  C-1

Exercise 1
Exercise
6.7 1 Circuits
Electric
Exercise
1.1 When1switch S1 is open, there is no flow of charges, and the current in the circuit is zero;
1.1 When switch S is open, there is no flow of charges, and the current in the circuit is zero; therefore,
therefore, theSvoltmeter 1 reads the emf of the battery, which is 10 V.
1.1 When switch 1 is open, there is no flow of charges, and the current in the circuit is zero;
the voltmeter
1.2.1 Resistors reads
2 Ω and 4 Ωthe
are emf of theinbattery, which is 10 V.
therefore, the voltmeter reads the connected parallel
emf of the battery, and
which both
is 10 are
V. connected in series with
the resistor Rx.
1.2.11.1.1
Resistors 2 Ω and 42ΩΩ
Resistors areand
connected
4 Ω arein parallel and both
connected inare connected
parallel andinboth
seriesare
withconnected in series with the
Rext = Rx+ Rthe resistor
parallel (1) Rx.
resistor Rx.
Rext = Rx+ Rparallel (1)
RRext =R+R  R1 R2 (1)

ext  R xx   parallel
  (2)
R R
 R2 R 1 
2(2) 
Rext  R x   1 2 R1 R
Rext = R x + R2 R1 
 R +the   (2)
We have to calculate
 2 R equivalent
1  external resistance and the equivalent resistance for the
parallel
We
We have
have connection.
totocalculate
calculatethethe equivalent
equivalent external
external resistance
resistance and
and the the equivalent
equivalent resistance
resistance for the for the parallel connection.
parallelVconnection. 8
Rext   Rext   Rext = 8 Ω
I 1
V 8 We have only two resistors in
Rext   Rext   Rext = 8 Ω
1 I 1 1 1 parallel, so we can use:
We have only two resistors in
 
R parallel R1 R2 parallel, so we can use:
1 1 1  RR 
 
R parallel R1 R2 Rparallel =  1 2 
R R
1 1 1
    R21 R2 1 
Rp 2 4 Rparallel =  
1 1 1
  
 R2  R1 
Rp 2 4  2 4 
Rparallel =   = 1,33 Ω
Rparallel = 1,33 Ω 4 2
 2 4 
Rparallel =   = 1,33 Ω
Rparallel = 1,33 Ω 4 2 72
Substituting the values of the external resistance and equivalent resistance in parallel in equation 1.
72
8 = Rx+ 1,33
Rx = 8 - 1,33 = 6,67 Ω
1.2.2 ε = Vext + I r
10 = 8 + 1r
r = 2 Ω
67
equation 1. Commented [U150]: Pse check/complete.
8 = Rx+ 1,33
Rx = 8 - 1,33 = 6,67 Ω
1.3 INCREASES
1.2.2 ε = Vext + I r
Total10
resistance
= 8 + 1r
increases.
r = 2 Ω
Current in the circuit decreases. 
1.3 INCREASES
Total resistance increases.
The drop of potential within the battery (Vi= Ir) decreases, but the emf remains constant; therefore, according
Current in the circuit decreases. 
to the equation (Vext = ε- Ir), the voltage increases.
The drop of potential within the battery (Vi= Ir) decreases, but the emf remains constant;
therefore,
Exercise 2 according to the equation (Vext = ε- Ir), the voltage increases.
Exercise 2
2.1 When current flows through a voltage source (battery/generator), a resistance to current flow arises due
to the
2.1 resistance
When of through
current flows the materials
a voltage(chemicals/conductors)
source (battery/generator), from which tothe
a resistance source
current flowis made.
arises due to the resistance of the materials (chemicals/conductors) from which the source
Vext +Ir
2.2 εis=made.
6 V=extV+Ir
2.2 ε = ext
+I(0,10)
6 = Vext +I(0,10)
Vext = 6- (0,10)I
Vext = 6- (0,10)I
2.3
2.3
V (V)
To calculate the current at which
6 terminal potential difference is zero, we
need to substitute Vext with zero in the
equation.
Vext = 6 - (0,10)I
0 = 6- (0,10)I
6
I= =60 A
60  I (A) 0,1
2.4.1 Resistors 4 Ω and Rx are connected in series, therefore the current is the same for both.
2.4.1 Resistors 4 Ω and Rx are connected in series, therefore the current is the same for both.
W = I2RΔt  (1) 73
alternative solution
W = I 2RΔt 2
(1)
W = I RΔt  (1) of 4 Ω
For the resistor As the current
alternative and the time are the
solution
same for both resistors, we can
For the resistor of 4WΩ
4 = I RΔt = 40
2
(2)
For the resistor of 4 Ω As solve
the the problem
current and asthefollows:
time are
the
I2(4)Δt = 40 (3)
W44 == II RΔt
W RΔt==40
22
40 (2)(2) sameW for both resistors, we can
= I2RΔt
I2 =
10
(4) solve the problem
2
as follows:
∆𝑡𝑡 W4 I R4 t
(4)Δt == 40
I22(4)Δt 40 (3)
(3) 
x : =W
2 2
The current and the time are the same, therefore for resistor RW I RR t
I2RRΔt
10
I22 == RΔt(4)
W R = I2(4) (5) 2
∆𝑡𝑡 W4 40 I 2 RI 42
(4)t
t 
Substituting 4 in 5 
60 I RR2t
The current
The currentand
andthe
thetime
timeare
arethe
thesame,
same, therefore
therefore forfor
resistor Rx :Rx :
resistor WR I RR t
2
10
(10)Δt = 60  RR = 6 Ω
∆𝑡𝑡
WW == I RΔt (5)(5)
2
R I2RΔt 40 I 2 (4)t
R
RR = 6 Ω  2 
Substituting 4 in 5 60 I RR t
Substituting 4 in 5 2.4.2 ε = I(Rext+r)  (1)
To calculate the emf, we need to know the value of theRexternal

R = 6 Ω
10
(10)Δt = 60  resistance, as the
10)Δt
∆𝑡𝑡 = 60  resistors are connected in series:
RR = 6 Ω 𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠 = 𝑅𝑅4 + 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (3)

RR = 6 Ω
2.4.2 = 4 + 6 = 10 𝛺𝛺
ε = I(Rext+r) 𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠 (1)
2.4.2 ε = I(Rext+r)  (1)
Substituting the value of the total resistance I series in (1) Commented [U151]: Pse
To calculate the emf, we need to know the value of the external resistance, as the
6 = I(10+ 0,10)
resistors are connected in series:
68 I = 0,594 A
𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠 = 𝑅𝑅4 + 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (3)
2.4.3 We need to calculate the value of the terminal potential, as we have all the data.
RR = 6 Ω
2.4.2 ε = I(Rext+r)  (1)
Tocalculate
To calculatethe
the emf,
emf, wewe need
need to know
to know thethe value
value of the
of the external
external resistance,
resistance, asresistors
as the the are connected in
resistors are connected in series:
series:
𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠 = 𝑅𝑅4 + 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (3)
𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠 = 4 + 6 = 10 𝛺𝛺
Substitutingthe
Substituting thevalue
valueof of
thethe total
total resistance
resistance I series
I series in (1)
in (1) Commented [U151]: Ps
66==I(10+
I(10+0,10)
0,10)
I = 0,594 A
I = 0,594 A
Vext = IRext
Vext = IRext
Vext = (0,594)(10) 
Vext = (0,594)(10) 
Vext = 5,94 V
6.8 V = 5,94 V
Electrodynamics
ext
Exercise 1
6.7 Electrodynamics
1.2. What is the relationship between the root mean square voltage and the frequency of rotation
1.1. ACExercise
generator/alternator.
1
It has slip-rings.
of the armature /coil of the generator?
1.1. 1.2.
ACroot
1.3. The generator/alternator.
mean
What is thesquare
relationship It has
voltage
between slip-rings.
generated
the rootincreases/decreases when
mean square voltage and the frequency
the frequency of rotation
of rotation
1.2. What
1.2. is the
What relationship
is the between
relationship thethe
between root mean
root square
mean voltage
square and
voltage thethe
and frequency of of
frequency rotation
rotation
of the armature
theis
/coil
of the armature
of of armature
the
of/coil
armature
the
/coilgenerator
of of
/coil thethe
increases/decreases.
of the generator?
generator?
generator?
1.2. What the relationship between the root mean square voltage and the frequency of rotation of the
74
armature
1.3.
1.4. Root /coil
meanofsquare
The rootsquare
mean the generator?
voltage generated increases/decreases when the frequency of rotation
voltage.
1.3. The
1.3. root
The mean
root meansquare voltage
square generated
voltage increases/decreases
generated when
increases/decreases thethe
when frequency of rotation
frequency of rotation
of the armature /coil of the generator increases/decreases.
of of
thethe
armature /coil
armature of of
/coil thethe
generator increases/decreases.
generator increases/decreases.
1.3. The root mean square voltage generated increases/decreases when the frequency of rotation of the
1.5.
1.4. Root mean
armature square
/coil voltage.
of the generator increases/decreases.
1.4. Root
1.4. mean
Root square
mean voltage.
square voltage.
1.5. 6
1.4. 1.5.
Root
1.5. mean square voltage.
Root mean square voltage
5
4 6
1.5. 6 6
voltage
Root mean square voltage
squarevoltage
5
3 5 5
(V)
4
2 4 4
meansquare
3
3 3
(V)
1
(V)
(V)
2
2 2
Rootmean
0 1
1 1
0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Root
0 0
0
0 0
10 Frequency
20 30 (Hz) 40
10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40
50
50 50
60
60 60
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (Hz)(Hz)
Frequency
1.6. The root mean square voltage generated is directly proportional to the frequency of rotation
1.6. The root mean square voltage generated is directly proportional to the frequency of rotation
1.6. 1.6.
The The
1.6. root
root
The mean
mean
root mean square
square
square voltage
voltage generated
generated
voltage is proportional
is directly
generated directly
is directly proportional
to to
proportional thethe to of
frequency theof
frequency frequency
rotation
rotation of rotation of the
of the of
armature /coil/coil
the armature of the generator.
of the generator.
ofarmature
thethe
of /coil
armature /coil
armature ofofthe
/coil generator.
thethe
of generator.
generator.
V Vmax 5 5
=V 
1.7=Vrmsmax
1.7 V1.7 Vmax  5 53,54
3,V
54V
rms Vrms
rms1.7 = =max
Vrms    3,54 3,V
54V
2 2 22 2 2 22
V 5
VIrmsrms
1.8 I 5 V Vrms 5 5 1A
1.8 I 1.8
1.8 I rms
1.8
rms  rms R RR 5155A1A1A
 rms rms
R 5
1.9. Pave = IrmsVrms = 1 x 5 = 5 W
1.9. 1.9. Pave
1.9. = I=
Pave rmsIV = 1=x15x=5 5=W
Vrms
rms
rms 5W
1.10. Vmax = 2Vrms  2  5  7,07V
1.10. Vmax
1.10. = = 2V2
Vmax rms  2 2557,07
Vrms VV
7,07
1.10. Vmax = 2Vrms  2  5  7,07V
69
Vrms 5
1.8 I rms    1A
R 5
1.10.
1.10. Vmax = 2Vrms  2  5  7,07V
75
ADVANTAGES OF
1.11ADVANTAGES
1.11 OFACAC
OVER DC DC
OVER
 Easy to be transformed (step up or step down using a transformer).
 Easier to convert from AC to DEC than from DC to AC.
• Easy to betotransformed
 Easier generate. (step up or step down using a transformer).
 It can be transmitted at high voltage and low current over long distances with less
• Easier to convert from AC to DEC than from DC to AC.
energy lost.
•  High
Easier tofrequency used in AC makes it suitable for motors.
generate.
Exercise 2
• It can be transmitted at high voltage and low current over long distances with less energy lost.
2.1 DC motor. Electrical energy is converted into mechanical energy.
• High frequency used in AC makes it suitable for motors.
2.2 Clockwise.
Exercise 2
2.3 A - Armature
2.1 DC motor.brushes
B - Carbon Electrical energy is converted into mechanical energy.
C - Split ring commutator (commutator)

2.2 Clockwise.
2.4 Electric motors are used in pumps, fans, compressors, etc.
2.3 A - Armature
B - Carbon brushes
C - Split ring commutator (commutator)
2.4 Electric motors are used in pumps, fans, compressors, etc.
76
70
7.1 Newton’s Laws
SOLUTIONS
1.1
1.1 Free-body diagram for block A: Free-body diagram for block B:
7.
7.1 Newton’s
Check your answers
7. -Check
Laws 7. Check your answers - Set 2
Set 2 your answers - Set 2 7.1 Newton’s Laws
7.1 x-axis
Newton’s Laws7.1 Newton’s Laws x-axis
SOLUTIONS SOLUTIONS
SOLUTIONS ⃗⃗⃗ SOLUTIONS ⃗⃗⃗𝑩𝑩
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 𝑵𝑵
1.1 1.1
1.1 1.1
𝑭𝑭𝑨𝑨⃗⃗
⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 1.1 Free-body diagram for block A: Free-body diagram for block B:
1.1 Free-body diagram for block A:
1.1 Free-body diagram1.1
for
Free-body
block A: diagram
Free-body for diagram
block A: forFree-body diagram block
Free-body
block B: diagram for for block
B: B:
x-axis x-axis ⃗⃗ x-axisx-axis
x-axis x-axis x-axis𝑻𝑻 x-axis
⃗⃗⃗𝑨𝑨
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗⃗𝑩𝑩
𝑵𝑵
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵
⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩 𝑩𝑩 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨
⃗⃗ 𝑭𝑭
𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭
⃗𝑻𝑻⃗ ⃗𝑻𝑻⃗
x-axis ⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 x-axis
x-axis ⃗x-axis
⃗
𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗ x-axis
𝑻𝑻 x-axis
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
1.2 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭
𝑭𝑭
We apply Newton's second law

1.2 1.2
to each
1.2 1.2 Solving the system
object:
We apply Newton’s second law to each We apply object:
Newton's second T +law FAto- each
T = m1a + m2a
We apply Newton's second We apply lawNewton's
to each second law to each
object: Solving the system Solving the system Solving the system
object: object: FA = (m1 + m T 2+ )a
FA - T = m1a + m2a
T + FA - T = m1a + m2aT + FA - T = m1a + m2a
⃗𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ (right positive)
FA = (m1 + m2 )a
100F ==(5 + 3) a
(m1 + m2 )a
FA = (m1 + m2 )a
𝐹𝐹x-axis 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗ A
x-axis (right positive) 100 = (5 + 3) a
100 = (5 + 3) a 𝑎𝑎⃗100 (5 + 3) a· 𝑠𝑠 −2 to the right
𝑥𝑥 == 12,5𝑚𝑚
For block x-axis (right positive)
x-axis (rightApositive) x-axis (right positive) 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 = 12,5𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −2 to the𝑎𝑎⃗right −2
𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 = 12,5𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −2 to the right
𝑥𝑥 = 12,5𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 to the right
For block A
T =block
mAa A For block A
For For block A
T = mAa
TT==
mAm
a Aa T = mAa
For block B
For block B
For block B For block B
For block B FA - T = m2a
FFAA --TT==mm
2a2
a FA - T = m2a
FA - T = m2a
1.3 To calculate the magnitude of the tension, we can use block A or block B.
1.3 To calculate the
1.3magnitude
To calculate
of the tension,
the magnitude
we canofuse
theblock
tension,
A orwe
block
canB.
use block A or block B.
1.3 To calculate the magnitude of the tension, we can use block A or77block B. 77
77
77
71
1.3 To calculate the magnitude of the tension, we can use block A or block B.
(UsingA)A)
(Using (Using A) (Using B) (Using
(Using B)
B)
x-axis (right
(Using A) positive)
x-axis (Using A)
x-axis
(Using B) x-axis
(Using (right
x-axis B) positive)
x-axis
x-axis
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 x-axis (Using A) x-axis
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩 x-axis
⃗⃗⃗ (Using B)
⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗⃗
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨
⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻
𝑵𝑵𝑨𝑨 x-axis 𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩 𝑭𝑭 𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩 ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝑨𝑨 x-axis
⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻
⃗⃗𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 x-axis ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗⃗
⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 x-axis ⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗⃗𝑨𝑨𝑻𝑻
𝑵𝑵 ⃗⃗ x-axis 𝑵𝑵𝑩𝑩
x-axis ⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻
x-axis x-axis ⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗ x-axis x-axis ⃗⃗𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨 ⃗⃗ 𝑭𝑭
𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩 𝑻𝑻 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭 𝑭𝑭
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩x-axis
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
𝑭𝑭 ⃗⃗
𝑻𝑻 x-axis
⃗⃗𝒈𝒈𝑨𝑨
𝑭𝑭
x-axis ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈(right positive)
x-axis (right positive) ⃗𝑭𝑭⃗𝒈𝒈𝑩𝑩
x-axis (right positive) 𝑨𝑨
x-axis (right positive) x-axis (right positive) x-axis (right positive)
x-axis (right positive) x-axis (right positive) 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 𝐹𝐹⃗ = 𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎⃗ 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐵𝐵 𝑥𝑥
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 x-axis (right positive)
𝐹𝐹⃗𝐴𝐴𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
− 𝑇𝑇==𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ⃗𝑥𝑥𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹⃗− 𝑎𝑎⃗⃗𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
x-axis 𝐹𝐹(right 𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎
𝐵𝐵
positive) 𝑇𝑇 =
𝐴𝐴 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑇𝑇==𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ⃗
𝑎𝑎
𝐴𝐴
𝐴𝐴 𝑥𝑥 ⃗
𝑎𝑎 𝑥𝑥 ⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝐹𝐹 𝑇𝑇 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎⃗𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
= 𝑚𝑚 (3)(12,5)
𝐴𝐴 𝑥𝑥 100 − 𝑇𝑇 =
𝐹𝐹𝐴𝐴 − 𝑇𝑇 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 100 𝐹𝐹𝐴𝐴 −− 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
= (3)(12,5)
𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇==𝑚𝑚(5)(12,5) 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
⃗𝑥𝑥
𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇=
𝑇𝑇 ==𝑚𝑚
62,5𝑁𝑁
⃗𝑥𝑥
𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎
(5)(12,5) 𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
⃗ 100 − −𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇
𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥 = = 37,5
(3)(12,5) − 100
100 − 𝑇𝑇 = 𝑇𝑇 −
(3)(12,5) = 100
62,5𝑁𝑁
−𝑇𝑇 = 37,5 𝐹𝐹𝐴𝐴 =
𝑇𝑇 − 62,5𝑁𝑁
𝑇𝑇 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
𝑇𝑇 = (5)(12,5) (5)(12,5)
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇==62,5𝑁𝑁 𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
𝑇𝑇 = 𝑚𝑚−𝑇𝑇 ⃗𝑥𝑥= 37,5 − 100 −𝑇𝑇 = 37,5
𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎 𝑇𝑇 =−62,5𝑁𝑁 100 𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
100 − 𝑇𝑇 = (3)(12,5)
𝑇𝑇 = (5)(12,5) 𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
−𝑇𝑇 = 37,5 − 100 𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
1.4
1.4 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
1.4 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
1.4 1.4 𝑇𝑇𝐹𝐹⃗− 𝑇𝑇 −⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘==𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎⃗𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐹𝐹 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 ==𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
Data:
Data: Data: 62,5 − 𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇 − 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = = (5)(8,972)
𝑇𝑇 −
𝑘𝑘 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎 62,5 − 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 =
= 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎
(5)(8,972)
𝑎𝑎 = 8,972𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −2
Data: Data: 1.4 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
𝑎𝑎 = 8,972𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −2 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘==(5)(8,972)
62,5 − −𝑓𝑓 44,8662,5
− 62,5
− 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = (5)(8,972)
= 44,86
−𝑓𝑓 − 62,5 𝑇𝑇 − 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎
𝑎𝑎 𝑇𝑇==8,972𝑚𝑚
62,5𝑁𝑁 · 𝑠𝑠 −2 𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇 =
= 8,972𝑚𝑚
62,5𝑁𝑁 · 𝑠𝑠
−2
Data: −𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝑓𝑓=
𝑘𝑘 = 17,64𝑁𝑁
44,86 − 62,5−𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 44,86 − 62,5
𝑘𝑘 = 17,64𝑁𝑁 62,5 − 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = (5)(8,972)
𝑇𝑇𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘==?
62,5𝑁𝑁 𝜇𝜇𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁
𝑘𝑘 =? 𝑎𝑎 = 8,972𝑚𝑚 ·𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘−2 = 17,64𝑁𝑁 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 17,64𝑁𝑁
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =? 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =? Calculating the normal force:the normal force: −𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 44,86 − 62,5
𝑇𝑇 = 62,5𝑁𝑁 Calculating
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 17,64𝑁𝑁
Calculating the normal Calculating force: the normal force:
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =?
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘𝜇𝜇= =𝜇𝜇
𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑁𝑁 𝑁𝑁 𝑓𝑓 = 𝜇𝜇
𝑓𝑓 𝑁𝑁 y-axis y-axis
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘
𝑁𝑁
𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓
y-axis y-axis Calculating the normal force:
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 𝑁𝑁
We must calculate 𝐹𝐹⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦
We must calculate Wethe mustfrictional force
calculate
the frictional theand the
frictional
force and force and𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅the force. 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =the
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 normal
⃗ y-axis
We normal
must force.calculateWethemust
frictional force the
calculate andfrictional
the force
𝑁𝑁 𝑁𝑁 ⃗⃗and
+ 𝐹𝐹⃗the
𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎⃗
𝑔𝑔 = 0𝐴𝐴 𝑦𝑦 ⃗⃗ +𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎⃗
normal force. 𝑁𝑁 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0 𝐴𝐴 𝑦𝑦
normal force. the normal force. ⃗⃗𝑁𝑁+−𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹==0 0
𝑁𝑁 ⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0
Calculating frictional force: We must calculate 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁−
the frictional 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 force
= 0 and the 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦
Calculating the frictional
Calculating force:
the frictional force: 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁−= 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹== 0 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑁𝑁 (5)(9,8)
− 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 == 049𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (5)(9,8) = 49𝑁𝑁
normal force. ⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0
𝑁𝑁
Calculating the frictional Calculating force:the frictional force:
x-axis
x-axis 𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (5)(9,8) 𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹==49𝑁𝑁 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (5)(9,8) = 49𝑁𝑁
x-axis 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 17,64 𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 0
Calculating 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 =the = 49 =𝜇𝜇0,355
𝑁𝑁 frictional force:
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 17,64
x-axis x-axis 𝑘𝑘 = 𝑁𝑁 = 49 = 0,355
Calculating the normal force: 𝑓𝑓 17,64 𝑓𝑓 17,64 𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (5)(9,8) = 49𝑁𝑁
𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑁𝑁𝑘𝑘 = 49 = 0,355 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑁𝑁𝑘𝑘 = 49 = 0,355
x-axis
78 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 = 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 17,6478
y-axis
1.5 𝑁𝑁 49
= 0,355
78 78
1.5
No, the boxes are made of the same material. 78
1.5
No, the boxes are made of the same material.
1.6 No, the boxes are made of the same material. ⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0
𝑁𝑁
1.6
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 0
1.6 ⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0
𝑁𝑁
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = 𝜇𝜇𝑘𝑘 𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 =𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹= =
0 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =
(3)(9,8) = 29,4𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (3)(9,8) = 29,4𝑁𝑁
We must calculate the normal force: Now we can calculate the frictional force:
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦

(0,355)(29,4)
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 ==(0,355)(29,4) = 10,44 to the left.
= 10,44 to the left.
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑘𝑘
1.7 1.7
The force from box A downward on the floor (weight); and the force upwards from the floor on box
72The force from box A downward on the floor (weight); and the force upwards from the floor on box
A (normal force).
A (normal force).
1.6 ⃗⃗ + 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0
𝑁𝑁
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 0
e material. 𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (3)(9,8) = 29,4𝑁𝑁
We
⃗⃗ +must
𝑁𝑁 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔 = 0calculate the normal force:
𝑁𝑁 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝐵𝐵0𝑎𝑎⃗𝑦𝑦
= 𝑚𝑚 𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = (0,355)(29,4) = 10,44 to the left.
1.7𝑁𝑁 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (3)(9,8) = 29,4𝑁𝑁
: Now wecan
Now we cancalculate
calculatethe the frictional
frictional force: force:
The force from box A downward on the floor (weight); and the force upwards from the floor on box
A (normal force).
𝑓𝑓𝑘𝑘 = (0,355)(29,4) = 10,44 totothe
theleft.
left.
The force from block A to the left by the rope on block B; and the force to the right by the rope on
1.7
block A.
the floor (weight); and the force upwards from the floor on box
The force from box A downward on the floor (weight); and the force upwards from the floor on box A (normal
QuESTION 2
force).
the rope on block B; and the force to the right by the rope on
2.1
The force from block A to the left by the rope on block B; and the force to the right by the rope on block A.
QUESTION 2
2.1
Let’s take positive in the direction of motion. Commented [U152]: Pse check.
79
f motion. Commented [U152]: Pse check.
79
Let’s take positive in the direction of motion.
2.2 If a resultant force acts on a body,

2.2it willIf cause theforce
a resultant bodyacts
to accelerate
on a body, it in
willthe
causedirection
the bodyofto accelerate
t h in the
e direction of
resultant force. The acceleration of the the body will beforce.
resultant directly
Theproportional
acceleration of to the
the body
resultant
will force
be directly and
proportional to the
inversely proportional to the mass of the body. force and inversely proportional to the mass of the body.
resultant
2.3 Let’s apply Newton’s second law

2.3of motion to each
Let’s apply block.
Newton’s second law of Block of 8 kg (B)
∑ F = ma motion to each block.

In the y direction:
 F  ma
Block of 4 kg (A) - T  Fg  mB a
Block of 4 kg (A)  T  mB g  mB a (Equation 2)

In the x direction:
T − f f = mAa In the x direction: Solving the system of equations (adding 1
T  f f  mAa plus 2)
T − µN = mAa T  N  mAa
T  mA g  T  mB g  mAa  mBa
In the Y direction  mA g  mB g  (mA  mB )a

N  Fg  0  (0,6)(4)(9,8)  (8)(9,8)  (4  8)a
73
N  Fg  mg 54.88  12a
a  4,57 m∙s-2
Block of 4 kg (A)  T  mBBg  mBBa (Equation 2)
Block of 4 kg (A)  T  mB g  mB a (Equation 2)
Solving
In the the system of equations (adding 1
x direction: Solving the system of equations (adding 1
In the x direction: Solving the system of equations (adding 1
plus 2)In the x direction:
T  f m a plus 2) Solving the system of equations (adding 1
T  f f f  mAAa plus 2)
T  f f  mAa plus 2)
T  N  m a
T  N  mAA
T  amA g  T  mB g  mAa  mBa T  m g  T  m g  m a  m a
T  N  mAa T  mAAg  T  mBBg  mAAa  mBBa
 mA g  mB g  (mA  mB )a T  m g  T  m g  m a  mBa
In the Y direction  m g  mA g  (m Bm )a A
In the Y direction  mAAg  mBBg  (mAA  mBB)a
 (0,6In
)(4the
)(9,Y  (8)(9,8)  (4  8)a
8)direction  mA g  mB g  (mA  mB )a
N F 0  (0,6)(4)(9,8)  (8)(9,8)  (4  8)a
N  Fgg  0  (0,6)(4)(9,8)  (8)(9,8)  (4  8)a
N  Fg  0 54.88  12a  (0,6)(4)(9,8)  (8)(9,8)  (4  8)a
N  Fg  mg 54.88  12a
N  Fg  mg 54.88  12a
N  Fg  mga  4,57 m∙s
-2
a  4,57 .88 -2 12a
54m∙s
a  4,57 m∙s-2
a  4,57 m∙s-2
T  m g  m a (Equation 1)
T  mAAg  mAAa (Equation 1)
T  mA g  mAa (Equation 1)
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
using equation 1
using equation 2 using equation 1
Usingequation
using equation
2 2 Using
using equation 1 equation 1
T  mA g  mAa using equation 2
T  m g  m a
using equation 1
T  m g  m a
 T  m Bg  mBBa T  mAAg  mAAa
 T)  mB g  mB a
T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)(B4.57 T  mA g  mAa
- T  8  4,57  8  9,8 T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
- T  8  4,57  8  9,8 T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
T  (0,6)(T4)( 9,8) -(T4)(48.57
 4),57  8  9,8 T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
= 41.84 N T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
T = 41.84 N T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
T  41.8 0 N T = 41.84 N T  (0,6)( 4)(9,8)  (4)( 4.57)
T  41.8 0 N
T  41.8 0 N
T  41.8 0 N
2.5. f  N
2.5. f f  N
2.5. f f f  N
2.5. f f  N
,mg
ff  0 6  4  9,8 f f  mg
f f  mg
f f  mg
ff ff  23
0,6.52
 4N 9,8 80 80
80
f f  23.52 N 80
2.6
2.6
2.6
 T  mB g  mB a
 T  mB g  mB a
T  8  4,57  8  9,8
T  8  4,57  8  9,8
Apparent weight = T = 41.84 N
2.7 Less than.
2.8 Equal to.
Exercise 3
3.1 Each particle in the universe attracts every other particle with a gravitational force that is directly proportional
to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between their
centres. (2)
74
81
2.8 Equal to.
3.1 Each particle in the universe attracts every other particle with a gravitational force that
is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to (2)
Exercisethe
3 square of the distance between their centres.
3.1 Each particle in the universe attracts every other particle with a gravitational force that
3.2 is directly
Smaller proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to
than. (2)
3.2 Smaller than.
the square of the distance between their centres.
The distance is the same as well as the mass of the Earth in both cases. The Commented [U153]: Pse check
The distance is the same as well as the mass of the Earth in both cases. The mag-
3.2 magnitude
Smaller of the gravitational force exerted on the satellites is directly proportional to
nitude of than.
the gravitational force exerted on the satellites is directly proportional to the
the
mass mass of the satellites. The mass of ZACUBE-1is issmaller
smallerthan
thanthe
themass
mass of
of Sput-
The of the satellites.
distance is the same The mass
as well of mass
as the ZACUBE-1
of the Earth in both cases. The Commented [U153]: Pse check.
Sputnik.
nik. (4) (4)
magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the satellites is directly proportional to
3.3
3.3 the mass of the satellites. The mass of ZACUBE-1 is smaller than the mass of
GMm
FSputnik.
  (4)
r2
3.3 GMm 
F 11  24
6,67
r 2 10  6  10  1,2
F 
(6,38  10116  600 2410 3 ) 2 
6,67  10  6  10  1,2
F =F9,85

(6,N
38  Towards
 10 6 the
 600  10 3 2 Earth.
)  (5)
F = 9,85 N  Towards the Earth. (5)
F = 9,85 N  Towards the Earth. (5)
3.4 On the surface of the Earth.
GmM
F  GmM
2

F R 2 
R
GmM 2
mg  GmM (1) OR/OF R g  GM
mg  R 2 2 (1) OR/OF R 2 g  GM
R
AA
height
heighth.h.
GmMGmM
F1F1  2

( R( Rhh))2
GmM
mg1  GmM 2 (2) OR/oF ( R  h) 2 g21  GM
mg1  ( R  h)2 (2) OR/oF ( R  h) g1  GM
( R  h)
From (1) and (2)
From (1) and (2)
g1 R2 82
 (3)
g ( R  h) 2 82
g1
= 0,25
g
R2 1 R2 
0,25  2
 OR/OF  (𝑅𝑅 + ℎ)2 = 4𝑅𝑅 2
( R  h) 4 ( R  h) 2
From (3) we get 𝑅𝑅 2 + 2𝑅𝑅ℎ + ℎ2 = 4𝑅𝑅 2
𝑅𝑅 2
ℎ2 + 2𝑅𝑅ℎ + (𝑅𝑅 2 − ) =0 ℎ2 + 2𝑅𝑅ℎ − 3𝑅𝑅 2 = 0
0,25

𝑅𝑅
ℎ = −𝑅𝑅 ± (ℎ – 𝑅𝑅)(ℎ + 3𝑅𝑅) = 0
√0,25
𝑅𝑅
ℎ = −𝑅𝑅 +
0,5
3,38 ×106
ℎ = −3,38 × 106 + (ℎ – 𝑅𝑅)(ℎ + 3𝑅𝑅) = 0
0,5
(6)
ℎ = 𝑅𝑅 = 3,38 x 106 m ∴ ℎ = 𝑅𝑅 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 − 3𝑅𝑅
(6) [17]
[17]
Exercise 1
1.1. The total linear momentum of an isolated/a closed system remains constant (is conserved).
1.2. The resultant/net external force is zero.
1.3 75
F ext
= 0
ℎ = 𝑅𝑅 = 3,38 x 106 m ∴ ℎ = 𝑅𝑅 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 − 3𝑅𝑅
(6)
[17]
7.2
7.2 Momentum and
Momentum and Impulse
Impulse
Exercise
Exercise1 1
1.1.The
1.1. Thetotal
totallinear
linear momentum
momentum of an
of an isolated/a
isolated/a closed
closed system
system remains
remains constant
constant (is conserved).
(is conserved).
1.2.The
1.2. Theresultant/net
resultant/net external
external force
force is zero.
is zero.
1.3
1.3
F ext
= 0
Therefore: Δ p = 0
Hence:
p after - p before = 0
p before = p after
( p r + pb ) before = ( pr + pb )after
𝑚𝑚𝐿𝐿 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐿𝐿(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) + 𝑚𝑚𝑅𝑅 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑅𝑅(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 𝑚𝑚𝐿𝐿 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐿𝐿(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝑅𝑅 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑚𝑚𝐿𝐿 0 + 𝑚𝑚𝑅𝑅 0 = 4800𝑣𝑣⃗𝐿𝐿(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 100 𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 83

0 𝐿𝐿=
𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑅𝑅 0 =⃗4800𝑣𝑣
0 +4800𝑣𝑣 + 100
⃗𝐿𝐿(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝐿𝐿(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 100𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
0 = 4800𝑣𝑣⃗𝐿𝐿(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 100 𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
Wehave
We
We have
have twotwo
two unknowns,
unknowns,
unknowns, soneed
soneed
so we we we
to need to speed
calculate
to calculate
calculate the the the ofspeed
speed
of the missile the ofafter
thelauncher
missile
launcher missile
the launcher
rocket after afterwas
the rocket thefired.
rocket
wasfired.
was fired.
Using equations
Using equations of motion
of motion Commented [U154]: Is this a heading? (Pse re-check all
Using equations of motion Com
formatting and standardise all equivalent items to improve th
legibility of the text. form
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 + 2𝑎𝑎∆𝑥𝑥
legib
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 do
We
= not 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 know
+ 2𝑎𝑎∆𝑥𝑥
the acceleration of the launcher on the inclined plane, therefore we must calculate it.
Wefree-body
The do not diagram
know the acceleration
for the ofmoving
missile launcher the launcher on the
on the inclined planeinclined
is: plane, therefore we must calculate it.
The free-body diagram for the missile launcher moving on the inclined plane is:
⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
In the x direction
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗𝑥𝑥
−𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹 ⃗𝑔𝑔
−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑎𝑎 = −𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃𝐹𝐹 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
In2 the2 x direction
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 + 2(−𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃)∆𝑥𝑥
−𝐹𝐹
ℎ
𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
= ∆𝑥𝑥 sin 𝜃𝜃
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 − 2𝑔𝑔ℎ

02 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 − 2𝑔𝑔ℎ
𝑎𝑎 = −𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 = 2𝑔𝑔ℎ
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2𝑓𝑓2==2(9,8)6
𝑣𝑣 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 + 2(−𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃)∆𝑥𝑥
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 = 10.84 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
76Now we can calculate the initial speed of the rocket:
84
We have two unknowns, so we need to calculate the speed of the missile launcher after the rocket
was fired.
Using equations of motion Commented [U154]: Is this a heading? (Pse re-check all
formatting and standardise all equivalent items to improve t
legibility of the text.
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 + 2𝑎𝑎∆𝑥𝑥
We do not know the acceleration of the launcher on the inclined plane, therefore we must calculate it.
We do not know the acceleration of the launcher on the inclined plane, therefore we must calculate it.
Thefree-body
The free-body diagram for the
diagram formissile launcher
the missile moving onmoving
launcher the inclined planeinclined
on the is: plane is:
⃗⃗
𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑔𝑔
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎⃗
In the x direction
−𝐹𝐹𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑎𝑎 = −𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃
𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓2 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 + 2(−𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃)∆𝑥𝑥
02 = 𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 − 2𝑔𝑔ℎ
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 = 2𝑔𝑔ℎ
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖2 = 2(9,8)6
𝑣𝑣𝑖𝑖 = 10.84 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
InNow
thewe
x direction
can calculate the initial speed of the rocket:
0 = 4800 × 10.84 + 100 𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)

Now we can calculate the initial speed of the rocket: 84
100 𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = −52032
Exercise 2
𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 520,32 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1
Solution
Exercise 2
2.1 Impulse is the product of the resultant/net force (force) acting on an object and the time the resultant/net force (force) acts
Solution
on the object.
2.1 Impulse is the product of the resultant/net force (force) acting on an object and the time the Commented [G155]: corrected
resultant/net force (force) acts on the object.
2.2 Data
2.2 Data
𝐹𝐹⃗ = 10 𝑁𝑁 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ𝑡𝑡

Δt= 3 s
Impulse -?
Let’s take positive to the right

𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐹𝐹∆𝑡𝑡
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = +10 × 3
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = +30 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 30 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 to the right
2.3 Data
𝑝𝑝⃗ = 80 𝑘𝑘 · 𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −1
𝑚𝑚 = 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑣𝑣⃗ =?
Let’s take positive to the right:
𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗
+ 80 = 10𝑣𝑣⃗
𝑣𝑣⃗ = + 8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑚𝑚−1
2.4 Data 77
Commented [U157]: Formatting: pse ch
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 = 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 and standardise appearance of all eqivalent i
𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 = 8 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑣𝑣⃗ = 8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right
𝐹𝐹⃗ = 10 𝑁𝑁 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ𝑡𝑡
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = +10 × 3
Δt= 3 s
Impulse -?
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = +30 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
Let’s =
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 take30positive to the
𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 to the right
right
2.3 2.3Data
Data = +10 × 3
𝑝𝑝⃗ = 80 𝑘𝑘 · 𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −1
𝑚𝑚 = 10 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
+30 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
𝑣𝑣⃗ =?
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 30 𝑁𝑁 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 to the right
Let’s take positive to the right:
2.3 Data
𝑝𝑝⃗ = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗
𝑝𝑝⃗ = 80 𝑘𝑘 · 𝑚𝑚 · 𝑠𝑠 −1
𝑚𝑚
+ 80 = 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘⃗
= 10𝑣𝑣
𝑣𝑣⃗ =?
Let’s𝑣𝑣⃗ take
= + 8positive
𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑚𝑚−1to the right:
𝑝𝑝⃗ =Data
2.4 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣⃗ Commented [U157]: Formatting: pse check use of
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 = 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 and standardise appearance of all eqivalent items.
to the
𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵right+
= 80 = 10𝑣𝑣⃗
8 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ −1
𝑣𝑣⃗ = + 8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑚𝑚
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 0
2.4 Data
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 Data
2.4 =? Commented [U157]: Formatting: pse check use of
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 = 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 and standardise appearance of all eqivalent items.
For
𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 = this problem, we are going to select right as positive.
8 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 8 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 0= 0
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = ?
For this problem, we are going to select right as positive. 85
∑ 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 0
∆𝑝𝑝⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0 85
𝑝𝑝⃗∆𝑝𝑝 ⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −
𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
0 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 0
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
− 𝑝𝑝⃗𝑇𝑇(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 0
𝑝𝑝⃗𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑇𝑇(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + = 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝⃗⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑚𝑚 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) + 𝑝𝑝 + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) = 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
= 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐴𝐴 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
+ 𝑝𝑝⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
After𝑚𝑚the collision,+the
⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)
𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵two trolleys=move
𝑣𝑣⃗𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) together
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) + 𝑚𝑚as𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣one object; therefore, the velocity is the same:
After 𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴the 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 collision,
+ 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 the = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
two(𝑚𝑚 𝐴𝐴 + 𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵move
trolleys ) together as one object; therefore, the velocity is the same:
(10)(+8)
𝑚𝑚𝐴𝐴 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 + 𝑚𝑚 +𝐵𝐵(8)(0)
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑣𝑣= ⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (𝑚𝑚(10
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝐵𝐵8)
𝐴𝐴 + 𝑚𝑚 )
+80(10)(+8) = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓+(18)
(8)(0) = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (10 + 8)
𝑣𝑣⃗+80 = 80𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (18)
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 =
80
18
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑣𝑣⃗= +=
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
18 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 .
4,44 −1
−1 −1
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = = 4,44
+ 4,44𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠
𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 to .the right.
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 4,44 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 to the right.
2.5 We can apply Newton’s second law in terms of momentum:

𝐹𝐹⃗2.5 = WeWe
2.5 cancan apply Newton’s second
lawlaw in terms of momentum:
∆𝑝𝑝⃗
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 apply Newton’s second in terms of momentum:
∆𝑡𝑡
∆𝑝𝑝⃗
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝑡𝑡 𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓 − 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =
𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓∆𝑡𝑡
− 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =70 − 80
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = ∆𝑡𝑡
700,2 − 80
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −10
⃗
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 0,2
−10
0,2
⃗ 𝐹𝐹⃗ =
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛= −50 0,2𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −50 𝑁𝑁
𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 50 𝑁𝑁 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
Exercise
5.5 1Vertical Projectile Motion
Exercise 1
1.1
1.1 1
2,2  vi (0,28)  (9,8)(0,28) 2
21
2,2  vi (0,28)  (9,8)(0,28) 2
2
2,2 – 0,38 = vi (0,28)
2,2 – 0,38 = vi (0,28)
vi = 6,5 m·s-1
vi = 6,5 m·s-1
v 2f  vi2  2 gy
v 2f  vi2  2 gy
(6,5) 2  02  2(9,8)y
1 (6,5) 2  02  2(9,8)y
y  viAt  gt 2
21 (6,5) 2  02  2(9,8)y
y  viAt  gt 2 2
2 Δy  0m2  2(9,8)y
(6,=5)2,16
Δy = 2,16 m y = 2,16 + 2,2
781.2.
1.2. y = 2,16 + 2,2
86
86
𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓 − 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖
∆𝑡𝑡
70 − 80
0,2
−10
0,2
7.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 𝐹𝐹⃗𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = −50 𝑁𝑁

Exercise 1
Exercise 1
1.1
1.1
1
2,2  vi (0,28)  (9,8)(0,28) 2
2

2,2 – 0,38 = vi (0,28)
vi = 6,5 m·s-1
v 2f  vi2  2 gy
(6,5) 2  02  2(9,8)y
1
y  viAt  gt 2
2 (6,5) 2  02  2(9,8)y
Δy = 2,16 m
1.2. y = 2,16 + 2,2
1
∆y = viA ∆t + g∆t 2 86
2
1.2.
y = 2,16 + 2,2
y = 4,3 m downwards
y = 4,3 m downwards Commented [G158]: Corrected Afrikaans word remove
1
2,16  0t  (9,8)t 2
2
2  2,16
t 2 
9,8
Δt = 0,66 s
Δttotal = Δt1+ Δt2
Δttotal = 0,66 + 0,28

Δttotal = 0,94 s
5
3
y (m)
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
t(s)
79
1.4
v f  vi  gt
1.4
1.4
v vf 1f v0i g9t,8  0,66
v vf 1f 1  06,59m 1
,8 0s,66
v f 1  6,5m  s 1
1.4
v vf f22 
 00
9,89,80v, 0v,944
f 
944 i  gt
1.4 v1f  0  9,8  0,66

v vf f22  9v9,f21 m  s 1s 1
 vi m
,21  gt
1.4 v f 1  6,5m  s 1
v f 1  0  9,8  0,66
v f  vi  gt
v (m·s-1)  6,5m 1
v  0 v9f,18 
f1 0,66v f2s  0  9,8  0,944
v (m·s-1) 1
vv (m·s 5)m  s 1 v f 2  9,21 m  s

f 1  6,-1
Exercise v f 22  0  9,8  0,944
 0 v9fdownwards
v fPositive ,28 90,,21
944m  s 1 Commented [U159]: Formatting: pse check use of italics;
Exercise
Exercise2 2
2 v (m·s-1) standardise with all equivalent items.
1
v f 2.1
2
 9,21 m  s
v (m·s ) Exercise 2
Positive
-1
Positivedownwards
Option 1downwards Option 2 Comme
v (m·s standard
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓2 =) 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖2 + 2𝑔𝑔
-1
⃗Δ𝑦𝑦⃗ downwards
Positive 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖 + 𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 Commented [U159]: Formatting: pse ch
2.1 2 Exercise 2
2.1v f  02  (2)(9,8)(150) 2y standardise with all equivalent items.
2.1 t 
Exercise 2 g
2 Positive downwards
Commented [U159]: Formatting: pse check use of ita
Option
v f 1 2940
Option 1 Option 1 Option
2 x150Option
Option 22
2 standardise with all equivalent items.
Positive 2.1 t   5,53s

⃗ 𝑓𝑓 downwards
Commented [U159]: Formatting: pse check use of italics;
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓2 𝑣𝑣= =𝑣𝑣 2
⃗54,22 𝑚𝑚
𝑖𝑖 + 𝑓𝑓 2𝑔𝑔
𝑠𝑠 −1
𝑣𝑣⃗ 2∙ = ⃗Δ𝑦𝑦𝑣𝑣⃗downwards
2
𝑖𝑖 ⃗ + 2𝑔𝑔⃗Δ𝑦𝑦⃗ 9,8 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 ++𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
𝑣𝑣
⃗ = 𝑣𝑣
⃗ standardise with all equivalent items.
2.1 2 Option 1 v 2  02  (2)(9,8)(150)vf = 0+ 9,8 x5,53

Option 2 2y
2 2 -t 
𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 2 y
v  0  (2)(9,8)(150)
f
vf = 54,22
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 = m.s t1 downwards
2 𝑣𝑣⃗
f 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖 +2 2𝑔𝑔⃗Δ𝑦𝑦⃗ 𝑖𝑖 + g
Option 1 2 Option 2
2 v f  2940
⃗ (2)(9,8)(150) −1𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 = 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖 +t 𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥2yt  2 x150 g
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓2 =2 𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖2 +v f 2𝑔𝑔 ⃗0Δ𝑦𝑦  5,53s
v2.22 f  2940
2 2
v f  0 v f(2)(9,82940
𝑣𝑣
⃗
)(150)
𝑓𝑓 = 54,22 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 downwards
2y
g
29,8
x 150
t 
gt   2 xt150
vf = 0+ 9,8 x5,53  5,53s
2 𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑓𝑓 =1𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑓𝑓54,22
Option = 54,22 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚∙ ∙𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1 −1 downwards
downwards 9,s28 -1 downwards
 5,53m.s
9v,8f =Option
54,22
v Whenf  2940 2 x
the two objects meet their position is the same: 150 = |ΔyA| +|ΔyB| 150 150 = the
t  vf = 0+ 5v ,53=x5,53
9,8 s 0+ 9,8 x5,53
= yB 𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝑠𝑠 −1 downwards
𝑣𝑣⃗ 𝑓𝑓 =yA54,22 9v,8f = 54,22f m.s addition of the absolute values of
-
1 downwards
2.2 1 2 v = 0+ 1
9,8 x5,53
2 v f = 54,22
the m.s
displacements
-
1 downwards
of A and B. Commented [U160]: Pse check.
y Ai  viAt  gt  y Bi  viBft  gt - 1
2.2 2 vf = 54,22 2 m.s 1 downwards 150 = | viAt  gt 2 | + |
Level2.2 zero at the Optionprojecting 1 point of A (reference 2Option 2
point). When the two objects meet their position is the same: 1 2 150 = |ΔyA| +|ΔyB| 150 = the
Option 1 viB t Option gt | 2
2.2
2.2 Option 11
y A = yB
1 2
Option 2 addition of the absolute values of
0  100t  x9,8 xt 2  1501 0t 2 x9,8 xt 2 1 the displacements
When the two
When the objects
2 two y objects meet
 viAtmeet their
 their position
gt position is the
2 y Bi isvthe same:150 g- v150tiB t= |Δy
2 1 A|t+|Δy = B| 150 = the B.
of A and Commented [U160]: Pse check.
iB t 
2
g 1
Option 1
same: yA = yB Ai 2 Option 2 2addition 2of150 the = | v
absolute t  g t
values
 2
| +
of |
Option 1 objects 100t  150 Option iA
2 2
When the two Level meet zero their position is the same: 150 = |Δy 1A| displacements
+|Δy 2 B| 150of= Athe
y  v  t  𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥1 at
=g 
the
1,5
t
projecting
2 𝑠𝑠
 y  v
point
 t 
of1A (reference
g  t 2v t  the g  t and B. Commented [U160]: Pse check.
When yA = ytheB Ai two iA objects meetBitheir
point).
2
iB position
2 isiA
addition the of2same:
the absolute
150 = | viAv iBt
150
1 1
values =
t  ggt2t| +| | 2of|ΔyA| +|ΔyB| 150 = the
y = y 1 1 1 the 1 displacements 100of tA 
2and2 B.
150 Commented [U160]: Pse check.
y Ai Level
Av tzero
iA
B 0  at
g100thet 2 projecting
t y Bi  x9v,iBpoint
8 xt tofA150
2
g(reference
2
t  0t  x9,8 xt 1 2
addition of2 the absolute values of
2 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠 1
point). 2 2 2 150 2 = | viAv t  1g150 t𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
-|2 +
v| iB| t  gt =
1 1
point 2of2 A100 iB t 
2 22

g  t the displacements
2 of A and B. Comme
point).
y  v t 
Level zero at the projecting
Ai0  100iA  t 
1gt  y  v t  gt
x 9 ,8 x t 
(reference
150
t  150 1
 0
Bi  t  iB x 9 ,8 x  t 2
1 1 1
2.3 1
2 2 2 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠2
1
viB t  150
2
gt- 2v|  viAt1gtg2==
iB t  150
2 2
t 2|
viAt  gt 2 | + |
100t  1502
2 2
Level
0  100zero t  at x9,8the xtprojecting  150
100t 0150 tpoint
 x9of ,8 xA
t (reference 1
2 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠 2 150 - viB vt   g1g t 2t=2
point). iA t 2 1𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠
100t  150
1
2 viB t  88gt 2 |
1 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠1 2 viAt  gt 2
2
100t  1502

0  100t  2.3
x9,8 xt  150  0t  x9,8 xt 2 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠
1
2 2 150 - v t  gt = 100t  150 2
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠 iB 2
2.3 100t  150
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠 1 88
viAt  gt 2
2.3 2
88
100t  150
88 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 = 1,5 𝑠𝑠
2.3
88
80
2.3
Option 1 Option 2
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑓𝑓 = 11𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖 + 𝑔𝑔⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
Option Option 2 1
Option
Option 1 Option2 2
Option y  viAt  gt 2
100 =𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣⃗𝑖𝑖−100
𝑣𝑣⃗𝑣𝑣𝑓𝑓⃗𝑓𝑓 == 𝑖𝑖 + ⃗𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥+ 9,8 𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
+ 𝑔𝑔⃗𝑔𝑔𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 11 2 2 2
yy viAv
iAt
t  ggtt
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
100
100 == −100 = −100++𝑠𝑠9,8
20,41 9,8𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 22 1
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥
𝛥𝛥𝛥𝛥 == 20,41
20,41𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 011  100 t  9,8t 2
0 0  100
 100tt  9,89 2 2
,8tt 2
22
2
0 0 100 t
100 0t 
4,4
9,9t2 t 2 t  4,9t
100
2
t t100 ttt  4,9t
2 2
100
100  4,49,9
ΔtΔt
==20,41
20,41s sΔt = 20,41 s

2.4
2.4
2.4 Positive
Positiveupwards
upwards Positive downwards
Positive downwards
2.4
Positive upwards Positive downwards

Exercise 1
Exercise 1
1.1 Greater than.
1.1 Greater
There than.(non-conservative) force acting; mechanical energy is not conserved.
is friction
There is friction (non-conservative) force acting; mechanical energy is not conserved.
(3) Commented [U161]: Pse check – only 2
1.2 (3) net work done on an object is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the object.
The Commented [U161]: Pse check – o
1.2 The (2)
 net work done on an object is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the object.
5.61.3 Work (2)Energy Power Commented [U162]: Pse complete.
1.3
1.3.1 Wnet  E f  E i  Suggest cross-referencing
Commented of entire
[U162]: text is re
Pse complete
Exercise
1.3.1 Wnet1  E f  E i  Suggest cross-referencing of entire text
1.1 Greater than. 89

There is friction (non-conservative) force acting; mechanical energy is not 89
conserved.
(3) Comm
1.2 The net work done on an object is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the object.
 (2)
1.3 Comm
1.3.1 Wnet  E f  E i  Sugges
81
89
Exercise 1
1.1 Greater than.

Exercise
There
1 is friction (non-conservative) force acting; mechanical energy is not conserved. (3)
1.2 1.1 The

Greater than.
net work done on an object is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the object.  (2)
There is friction (non-conservative) force acting; mechanical energy is not conserved.
(3) Commented [U161]: Pse check – only 2 ticks.
1.3 1.2 The net work done on an object is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the object.
 (2)
1.3 Commented [U162]: Pse complete.
1.3.1 Wnet  E f  Ei  (5)
1.3.1 Suggest cross-referencing of entire text is required.
1
Fnet x cos   1m(v 2f 2 vi2 2) 
Fnet x cos  2 m(v f  vi ) 
2
1 0 2 2 89
 Fnet (10) cos 180 0 1(24,7)(18 2 24,25 2)
 Fnet (10) cos 180 2 (24,7)(18  24,25 )
2
 Fnet  326,12 N  frictional force / wrywingskrag  Commented [U163]: Pse check.
 Fnet  326,12 N  frictional force / wrywingskrag  Commented [U163]: Pse check.
(5)
(5)
1.3.2
1.3.2 Wnc  E K  E P 
1.3.2 Wnc  E K  E P 
1
f  x cos   1m(v 2f 2 vi2 2)  mgh 
f  x cos  2 m(v f  vi )  mgh 
2
1
326,12  x cos1800 0  1(24,7)(0  18 2 2)   24,7(9,8)(x sin 50 0 0) 
326,12  x cos180  2 (24,7)(0  18 )   24,7(9,8)(x sin 50 ) 
 326,12 x  4001,4  2185,4287 x
 326,12 x  4001,4  185,4287 x
 x  7,82 m 
 x  7,82 m 
(6)
(6)
(6) [16][16]
[16]
7.2
7.5 Doppler
7.5
Doppler EffectEffect
Doppler Effect
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
Exercise
1.1. 1 Lower than
1.1. AsLower
the than
speed of sound is constant wavelength is inversely proportional to
As the speed
frequency of sound is
and frequency is higher.
constant wavelength is inversely proportional to
1.1. frequency
Lower
OR than and frequency is higher.
OR than
Lower
Lower than
As the speed of sound 1 is constant wavelength is inversely proportional to frequency
When v is constant λ 1f and frequency is higher.
When v is constant
and frequency is higher. λ  f and frequency is higher.
OR 
OR than
Lower
ORLower thanheard is higher, the wavelength is smaller, because when the speed
As frequency
ofAs frequency
sound heard is higher,
is constant, wavelength theand
wavelength is smaller,
frequency because
are inversely when the speed
proportional.
Lower
of sound than
is constant, wavelength and frequency are inversely proportional.
(4)
(4)
1
1.2 When veffect
Doppler is constant λ f and frequency is higher. (1)
1.2 Doppler effect α (1)
OR
(4)
1.3 Option 1 (6)
1.3 Lower
Optionthan
1
v
(6)
 vlistener 
f l    vsound 
sound  vlistener f s 
f l  vsound  vsource   f s is higher, the wavelength is smaller, because when the speed of
As frequency heard
 vsound  vsource 
sound is 340  0  wavelength and frequency are inversely proportional.
constant,
f l   340  0   x 620
1.2 Doppler f l  
340  30
effect .56   x 620 (1)
 340  30.56 
f l  681,23 Hz
f l  681,23 Hz
90
90
82
(4)
1.2 Doppler effect (1)
1.3 Option 1 (6)

1.3 Option 1 (6)
v v 
f l   sound listener  f s 
 vsound  vsource 
 340  0 
fl     x 620
 340  30.56 
f l  681,23 Hz
v  f  90
v  f 
340  681,23 
340  681,23 
  0,50 m
  0,50 m
Option 2
v Option
f  2
Option  v 
f   2 sound  f s 
340 l 681 v , 23
 sound  
 v
vsound source 
f l    f s 
  0f,l50  340
vm
sound vsource  
   x 620
 340340
 30.56
fl     x 620
 340  30.56 
Option 2
f l  681 v,sound
23 Hz 
f l    f s 
f l v681
sound,23
 vHz
source 
v  f 
 340 
vf l f    x 620
340 340 681,2330  .
56 
340  681,23 
  0,50 m
f l 681 ,23m
0,50 Hz
v 340  681.23 
f 
340
  0,681 .23 
50 m
340  681,23 
  0,50 m
7.6 Electrostatics
 0,50 m
Exercise 1Solutions
7.6 Electrostatics
7.3 Electrostatics
1.1 What is the relationship between the electrostatic force between two charges and the
340  681.23 
distance between those charges?
Exercise
1.1
1.2 What 1isSolutions
the relationship
Electrostatic  between the electrostatic force between two charges and the
distance   0,50force
between m
those charges?
1.3 Magnitude of the charges 
1.2 Electrostatic force 
1.1
7.6What
1.3 is the
1.4
Magnitude relationship
of
Electrostatics the between
charges  the electrostatic force between two charges and the distance between those charges?
1.4
1.2 Electrostatic
2000 force
1.1 What is the relationship between the electrostatic force between two charges and the
distance2000
between those charges?
1500
1.3
1.2 Magnitude of thecharges
Electrostatic force
F(N) F(N)
1500
1000
1.3 Magnitude of the charges 
1000
1.4
1.4 500
5000
2000 0 2 4 6 8 10
0
d(m)
1500 0 2 4 6 8 10
d(m)
F(N)
1000
500
0 91
0 2 4 6 8 10
d(m) 91
91
83
CRITERIA
CRITERIA MARKS/PUNTE
MARKS/PUNTE Commented
Commented [U164]: Pse Pse
[U164]: check.
check.
Pse Pse
check all instances
check where
all instances another
where anotherlanguage
languageis included andand
is included it it
CRITERIA MARKS/PUNTE Commented
appears as though
appears [U164]:
as though Pse check.
something has has
something been copies
been andand
copies pasted but but
pasted not not
CRITERIA
Correct shape
Correct shape  Pse MARKS/PUNTE
check all instances where
over-written/corrected
over-written/corrected so another
so that it fits
that language
it with
fits is document.
this this
with included and it
document.
appears as though something has been copies and pasted but not
Correctshape
Correct shape  
over-written/corrected so that it fits with this document.
Three or or
Three more coordinates
more plotted
coordinates correctly
plotted correctly 
Three or more coordinates plotted correctly 
Three or more coordinates plotted correctly 
(2)
(2)(2)
1.5The
Themagnitude
magnitude ofelectrostatic
the electrostatic force two
between two chargesproportional
is inversely (2)
proportional to the square of
1.51.5 of the
The magnitude of the force
electrostatic between
force charges
between two is inversely
charges is inversely to to
proportional thethe
square
square
theThe
of distance
1.5the distance between
between
magnitude of thethe
the charges.
charges.
electrostatic

force between two charges is inversely proportional to the square

of the distance between the charges. 
of the distance between the charges. 
1.6.1
1.6.1
1.6.1
1.6.1
CrITerIA
CrITerIA Marks
Marks
Shape
Shape
CrITerIA  
Marks
Direction of of
Direction
Shape thethe
arrows
arrows 

Direction of the arrows 
(2)(2)
(2)
1.6.2 kQ 2
2 (4)
1.6.2
1.6.2 F F 2 kQ 
r r2 2
kQ
1.6.2 F 2 
r
9 9 2 2
(9 
(910 10)Q )Q
 1600
 1600= = 
92 2 2
(1 )
(9  10(1))Q
 1600 = 
(1) 2
Q Q= 4.22 x 10
= 4.22 x 10-4C C 
-4
(4)(4) Commented
[U165]: pse pse
Formatting: alignalign
items on right-hand
items on right-hand
margin. Repetitive
margin. problems
Repetitive seen.
problems seen.
Q = 4.22 x 10 -4
C  (4) Commented [U165]: Formatting: pse align items on right-hand
margin. Repetitive problems seen.
kQkQ
1.6.3
1.6.3 E E 2 
1.6.3 r r2
kQ

[19]
1.6.3 E 2 
r
9 4
9 910
 109 4,22  10
4,22  10 4
E =E =  (3)(3)
9 (0,25) 2 2 4
9  10  4(0,22,25) 10
E=  (3)
(0,25) 2
E =E 6,07 x 10
= 6,07 N·C-1 -1
-11 -11
x 10 N·C  [19]
[19]
E = 6,07 x 10 -11
N·C -1
[19]
92 92
92
84
Exercise 1
1.1
Differences between emf and potential difference:
Electromotive force
1. Electromotive force transmits current both inside and outside the cell.
2. Electromotive force emf is the cause.
3. Electromotive force is always greater than potential difference.
4. Electromotive force creates potential difference entire the circuit.
5. Electromotive force does not depend on the resistance of the circuit.
6. Electromotive force remains constant.
7. The part of the circuit where electrical energy is created from any other energy then that part
contains the source of Electromotive force.
Potential difference:
1. Potential difference current transfers between any two points in the circuit.
2. Potential difference is the result.
3. Potential difference is always less than electromotive force.
4. Potential difference takes place between any two points in the circuit.
5. Potential difference of two points depends on the resistance of those points.
6. It does not remain constant.
7. Potential difference exists in the part of the circuit where electrical potential energy is transformed
into another form of energy.
1.2 The potential difference across a conductor is directly proportional to the current in the conductor at
constant temperature.
85
1.2
The potential difference across a conductor is directly proportional to the current in the conductor at
constant temperature.
1.3
First we must identify the type of connection; for this purpose we must indicate the direction of the
1.3 First we must identify the type of connection; for this purpose we must indicate the direction of the
current.
current.
12 V
S2
A
+ +
R1 - R2 R3 -
93
S1
To
To calculate current,
calculate current, we apply
we must mustOhm’s
applylawOhm’s law Commented [U168]: Pse complete (theory?)
To calculate 𝑉𝑉2 current, we must apply Ohm’s law Commented [U168]: Pse complete (theory?)
𝐼𝐼To2 = calculate
𝑅𝑅22
 current, we must apply Ohm’s law Commented [U168]: Pse complete (theory?)
𝑉𝑉
𝐼𝐼2 = 𝑅𝑅 
𝑉𝑉22
2 = resistors
𝐼𝐼The  are connected
To calculate
𝑅𝑅2 current, we mustinapplyparallel:
Ohm’s law Commented [U168]: Pse complete (theory?)
The
The resistors resistors are are connected
connected in parallel:in parallel:
1 = 21 1 𝑉𝑉 1
𝐼𝐼The
2 = resistors + +  are connected in parallel:
𝑅𝑅1𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 2
11 𝑅𝑅
12 𝑅𝑅
13
= + + 
𝑅𝑅𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
1 𝑅𝑅11 𝑅𝑅12 𝑅𝑅13
=
The resistors + + are𝑅𝑅3 connected in parallel:
𝑅𝑅 
𝑅𝑅
𝑅𝑅 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =𝑅𝑅1 𝑅𝑅2
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑅𝑅3
𝑅𝑅1𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 31  1 1
𝑅𝑅 == 𝑅𝑅 + + 
As
𝑅𝑅 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒the
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑅𝑅1three
3
𝑅𝑅2 resistors𝑅𝑅3 are in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
As the
As the three resistors are in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
𝑅𝑅 three resistors are in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
As
𝑉𝑉1𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒=
𝑅𝑅 the
=𝑉𝑉23three= 𝑉𝑉1=resistors V are in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
𝑉𝑉1 = 𝑉𝑉2 = 𝑉𝑉1= V
To
As calculate
the 𝑉𝑉2resistors current,
V havewe the must apply Ohm’s thelaw current through each one is the same.
are same resistance,
𝑉𝑉1 = = 𝑉𝑉1=resistors Commented [U168]: Pse complete (theory?)
As the three in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
As the 𝑉𝑉2 resistors have the same resistance, the current through each one is the same.
2 =the
𝐼𝐼Solving: 
As
𝑉𝑉1 = 𝑅𝑅2 resistors have the same resistance, the current through each one is the same.
𝑉𝑉2 = 𝑉𝑉1= V Commented [U169]: Perhaps solution (i.e.noun – solving is a
Solving: verb).
Commented [U169]: Perhaps solution (i.e.noun – solving is a
As
The
Solving:
theresistors resistors are
𝑅𝑅 have
connected thein same
parallel: resistance, the current through each one is the same. verb).
Commented [U169]: Perhaps solution (i.e.noun – solving is a
𝑉𝑉
As = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
2 the resistors 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐼𝐼  have the same resistance, the current through each one is the same.
3
𝑅𝑅 verb).
𝑉𝑉21 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼1𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =1 𝐼𝐼 1
3𝑅𝑅
𝑉𝑉
Solving:
Solving:
2 = = 𝐼𝐼
𝑅𝑅 + = 𝐼𝐼+  
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 Commented [U169]: Perhaps solution (i.e.noun – solving is a
𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅 𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅 3 𝑅𝑅
𝐼𝐼2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒= 𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅3 1= 3 2  3 verb).
𝐼𝐼
𝐼𝐼𝑉𝑉2 == 𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
3
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅= 3=  𝐼𝐼
𝑅𝑅

𝐼𝐼
𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒==3𝑅𝑅 3=
2 3  3
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐼𝐼2 = 3 = 13 𝐴𝐴 (6)
3
𝐼𝐼2 = 3𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅= 1𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴 (6)
As the33 three resistors are in parallel, the potential difference is the same:
𝐼𝐼22 = 𝑉𝑉𝑅𝑅 ==1=
2.4. 𝐴𝐴
3𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 3 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 
 (6)
2.4.
𝑉𝑉1 = 3𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉 =
2 = 𝑉𝑉1 = V 𝑖𝑖
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉 
2.4.
𝑉𝑉 = 𝑉𝑉
𝐼𝐼2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
=12 1=− 𝐴𝐴𝜀𝜀3−×𝑉𝑉0,4 𝑖𝑖  (6)
3
𝑉𝑉
As = 12
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒the − 3 × 0,4
resistors have the same resistance, the current through each one is the same.
𝑉𝑉
2.4. = 12
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑉𝑉 10,8 −𝑉𝑉3  × 0,4 (3)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 
𝑉𝑉 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 10,8 𝑉𝑉 
Solving: (3) Commented [U169]: Perhaps solution (i.e.noun – solving is a
2.5
𝑉𝑉
𝑉𝑉 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒Increases
= 10,8 𝑉𝑉  (3) verb).
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 12 − 3 × 0,4
2.5
𝑉𝑉2 =Increases𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐼𝐼 
𝑅𝑅
TheIncreases
2.5
𝑉𝑉 resistors are 3 now connected in series then total resistance increases, emf is constant then(3) current
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 10,8 𝑉𝑉 
The
decreases, resistors
𝑅𝑅
are
dropnow connected
of potential in series
in the batterythen total resistance
decreases increases,
and according emf=is𝜀𝜀constant
to 𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 then current
− 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 terminal
𝐼𝐼
𝐼𝐼The resistors are now connected in series
batterythen total resistance increases, emf = is𝜀𝜀 constant then(4)current
𝐼𝐼
decreases,
potential
2.5 2 =Increases
3
= increases. drop of potential in the decreases and according to 𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 terminal Commented [U170]: Pse check / clarify.

decreases, 𝑅𝑅
potential increases.
3
drop of potential in the battery decreases and according to 𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 terminal (4) (6) [U170]: Pse check / clarify.
Commented
Exercise
The
potential resistors
3 2 are now connected in series then total resistance increases, emf is constant then(4)
increases. current Commented [U170]: Pse check / clarify.
𝐼𝐼2 = 3 = 1 𝐴𝐴 (6)
2.4.
Exercise
decreases,
3.1. What is the
2 drop of potential in the battery decreases and according to 𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 terminal
relationship between potential difference and the strength of the electric current in a circuit
Exercise
potential 2
increases.
3.1.
2.4. What is 𝜀𝜀the relationship between potential difference and the strength of the electric current in(4) a circuit Commented [U170]: Pse check / clarify.
with 𝑉𝑉 a𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
resistor −with𝑉𝑉 𝑖𝑖  constant resistance?
3.1. What is the relationship between potential difference and the strength of the electric current in a circuit
with
Exercise a resistor with constant resistance?
3.2.
𝑉𝑉
with
When
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 12 2−current
a resistor 3× with0,4 increases, potential difference also increases.
constant resistance?
3.2.
3.1. When current increases, potentialpotential
difference also increases.
3.3. What Independent is the relationship variable – between
current difference and the strength of the electric current in a circuit
3.2. When
𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 Independent current
= 10,8 𝑉𝑉  variable – current increases, potential difference also increases. (3)
3.3.
with aDependent resistor with constant resistance?
variable – potential difference
3.3. Independent variable – current
2.5 Dependent variable – potential difference
3.4.Increases
3.2. When current increases, potential difference also increases.
Dependent variable – potential difference
3.4.
(3)
3.3. Independent
The resistors are variable – current
now connected in series then total resistance increases, emf is constant then current
3.4.
decreases, Dependent drop of potential
variable in the difference
– potential battery decreases and according to 𝑉𝑉𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝜀𝜀 − 𝑉𝑉𝑖𝑖 terminal
potential increases. (4) Commented [U170]: Pse check / clarify.
2.5 Increases
3.4.
Exercise 2
The resistors
3.1. What are now between
is the relationship connected in series
potential then
difference and total resistance
the strength increases,
of the electric current in aemf is constant then current
circuit
94
with a resistor with constant resistance?
decreases, drop of potential in the battery decreases and according to terminal 94 potential increases.
3.2. When current increases, potential difference also increases. 94
(4)
94
3.4.
86
94
Exercise 2
3.1. What is the relationship between potential difference and the strength of the electric current in a circuit
with a resistor with constant resistance?
3.2. When current increases, potential difference also increases.
3.4.
V (V)
V (V)
I (A) I (A)
2.5 Gradient == ∆YY VYV

∆

2.5 gradient = V
2.5 gradient
X = I 
∆X ∆XI I
24  6
Gradient = 24  6
Gradient== 0,02
0
Gradient,08
0,08  0,02
Gradient = 300
2.6. Gradient==of
Resistance
Gradient 300
the resistor.
300
2.6.hypothesis
2.7. The Resistance of the resistor.
is correct: the potential difference is directly proportional to the strength of the
electric
2.7.current
2.6. Resistance when
of thethe
The hypothesis resistance
resistor. is constant.
is correct: the potential difference is directly proportional to the strength of the
electric current when the resistance is constant.
2.7. The
7.8 hypothesis is correct: the potential difference is directly proportional to the strength of the electric
Electrodynamics
current when1 the resistance is constant.
Exercise
7.8 Electrodynamics
7.5 Electrodynamics
Exercise 1
1.1 DC generator
Exercise 1 Mechanical energy to electrical energy (2)
1.1 DC generator
1.2 To make the direction of the (induced) current to be the same in every half cycle/half
1.1 DC generator
turn Commented [U171]: Pse check – not understood.
Mechanical energy to electrical energy (2)
Mechanical
OR energy to electrical energy (2)
1.2 To make the direction of the (induced) current to be the same in every half(2) cycle/half
1.2 To To
make the
keepturndirectioncurrent
the (induced) of the (induced) current to be the same in every half cycle/half turn
unidirectional. Commented [U171]
1.3 Graph A
OR OR
(2)
The DC generator becomes an AC generator.
To keepTo keep
the the (induced)
(induced) current
current unidirectional.
unidirectional. (2)
Voltage changes the polarity with every half cycle.  (3)
1.3 Graph A A
1.3 Graph
The DC generator
The becomes
DC generator an AC
becomes generator.
an AC generator.
Voltage changes
Voltage the polarity
changes withwith
the polarity every half
every halfcycle.
cycle. (3) (3)
95
95
87
1.4 Alternative solution:
Alternative solution:
V 2 rms / wgk Commented [U172]: Pse c
1.4 Pav g/ gem  
R
Alternative solution:
V 2 rms / wgk V 2 rms / wgk Commented [U172]: Pse check items (languages).
1.4 Pav g/ gem   Pav g/ gem  
R V 2 maks 2 R
( Vmax/rms / wgk )
Pav g/ gem  
Vmax/ maks 2 Pavg/gem  R2 V
( ) R ( max/ maks ) 2
2 2
Pavg/gem  Vmax/ maks 2 Pavg 
R V 2 rms / wgk 12 Alternative ( )
solution: R Commented [U172]: Pse check items (languages).
1.4 Pav g/ gem   ( )2 2
R 6
2 Pavg R2 rms / wgk
12 2 V 12
( ) R Pav g/ gem   ( )2
2 V R 6
2 
6  ( max/ maks ) 2 R= 12 Ω 12
R ( )2 R
2 2  V
Pavg/gem  6
R= 12 Ω R Vrms / wgk R ( max/ maks ) 2 R= 12 Ω
Irms / wgk  Pavg  2
12 R=R 12 Ω Rrms/wgk = IrmsTot/wgk tot RT
V
Vrms / wgk( ) 2
Irms / wgk  2
6R  Vrms/wgk =( V IrmsTot/wgk
max/ maks tot2RT 12 V R
R ) ( ) 2 rms / wgk  I
2 rms Total/wgk tot  ( )
V maks 2 Irms/wgk  6 R
2  2 2
( max/ ) Vrms / wgk R
R= 12 Ω
2  Irms Total/wgk tot  ( )R
Irms/wgk  2 2 12 12
R Vrms / wgk 12 2 R= 12 Ω  Irms / wgk  ( ) 
Irms / wgk   12 ( ) 2 2
R 2 V 12
12 2   Irms  ( = )IrmsTot/wgk
rms/wgk  tot RT
( ) 2 12
/ wgk
2 Irms Total/wgk tot = 1,42 A 
 2 (
Vmax/ maks 2
) Vrms / wgk R
12 2
Irms/wgk = 0,71tot = 1,42 A
Irms Total/wgk Irms Total/wgk tot  ( )
Irms/wgk  2 2
Irms/wgk = 0,71 R
Irms Total/wgk totaal = 2x(0,71) 
12 12
12
Irms Total/wgk totaal = 2x(0,71)
 Irms / wgk  ( ) 
( )2  =1,42 A2 2
 2
=1,42 A  12 Irms Total/wgk tot = 1,42 A 
Irms/wgk = 0,71
7.9 IrmsEffect
Photoelectric Total/wgk totaal = 2x(0,71) 
Exercise 1
Exercise 1 =1,42 A 
1.1 Minimum energy needed to eject an electron from a metal surface (substance).
1.1 7.6 Photoelectric

Minimum energy needed1.2
to ejectThe Effect
an electron from
extraction a metal of
(ejection) surface (substance).
electrons from a metal surface by radiation (when light strikes its
surface).
1.2 The7.9extraction
Photoelectric
(ejection)Effect
of electrons from a metal surface by radiation (when light strikes its
Exercise
surface).
1
1.3.1 𝐸𝐸 = 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜 + 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘
Exercise 1
1.3.1 1.1 Minimum energy
𝐸𝐸 = 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜 + 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘 needed toℎ𝑓𝑓eject
= 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜an
+ 𝐸𝐸electron
𝑘𝑘 from a metal surface (substance).
1.1Minimum energy needed to eject an electron from a metal surface (substance).
ℎ𝑓𝑓 = 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜 + 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘 (6,63 × 10−34 )𝑓𝑓 = 3,52 × 10−19 + 4,20 × 10−19
1.2
1.2 The extraction
The extraction (ejection)
(ejection) of electrons
of electrons fromsurface
from a metal a metalby surface by radiation
radiation (when (when
light strikes its light strikes its surface).
(6,63 × 10−34 )𝑓𝑓 = 3,52 × 10−19 + 4,20 × 10−19 𝑓𝑓 = 1,6 × 1015 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻
surface).
1.3.1
1.3.1
𝑓𝑓 = 1,6 × 1015 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻
𝐸𝐸 = 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜 + 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘 96
ℎ𝑓𝑓 = 𝑊𝑊𝑜𝑜 + 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘 96
(6,63 × 10−34 )𝑓𝑓 = 3,52 × 10−19 + 4,20 × 10−19
𝑓𝑓 = 1,6 × 1015 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻
96
1.3.2
1.3.2 𝑐𝑐 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
3 × 108 = (1,16 × 1015 )𝜆𝜆

𝜆𝜆 = 2,59 × 10−7 𝑚𝑚
88
chemistry
1. How to use this book
This book serves as a guide to understanding the Grade 12 Physical Sciences. However, it
does not replace your textbook. The book focuses more on the challenges that have been
observed from learners’ responses in the Grades 12 National Examinations over the past
few years.
The authors have used their experience to focus their attention on the areas that learners
seem to struggle with.
2. Key subject concepts
The two areas of study in Chemistry are: 1. materials 2. chemical change. In demonstrating
concepts, laws and theories in this book, examples are used; this however does not mean that
the laws, concepts and principles applies only to those examples used. It is therefore important
to understand the concept itself and where and when it applies.
Some theories/laws/concepts apply throughout the content in both organic and inorganic
chemistry e.g. atomic theory, The Kinetic Molecular Theory, the mole concept, stoichiometry,
rules of oxidation, inter-molecular forces etc. These theories and concepts are applied
throughout the chemistry content. There are aslo laws that apply only to a particular group or
class of compounds; for example gas laws apply only to gases and not to solids or aqueous
substances. It is important to always know where the laws/ rules can be applied.
3. The Representation model
This model employs a strategy of three stages in understanding Chemistry Education. These
stages should be applied almost simultaneously when studying chemistry: 1. The macro
level: This is what you see as an observer of either a material or chemical change (state,
colour, size, etc.) 2. The Sub-micro level: This is what happens at the sub-atomic level, e.g.
with electrons, protons in atoms or molecules. 3. The Symbolic level: This is when you
represent what happens at the sub-atomic level and macro level using symbols, e.g. instead
of saying ice, you write H2O (s). Learners of Chemistry must be able to move through these
three levels with ease when they discuss chemistry. When you deal with a chemistry question,
always think about it in terms of these three levels.
Macroscopic
Symbolic Sub-micro
representation model
89
4. Tips on specific topics
 Organic chemistry: Study how to name organic molecules for all

groups. always remember that the carbon atom always takes a
maximum of 4 bonds in all organic compounds, not more, not less.
 Electrochemistry: Pay attention to half reaction and their respective

oxidation states. use the Table of Reduction Potentials as discussed in
the text. Read about the similarities and differences between the two
types of cells: Galvanic and Electrolytic!
 Fertilizers: The processes involved in the manufacture of fertilisers is clearly

indicated in the text. Study the molecules and their reactions, including their
reaction conditions (these would include temperature, pressure,
concentrations of reacting species and in some cases catalysts).
5. Study and examination tips
6. message to Grade 12 learners from the writers
As you prepare to write your examination, it is important to carefully understand the rules
governing certain aspects of your work, and the laws and concepts. Ensure you understand
these rules/laws/ concepts properly. Understand what they mean, where they apply and
when they apply - and also when and where they do not apply.
Always:
1. Read the question that you are working on carefully.

2. Understand what it says and what is required of you.
3. Write down the information that you have.
4. Write down the information that you do not have.
5. Use the information you have to derive the information you need to answer the
question.
6. Check your work by going through these steps again!
90
7. The mole concept
The Mole: The quantity of a substance that contains 6,02 x 1023 particles. This
number is also called Avogadro’s number.
A mole is a very, very BIG number and if 12g of Carbon C12
contains this number of Carbon atoms, you can imagine how small atoms are.
Imagine this many atoms contained in only 12g!
This also demonstrates how small atoms are!
All Chemistry calculations require an understanding of the mole concept. When
we do calculations on reactions in chemistry we always use the moles that reacted -

NEVER the mass that reacted. If you are given the mass, you must always work out
the number of moles contained in the mass!
The masses that reacts in a chemical reaction will almost always have one or more
of the reactant(s) having a larger than necessary number of moles or fewer that
necessary number of moles and the reactions will almost always leave some
unreacted reactant(s) that we call an excess reactant and the reactant(s) that gets
used up while there is still an excess reactant is called a limiting reactant(s).
8. Stoichiometry
91
8.1 Excess and Limiting Reagents
See how many tyres you are able to use in this example. The remaining tyres are
in excess. The cars are said to be limiting.
Which of the two reactants is in excess and which is the limiting reagent?
Look at the reactants in the jar as they form products in the jar on the right of the
arrow. Study this reaction and decide which of the two molecules that are involved in
this reaction is limiting H2 or N2 is the limiting reagent?
92
9. Practice activities from Grade 10
Reminder: One MOLE has 6.022 x 1023 items or there are 6.022 x 1023 items/mole.
Show your work!
1. How many atoms of potassium make up one MOLE? _____
2. How many atoms of potassium make up 2 MOLES? _____
3. How many formula units of salt make up 10 MOLES? _____
4. How many molecules of water make up 1 MOLE? _____
5. How many molecules of water make up 5 MOLES? _____
6. How many moles are 6.022 x 1023 atoms of sodium? _____
7. How many moles are 12.04 x 1023 atoms of carbon? _____
10. How many moles are 6.022 x 1023 molecules of water? _____
10. dynamic chemical Equilibrium Graphs
93
11. cONcENTRaTION – TImE GRaPHS
STudy TIP 1: Concentration, pressure and temperature changes made to a gaseous chemical
equilibrium are identified as follows:
 concentration change: The graph of one of the substances spikes upward or downward
 Pressure change: The graph spikes upward or downward for each substance in the equation.
 Temperature change: The graph does not spike but shows gradual upward and downward
changes that are opposite for the forward and reverse reactions
STudy TIP 2: Upward spiking and gradual upward changes show increase in concentration as well
as reaction rate. Downward spiking and gradual downward changes show decrease in concentration
as well as reaction rate.
STudy TIP 3: Pressure is increased by decreasing the volume of the container containing the
reaction mixture. Conversely, pressure is decreased by increasing the volume of the closed
container. Therefore pressure changes are really concentration changes.
STudy TIP 4: Once the change is made Le Chatelier’s Principle (LCP) can be used to explain the
graph shape.
ExamPLE
In the Haber Process, the reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g) ΔH < 0 takes place in a
closed container.
Changes are made to the reaction at times t1, t2 and t3. The graphs below show the situation.
1. What do the shapes of the graphs between the times 0 and t1 indicate about the reaction?
2. State the change that was made to the reaction at:
2.1 t1 2.2 t2 2.3 t3. Give a reason for each answer.
3. Use Le Chatteliers Principle (LCP) to explain the shapes of the graphs between:
3.1 t1 and t2 3.2 t2 and t3
aNSwERS
1. The reaction is in equilibrium
2.1 [N2] was increased Reason: There is an upward spike only for N2
94
ANSWERS
1. The reaction is in equilibrium.

2.1 [N2] was increased. Reason: There is an upward spike only for N2.
2.2 Pressure was increased. Reason: There is an upward spike for N2, H2 and NH3.
2.3 Temperature was increased. Reason: All changes in the graph line shapes are gradual. The
changes are upward for the reverse reaction and downward for the forward reaction.
3.1 STEP 1: Change made: [N2] increases.
STEP 2: According to LCP, the forward reaction is favoured (i.e. the reaction that reduces
the [N2] is favoured).
STEP 3: Therefore, the [H2] decreases and the [NH3] increases until a new equilibrium is
established.
3.2 STEP 1: Change made: Pressure was increased.
STEP 2: According to LCP, the forward reaction is favoured (i.e. the reaction that
produces less molecules is favoured).
STEP 3: Therefore the [NH3] increases, but the [N2] and [H2] decrease until a new
equilibrium is established.
95
12. FERTILIzERS
FERTILISERS
NH4NO3 and (NH4)2SO4
3 Industrial processes Fractional distillation
of liquid air gives N2.
Ostwald Process Haber Process Contact Process
4NH3 + 5O2 4NO + 6H2O N2 + 3h2 2NH3 S + O2 SO2

catalyst: Iron Oxide 2SO2 + O2 2SO3
2NO + O2 2NO2
3NO2 + H2O 2HNO3 + NO SO3 + H2SO4 H2S2O7 (Oleum)
Catalyst in step 1: Pt: Catalyst in Step2:V2O5
HNO3 + NH3 + H2SO4
FERTILISERS
(ONLY 2 Fertilisers to study)
NH4NO3 Ammonium Nitrate (NH4) 2SO4 Ammonium Sulphate
96
Primary nutrients (N P K) Essential Nutrients (c H and O) NPK ratio
TIP 1: Make a CHART showing the OSTWALD, HABER and CONTACT processes
and place it in your ROOM where you can always see it. Practice writing out the
equations on your own.
TIP 2: Play this game: Prepare the following cards for your game:
4 cards marked O2; 2 cards marked NO; 2 cards marked NO2; 2 cards marked
SO2;
2 cards marked SO3; 2 cards marked H2O; 1 card for each of the following - S,
H2SO4, H2S2O7 and HNO3.
Use THese CArDs To DePICT THe reACTIoNs For THe TWo

ProCesses oN A WALL. ComPeTe WITH YoUr CLAssmATe To see WHo
FINIsHes FAsTer.
activities
QuESTION 1
The flow diagram below represents two industrial processes that are used
to make fertilizer Z. The letters (a) to (d) represent steps in one of the
industrial processes. The letter J represents the other industrial process.
(b) (c) Gas P + H2

S + O2 X (a SO3 R
(d) J
Y NH3
Fertilizer Z
1.1 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:
1.1.1 Product X formed in step (a). (1)
1.1.2 Product Y formed in step (d). (1)
1.1.3 Process J, by which NH3 is produced.
97
1.2 Write down a balanced chemical equation for the formation of (3)
fertilizer Z.
1.3 A farmer has two labelled bags of fertilizer - x and y -as shown
below.
X
50 kg 20 kg
6:2:1 (20)
3:5:2 (30)
She mixes the contents of x and y together in another bag - z.
Calculate the total mass of phosphorus that z now contains. (7)
1.3 The bag of fertiliser shown below was prepared by mixing 25 kg of pure
ammonium sulphate (NH4)2SO4 with potassium salts, phosphates and sand.
3:5:1 (30)
x kg
Calculate the mass of the bag of fertiliser. (4)
(ASSUME THAT AMMONIUM SULPHATE IS THE ONLY SOURCE OF NITROGEN.
QuESTION 2
2.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in industrial preparation of
fertiliser y.
Process a: H2 + Gas X Proces A NH3
Fertiliser Y
Process B: + O2 + O2 Gas C H2O

Gas B NO + H2O HNO3
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
98
2.1.1 Write down the NAME of:
a. The RAW material for gas x in process a. (1)
b. Process a. (1)
c. Process B, represented by Steps 1 to 3. (1)
2.1.2 Write down the balanced equation for:
a. Process a (3)
b. Step 1 (3)
c. Step 2 (3)
d. The reaction that leads to the formation of fertiliser y. (3)
2.2 Two 50 kg bags contain fertiliser P and Q.
Fertiliser P: 5:2:3 (25)
Fertiliser Q: 1:3:4 (20)
2.2.1 What do the numbers 25 and 20 represent? (1)
2.2.2 Do a calculation to determine which fertiliser (P or Q) contains the greater

mass of potassium. (4)
SOLuTIONS
QuESTION 1
1.1.1 Sulphur dioxide (or SO2) - give the NAME or FORMULA, not both.
1.1.2 Sulphuric acid (or H2SO4)
1.1.3 Haber process
1.2 2NH3 + H2SO4 (NH4)2SO4
1.3 Approach:
Calculate the mass of phosphorus in each bag and add these figures together.
Bag X; m Phosphorus = 2/9 x 30/100 x 50 = 2.22 kg
Bag Y: m Phosphorus = 5 /10 x 30 x 20 = 3
mTOTAL = 3 + 2.22 = 5.22 kg
99
1.4 Approach:
First find mass N in (NH4)2SO4
m Nitrogen = % N in (NH4)2SO4 x 25k
= M nitrogen/M (NH4)2 SO4 X 25 Kg
= (2 x 14 ) / (14 x 2) + (2 X 4 X 1)+ 32 + (4 x 16) x 25kg
= 28+3 +32+64+25
= 28/132 x 25 Kg = 5.3 Kg
Mass nitrogen in bag = 5.3 = 3/9 x 30/100 x 5.3 = 0.1 x 53 Kg = x
QuESTION 2
2.1.1 a. Air b. Haber c. Ostwald
2.1.2 a. N2 + 3H2 2 NH3
b. 4 NH3 + 5 O2 4 NO + 6 H2O
c. 2 NO + O2 2NO2
d. NH3 + HNO3 NH4NO3
2.2.1 Percentage of fertiliser in the bag.
2.2.2 P mK = 3/10 x 25/100 x 50 = 3.75 kg
Q mK = 4/8 x 20 /100 x 50 = 5 Q contains more potassium
100
13. ORGaNIc cHEmISTRy
ORGaNIc cHEmISTRy
 BaSIc ORGaNIc cHEmISTRy

 PHySIcaL PROPERTIES
 ORGaNIc REacTIONS
13.1 BASIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Structural
Formulae Condensed
Molecular
Functional groups 9 Empirical
General formulae
Hydrocarbons
Basic saturated/Unsaturated
IuPac naming Organic chemistry Terminology
Homologous series
Functional group
Isomers
Chain
Structural isomers Positional
Functional
101
13.2 NOMENCLATURE OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
NOTE: organic compounds in these notes are named according to the 1993 IUPAC RULES.
STRaIGHT cHaIN aLKaNES IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The IUPAC names of the first eight are:
Name condensed structural Name condensed structural formula

formula
Methane CH4 Pentane CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3
Ethane CH3CH3 Hexane CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
Propane CH3CH2CH3 Heptane CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
Butane CH3CH2CH2CH3 Octane CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE OF STRaIGHT cHaIN aLKaNES cONTaINING aN aLKyL
In organic chemistry, an alkyl substituent is an alkane missing one hydrogen. The

term alkyl is intentionally unspecific to include many possible substitutions. ... The
smallest alkyl group is methyl, with the formula CH3−
In general, alkyl substituents are named by changing the ending “ane” in an alkane’s
name to “yl”.
EXAMPLE: CH3 is methyl; it is derived from CH4 (methane) by changing the “ane” ending in
methane to “yl”.
IUPAC RULES should be followed when naming these alkanes:
The following compound will be used to illustrate the IUPAC Rules:
STEP 1: Select the longest continuous chain for the parent name. In this case it has six
carbon atoms and is thus hexane.
102
STEP 2: Number the chain from either end, so that the substituents are attached at the
lower numbers. In the example, numbering from left to right gives substituents at
carbon 2 and 4, whereas numbering from right to left gives substituents at carbon
3 and 5. Thus the lower numbers occur when numbering from left to right.
STEP 3: Substituent groups are assigned the number of the carbon to which they are
attached. In the example, the two substituents are called the 2-methyl and 4-ethyl
substituent groups. Note that the number is written in front of the substituent
group and a hyphen (-) separates the number and the alkyl group’s name.
STEP 4: The name of the compound is now composed of the parent name preceded by
the names of the substituent groups in alphabetical order. The correct IUPAC
name for the example is 4-ethyl-2-methylhexane.
NOTES: In IuPac nomenclature, a hyphen (-) separates numbers from words, and a
comma separates numbers from numbers. Otherwise there is no space
between the words that make up the name.
STEP 5: If the same substituent occurs more than once in the molecule, the prefixes “di”,
“tri”, “tetra” and so on, are used to indicate how many times it occurs. If the
substituent occurs more than once on the same carbon, the number is repeated.
The following examples illustrate this step.
NOTES: In IUPAC nomenclature, the prefixes “di”, “tri”, “tetra” and so on, are not
alphabetised.
EXAMPLES:
2,3 - dimethylpentane 3,3 – dimethylhexane
NOTE: The IUPAC nomenclature of the following homologous series is similar to that of
alkanes. The only differences in the IUPAC nomenclature of these series is with precedence,
position of the functional group and parent name.
103
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: aLKENES IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
Precedence Position Parent name
The longest chain is The first carbon in C=C is Change the “ane” ending in
numbered so that the C=C used to locate the double the alkane to “ene” for the
has the lowest number in the bond. alkene.
chain.
EXAMPLES
(a) pent-2-ene (b) 4, 4-dimethylpent-2-ene

H
H C H
H H
H C C C C C H
H H H H
H C H
H
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: aLKyNES IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The longest chain is numbered so The first carbon in C=C is used to Change the “ane” ending in the
that the C=C has the lowest locate the triple bond. alkane to “yne” for the alkyne.
number in the chain.
EXAMPLES (a) 4,4-dimethylpent-2-yne (b) 2-methylhex-3-yne
H
H C H H H H H
H H
H C C C C C H
H C C C C C C H
H H H H C H H H
H C H
H H
104
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: HaLOaLKaNES (aLKyL HaLIdES) IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The halogen substituents that occur on the alkane chains are named as follows:
cl – chloro Br- bromo I – iodo
The longest chain is numbered to give The carbon atoms to There is no change
the halogen substituents the lowest which halogen made to the parent
numbers in the chain. substituents are alkane chain. It
bonded are used to remains an alkane.
locate their positions.
Examples: (a) 1-bromo-4-methylpentane (b) 2-bromo-1-chloropropane

H H Cl H H
Cl H H
Br C C C C C H
1 2 3 4 5 H
H H H H C C C H
H C H
H
H Br H
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: aLcOHOLS IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
NOTES: Just like there are primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols, there are primary,
secondary and tertiary alkyl halides.
PRImaRy aLcOHOL: The carbon atom attached to the –OH group is attached to one other
carbon atom in the molecule.
Example: CH3CH2CH2CH2OH (butan-1-ol).
SEcONdaRy aLcOHOL: The carbon atom attached to the –OH group is attached to two
other carbon atoms in the molecule.
Example:
TERTIaRy aLcOHOL: The carbon atom attached to the –OH group is attached to three
other carbon atoms in the molecule.
Example:
105
IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE OF aLcOHOLS
Longest chain is numbered so that the carbon atom The carbon atom to which the Change the “e” ending in the
bonded to the OH group has the lowest number in the OH group is bonded is used to alkane to “ol” for the alcohol.
chain. locate it.
Examples
2-methylbutan-1-ol
The table below provides information on the structural formula, condensed structural formula, molecular formula,
isomer(s) and functional group of some alcohols when their IUPAC name is given.
IuPac Structural Formula condensed Structural molecular Functional / Functional

Name Formula Formula Structural Group
Isomers (structural
formula)
H H H H H Pentan-2-ol
H C C C C C O
H H H H H H CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2OH C5H12O Pentan-3-ol

Pentan-1-ol
3-methylbutan-2- -O-H
ol
H H H H Butan-2-ol
H C C C C O
Butan-1-ol
H H H H H CH3CH2CH2CH2OH C4H10O 2-methylpropan- -O-H
2-ol
106
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: caRBOxyLIc acIdS IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The longest chain is numbered so that The carbon atom in Change the “e” ending
the carbon atom in the COOH group COOH is used to in the alkane name to
has the lowest number in the chain. It locate the COOH “oic acid” for the
will always be 1, but 1 is omitted in the group. carboxylic acid.
IUPAC name.
Examples: CH3
(a) HCOOH (b) CH3COOH (c) CH3CH2COOH (d) CH3CH2CH3CH2CH2C1OOH
methanoic acid ethanoic acid propanoic acid 4-methylhexanoic acid
Draw all the molecules above (a-d).
The table below provides information on the structural formula, condensed structural
formula, molecular formula, isomer and functional group of some carboxylic acids when their
IUPAC name is given.
IuPac Name Structural condensed molecular Functional / Functional Group

Formula Structural Formula Structural (structural
Formula Isomers formula)
H O O
H C C Methyl
Ethanoic acid
O methanoate
H CH3COOH C2H4O2
- C –O-H
H
H H O Methyl O
H C C C ethanoate
Propanoic H H O
acid H - C –O-H
CH3CH2COOH C3H6O2
Ethyl
methanoate
107
In general, an isomer of a carboxylic acid is usually an ester, and vice versa.
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: ESTERS
The alkyl group from the alcohol is Not applicable. Not applicable.
named first, followed by the name of
the acid, with the “ic” changed to
“ate”.
Examples:
A) butyl ethanoate
B) ethyl butanoate
C) ethyl ethanoate
108
D) ethyl methanoate
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: aLdEHydES IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The longest chain is numbered so that The carbon atom in Change the “e” ending
the carbon atom in the CHO group has CHO is used to locate in the alkane to “al” for
the lowest number in the chain. It will the CHO group. the aldehyde.
always be 1, but 1 is omitted in the
IUPAC name.
a) B)
(a) HCHO (b) CH3CH2CHO
methanal propanal
HOmOLOGOuS SERIES: KETONES IuPac NOmENcLaTuRE
The longest chain is numbered so that The carbon atom of Change the “e” ending
the carbon atom in the C=O group has the C=O group is used in the alkane name to
the lowest number in the chain. to locate C=O. “one” for the ketone.
In general, the functional isomer of a ketone is an aldehyde, and vice versa.
Examples: CH3
(a) HCOH (b) CH3COCH3 (c) CH3CH2CH2CH2COCH3

methanone Propan-2-one 5-methylhexan-2-one
Draw structural formulae for all the molecules above.
109
PHySIcaL PROPERTIES OF ORGaNIc mOLEcuLES
definitions (REFER TO yOuR Exam GuIdELINES)
- Boiling point
- Vapour pressure
- Melting point
Types of inter-molecular forces (NOTE: ALL inter-molecular forces are
CALLED as Van der Waals forces; therefore, Hydrogen bonds are also Van
der Waals forces, according to caPS)
REmEmBER THE FOLLOwING:
 The relationship between inter-molecular forces and boiling point: As the

strength of inter-molecular forces increases, boiling point increases.
 The relationship between inter-molecular forces and vapour pressure: As the
strength of inter-molecular forces increases, vapour pressure decreases.
 What type of inter-molecular forces are present between molecules of
HydROcaRBONS Alkanes
Alkenes Only London Forces

Alkynes
(Haloalkanes/aldehydes/Ketones contain BOTH London Forces and dipole-

dipole forces (organic molecules where there is a halogen atom or oxygen atom
(more electro-negative atoms than C there are dipole dipole forces)
 dipole–dipole forces are stronger than London Forces.
In Haloalkanes/aldehydes/Ketones, the stronger force is the Dipole- dipole force.

(Note: London Forces are also present.)
SummaRy
Alkanes
Hydrocarbons Alkenes have ONLy London forces between molecules
Alkynes
Haloalkane/aldehydes and Ketones have:
110
BOTH London forces and dipole-dipole forces (i.e. a compound with Br or cl or O
will have dipole–dipole forces).
dipole–dipole forces are stronger than London Forces.
alcohols and carboxylic acids have:
London Forces, Dipole-dipole forces and Hydrogen bonds (the strongest of the
inter-molecular forces) between their molecules.
SummaRy OF TyPES OF BONdS IN ORGaNIc mOLEcuLES
ONLy London BOTH aLL THREE

Forces London forces  London forces
and  dipole-dipole forces
dipole –dipole forces  Hydrogen bonding
Alkane Haloalkane Alcohol
Alkene Aldehyde Carboxylic acid
Alkyne Ketone
Summary of bonds
Hydrogen Bonds dipole dipole dispersion Forces/

London Forces
Hydrogen bonding occurs in Van der waals dipole-dipole
molecules containing the highly interactions.
electronegative elements F, O, or N Other groups of molecules
that are directly bound to a hydrogen beside hydrogen can be
atom in a molecule. Since H has an involved in polar covalent
electronegativity of 2.2 the bonds are bonding with strongly
not as polarized as purely ionic bonds electronegative atoms due to
and possess some covalent character. their electro negativities. The
However, the bond to hydrogen will unequal distribution of charge The weakest intermolecular forces
still be polarized and possess a dipole. gives the molecule a dipole of all are called dispersion
nature. For instance, each of forces or London forces. These
these molecules contains a represent the attraction
dipole: between instantaneous dipoles in
a molecule. If you cool a gas like
Argon to –186 °C, you can actually
condense it into liquid argon. The
fact that it forms a liquid it means
that something is holding it
together. That “something” is
dispersion forces. Think about. on
average the electrons in the
The dipole of one molecule can align valence shell, are evenly
with the dipole from another molecule, dispersed. But at any given instant,
These dipoles can interact with
leading to an attractive interaction that there might be a mismatch
each other in an attractive
we call hydrogen bonding. Owing to between how many electrons are
fashion, which will also increase
rapid molecular motion in solution, on one side and how many are on
the boiling point. However since
these bonds are temporary (short- the other, which can lead to
the electronegativity difference
lived) but have significant bond an instantaneous difference in
between carbon
strengths ranging from (9 kJ/mol (2 charge.
(electronegativity = 2.5) and the
kcal/mol) (for NH) to about 30 kJ/mol
111
(7 kcal) and higher for HF. As you electronegative atom (such as
might expect, the strength of the bond oxygen or nitrogen) is not as For hydrocarbons and other non-
increases as the electronegativity of large as it is for hydrogen polar molecules which lack strong
the group bound to hydrogen is (electronegativity = 2.2), the dipoles, these dispersion forces
increased. polar interaction is not as strong. are really the only attractive
So in a sense, HO, and NH are So on average these forces tend forces between molecules. The
“sticky” – molecules containing these to be weaker than in hydrogen dipoles are weak and transient,
functional groups will tend to have bonding. they depend on contact between
higher boiling points than you would molecules – which means that the
expect based on their molecular forces increase with surface area.
weight.
A small molecule like methane
has very weak intermolecular
forces, and has a low boiling
point. However, as molecular
weight increases, boiling point
also goes up. That’s because the
surface over which these forces
can operate has
increased. Therefore, dispersion
forces increase with increasing
molecular weight. Individually,
each interaction isn’t worth much,
but if collectively, these forces can
be extremely significant.
COMPARE THE STRENGTH OF INTER-MOLECULAR FORCES
London Forces – WEAKEST
Dipole-dipole - STRONGER than London Forces, but WEAKER than Hydrogen bonds
Hydrogen bonds - STRONGEST
ExamPLES
1.1 Consider the three compounds: a: CH3OH B:CH3CH2OH and

c:CH3CH2CH2OH
1.1.1 Which of the three compounds has the HIGHEST boiling point?
1.1.2 Explain your answer to QUESTION 1.1.1 above

Answer:
Approach: Using the summary above, check where the molecules in question belong
and check the forces that can be found in that group.
The compounds belong to the same homologous series.
Mention the trend with regard to chain length (surface area).
Mention the trend with regard to London Forces.
112
More energy is required to break forces.
Generally: If the compounds belong to the same homologous series, the

explanation must mention London Forces, as they are the oNLY forces affected by
an increase/decrease in surface area.
A common ERROR is using Hydrogen bonds in the answer, since we are dealing
with alcohols - but hydrogen bonds/dipole-dipole forces are not affected by chain
length.
aNSwER:
1.1.1 c
1.1.2 From a to c
Chain length (or surface area or molecular size) increases.
The strength of London forces increases.
More energy is needed to break inter-molecular forces.
(DO NOT SAY “break bonds”. SAY “Break inter-molecular forces”.)
CH3
1.2 Consider the TWO compounds, d: CH3COCH3 and E:CH3CH2CH3
1.2.1 Which compound has the HIGHEST boiling point?
1.2.2 Explain your answer to QUESTION 1.1 above.
Approach:
The two compounds belong to different homologous series
Step 1: Identify the type of inter-molecular force in each

Step2: Compare the strength of the forces.
Step 3: More energy is needed to break inter-molecular forces.
Answer:
1.2.1 d
1.2.2 STEP 1: Between the molecules of d there are dipole–dipole forces.

STEP 2: Between the molecules of E, there are London forces.
Dipole-dipole forces are stronger than London forces.
STEP 3: More energy is required to break inter-molecular forces in d.
113
ExERcISE : PHySIcaL PROPERTIES
Consider compounds a to c in the table below:
compound IuPac name

a ethane
B propane
c butane
1.1 To what homologous series do compounds a to c belong?
1.2 Is compound a SATURATED or UNSATURATED? Give a reason.
1.3 Which ONE of the compounds has the HIGHEST vapour pressure?
1.4 Explain your answer to QUESTION 1.3 ABOVE.
1.5 Which compound has the highest boiling point?
ExcERcISE 2: PHySIcaL PROPERTIES
2.1 The table shows five organic compounds represented by the letters A to D.
a CH3CH2OH
B CH3CO2H
c CH3CHO
d CH3CH2CH3
E CH3CH3
2.1.1 Which compound in the table is an aldehyde?
Consider the boiling points of compounds a to E, given in random order below,
and use them where applicable to answer the questions that follow.
118 oC -89 oC 78 oC -42oC 21 oC
2.1.2 Write down the boiling point of:
a. Compound B b. Compound c
2.1.3 Explain the difference in the boiling point of:
a. a and B
114
b. B and c
c. c and d
d. D and E
2.1.4 Describe the trend in vapour pressure from c to E
2.2 The relationship between boiling point and the number of carbon atoms in
straight chain molecules of alkanes, carboxylic acids and aldehydes is
investigated. Curves P, Q and R are obtained.
GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS NUMBER OF C ATOMS
500
P
Boiling point (K)
Q
300
R
100
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of C atoms
2.2.1 Define the following terms:
a. Boiling point (2)

b. Vapour pressure (2)
2.2.2 For curves a, P, Q, R write down a conclusion that can be drawn from these
results. (2)
115
2.2.3 Identify the curve that represents each of the following (a ,B or c):
a. Aldehydes (1)
b. Carboxylic acids (1)
2.2.4 Explain your answer to question 2.2.3 above. (5)
SOLuTIONS: PHySIcaL PROPERTIES
1.1 Alkanes
1.2 Saturated - it contains only single bonds.
1.3 Ethane
1.4 From a to c:
Surface area (chain length) increases.
Strength of London forces increases.
More energy is needed to break the inter-molecular forces.
1.5 C
2.1.1. c
2.1.2. a.118 oC
b. 21 oC
2.1.3 a. Both compound A and B have Hydrogen bonds.
Compound B has more sites for Hydrogen bonds than A (therefore the bonds
are stronger in B).
More energy is needed to break inter-molecular forces in B.
b. B has strong Hydrogen bonds.
C has weak dipole–dipole forces.

More energy is needed to break the bonds in B.
c. c has dipole dipole forces.

d has weak London forces.
c needs more energy to break forces.
116
d. From E to d
Surface area (chain length) increases.
The strength of London forces increases.
More energy is needed to break inter-molecular forces.
GENERaLLy, when explaining trends in boiling point and vapour pressure:
 IF the compounds differ in chain length:

 Mention the trend in surface area.
 Mention the trend in strength of London forces. (Remember ALL
compounds have London forces, including alcohols and
carboxylic acids.)
 Lastly, more energy is needed to break forces in the compound

where forces are strongest.
 IF the compounds belong to different homologous series:
Identify the type of force in each compound.
Compare the strength of the forces - mention which one is stronger.
More energy is needed to break inter-molecular forces in the
compound where forces are stronger.
(NOTE: IT IS NOT ACCEPTABLE TO WRITE, “TO BREAK BONDS, AS THESE

ARE INTER-MOLECULAR FORCES, NOT INTER-ATOMIC BONDS, LIKE
COVALENT BONDS, ETC.”)
117
ORGaNIc REacTIONS
 addITION, SuBSTITuTION, ELImINaTION

 ESTERIFIcaTION, cOmBuSTION, POLymERISaTION
Draw contrasts between substitution and elimination
addition and elimination
SUBSTITUTION ELIMINATION
(NO alkene in products or reactants) Alkene is a Product
Reaction Conditions Reaction conditions
-mild heat for in all Substitution Strong Heat in all Elimination
For reaction of Haloalkane to For Hydrohalogenation

Produce Alcohol (hydrolysis)
- Use concentrated strong base KOH
- Use H2O OR or NaOH
–Dilute strong base KOH or NaOH
ORGANIC REACTIONS
ADDITION ELIMINATION
Alkene is a reactant (On left of arrow) Alkene is a product

 Hydrogenation
Reaction Conditions
Alkene to Alkane: Add H2 (Catalyst Pt or Pd) Strong Heat for all Elimination reactions
 Hydrohalogenation: Add HBr or HCl  Cracking

Alkene to Haloalkane
e.g. C15H32 2C2H4 + C3H6 + C8H18
(Product will have ONE halogen atom) Catalytic cracking Low Temp/Low Pressure
Thermal cracking High Temp/High Pressure
 Halogenation (Add Br2 or Cl2)
 Dehydrohalogenation
Alkene to haloalkane
Two halogen atoms on Product (Bromine (Removal of HBr or HCl)
test) Conditions: Strong heat/Conc KOH or NaOH
 Hydration (Add H2O)  Dehydration (Removal of H2O)
Catalyst: H2SO4 Conditions: Strong heat and excess conc H2SO4)
.Alkene to alcohol (add H2O catalyst

H2SO4)
118
TIPS
In addition, reactions involving compounds where there is no symmetry across

the double bond remember H “likes many Hs”)
Think of water H OH in substitution in addition reaction and substitution reactions.
E.g. Write down the structural formula of the Major product using structural formulae.
1 2 3
CH3CH=CH2 + H2O
CH3
Approach:
Think of H2O as H OH
HO H
H comes here
Answer: H C C C H
H H
H C H
Look at the Carbon atoms at the double bond: Carbon 2 has ONE H; carbon 3 has 2.
Therefore, there is NO symmetry across double bond H will add where there are
many Hs, at Carbon 3 and OH- adds on Carbon 2 on to form the major product
H O H
Answer: H C C C H
H H
H C H
For substitution the negative part (written second in formula undergoes substitution
e.g. when using dilute KOH it is the OH- that substitutes, not the K+
ExERcISE 1: ORGaNIc REacTIONS
119
The flow diagram below shows how 2-bromopropane can be used to prepare other
organic compounds.
Alkene a 2-bromobutane c Alcohol
(Major Product) B
1.1 Classify 2-bromobutane as a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY
haloalkane. (1)
1.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of a positional isomer of
2-bromobutane. (1)
1.3 Write down the type of reaction represented by:
1.3.1 a 1.3.2 c 1.3.3 d (1x3)
1.4 Write down the:
1.4.1 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reagent in
a. reaction a b. reaction c c. reaction d (1x 3)
1.5 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic product(s) in
a. reaction a, if KOH is used as a reagent (1)
b. reaction c, if KOH is used as a reagent (1)
c. reaction d (1)
1.6 Write down the FORMULA of the catalyst used in reaction B. (1)
Consider the following compounds: a: CH4 B: Ethanol C: Propanoic acid
2.1 Compound a reacts with unknown compound x in the presence of sunlight to
produce bromomethane.
Write down a balanced equation for the reaction between:
120
2.1.1 compound a and x (3)
2.1.2 compound a with excess oxygen (3)
2.2 Compound B and c react in the presence of an inorganic acid.
Write down the:
2.2.1 name of the inorganic acid (1)
2.2.2 the equation for the reaction between B and c, using structural
formulae for the organic reagents (1)
2.2.3 reaction condition (1)
3.1 A mixture of 4 grams of ethanol (C2H5OH) and 25 dm3 of air is ignited at

25 ºC and standard pressure. A reaction occurs according to
the balanced equation:
C2H5OH(ℓ) + 3O2(g) → 2 CO2(g) + 3 H2O(g)
3.1.1Determine, with the aid of a calculation, whether all of Compound d will be

used up at the end of the reaction, if the molar volume of a gas at 25 ºC
and standard pressure is 24,47 dm3. (5)
(ASSUME THAT AIR CONTAINS 21% OXYGEN (O2).)
3.1.2 If the ethanol is not used up, calculate the mass in grams of ethanol that is not
used. (3)
SOLuTIONS
1.1 Secondary Carbon 2
H H Br H
H c c c c H Look at carbon 2 (middle one)
bonded to ONE H; therefore
H H H H SEcONdaRy
 If there were TwO Hs on the carbon bonded to Br (carbon 2)

then PRImaRy.
 If there were NO Hs on carbon 2, then TERTIaRy.
1.2 Change position of Br. (Change position of functional group, halogen or side
chain to make a positional isomer.)
121
H H H Br
H c c c c H
H H H H
1.3.1 A Elimination OR Dehydrohalogenation
1.3.2 c Substitution or Hydrolysis
1.3.3 d Substitution
1.4.1 a. concentrated KOH
b. KOH or H2O
c. HBr
1.5 a. NaBr + H2O
b. KBr
c. H2O
1.6 B H2SO4
H H
2.1.1 H C H + Br2 H C Br + HBr
H H
2.1.2 CH4 + 2 O2 2CO2 + H2O
2.2.1 Sulphuric acid
2.2.2
H H O H H
H C C O H + H O C C C H
H H H H
H H O H H
H C C O C C C H + H2O
H H H H
122
2.2.3 Heat mildly over a water bath.
3.1 n ethanol = m/M = 4/46 = 0.087 mol
Vo2 in 25 dm3 of air = 21/100 x 25 = 5.25 dm3
n O2 = V/Vm = 5.25/24.47 = 0,215 mol
n ethanol = m/M = 4 /46 = 0.087
Ratio from equation Ethanol: Oxygen 1: 3
0.087 mol ethanol too much for 0.215 oxygen (Ratio 0.087:0.215 = 1:2,5
required ratio 1:3)
O2 is the limiting reagent; Ethanol is in excess
3.2 n ethanol reacting = 1/3 x (0.215) = 0.072 mol
n ethanol in Excess = n initial – n final = 0.087 - .072 = 0.015 mol
m ethanol = nM= 0.015 x 46 = 0.69 g
123
14. ELEcTROcHEmISTRy
ELEcTROcHEmISTRy
E
ELECTROLYTIC CELL GALVANIC CELL
ELEcTROLyTIc cELLS (There are 5 electrolytic cells that you must understand.)
 Convert electrical energy to chemical energy.

(Note there is NO mention of mEcHaNIcaL energy in chemistry.)
 Reactions at electrodes are ENdOTHERmIc (reactions not self –
sustaining.)
 In the diagram for electrolytic cell, there will be ONE CONTAINER and
a power source or battery.
124
ELECTROLYSIS OF
EELECTROLYSIS OF
saturated NaCl (aq)
concentrated CuCl2(aq) Cℓ ℓ ℓ
EXTRACTION OF ALUMINIUM
Need for cryolite

ELECTROLYTIC CELL
(To lower melting poit saving on
operational costs)
Reactions at electrodes
At CATHODE:
Al3+ + 3e Al
ELECTROPLATING
At ANODE: C + O2 CO2
The substance that is plated forms
the CATHODE.
The electrolyte must have ions of

the metal that are plated.
ELECTROREFINING of Copper
(Or Purification)
The substance that is refined forms

the ANODE.
The electrolyte must contain ions of

the metal that is refined.
ELEcTROLySIS
ELEcTROLySIS OF cucl2 and Nacl solutions
“Second part of formula” goes to anode for oxidation.
“First part” may go to cathode for reduction if it is a STRONGER OXIDISING agent.
Positive ion “First part of formula” may NOT be reduced at ALL but H2O will undergo
reduction
125
if Positive ion (Metal ion) “First part of formula” is a weaker oxidising agent than H2O
e.g. in NaCl electrolysis Na+ dOES NOT undergo REducTION
Take CuCl2 (Cu2+ Cℓ- Cℓ- ). The chloride ion Cl- “Second part” always migrates
towards +ve ANODE (Positive attracted to negative) to undergo OXIDATION (Cℓ - is

the reducing agent)
Compare oxidising ability of Cu2+ the “first part” of the formula with that of water
H2O in order to decide which species will undergo reduction (H2O or Cu2+).
Cu2+ is a stronger oxidising agent than H2O therefore Cu2+ will undergo reduction
Consider electrolysis of NaCl (aq)
5.1 Write down the following:
5.1.1 oxidation half reaction
5.1.2 formula of the reducing agent
5.1.3 reduction half reactio5.1.4 formula of the oxidising agent
approach:
5.1.1 Negative part of formula (second part) Cl- goes to anode for oxidation
Therefore, Oxidation half reaction 2 Cl- Cl2 + 2 e (From table and

reversed)
5.1.2 The reducing agent is found in the oxidation half reaction on left of arrow)
2 Cl- Cl2 + 2 e
Therefore Cl-
5.1.3 Compare the oxidising ability of Na+ with that of water H2O.
H2O is a stronger oxidising agent than Na+, therefore H2O undergoes

reduction.
Therefore: H2O(l) + 2e H2(g) + OH-
5.1.4 The oxidising agent is at the left in the reduction half reaction
H2O(l) + 2e H2(g) + OH-
Therefore: H2O is the oxidising agent.
126
TIPS:
 You are NOT permitted to put double arrows in equations - always use ONE
arrow.
 Reducing agent found on the left of arrow in OXIDATION half reaction
 The oxidising agent is ALWAYS on the left of the REDUCTION half reaction.
 There will be NO REACTION involving Na+ but H2O in electrolytic cells
 Know the properties of ANODE then know those of CATHODE as the
opposite of anode
 Reverse the OXIDATION half reaction when taking it from the table
 Oxidising agents are bbon the FAR LEFT on TABLE of REDUCTION
POTENTIALS
 Reducing agents immediately on the right of arrow when reading from left to
right
 Smaller EO value for ANODE
 Write the formula as it is given DATA SHEET e.g. Eocell = Eocathode - Eoanode
(No abbreviations are acceptable, e.g. E = Eocat - Eoan - NO marks for this.)
To get marks for the formula, you must substitute values, even if they are
INCORRECT.
 In Chemistry, there is no MECHANICAL energy - only CHEMICAL energy
QuESTION 1
Consider the electrolytic cells a and B given below.
X, Y, W and Z are carbon electrodes.
w z
X Y
X
Y NaCl(aq) CuCl2(aq)
cELL a cELL B
1.1 Write down the:
a. energy conversion in these cells
b. the reason why a DC power source is used in place of an AC power source
127
1.2 Write down THREE observable changes in cell B.
1.3 Which electrode is the ANODE in:
1.3.1 Cell a 1.3.2 Cell B
1.4 Write down the half reaction taking place at electrode:
1.4.1 x and w 1.4.2 y 1.4.3 z
1.5 Write down the FORMULA and NAME of the reducing agent in cell:
1.5.1 a 1.5.2 B
1.6 Write down the FORMULA and NAME of the oxidising agent in cell:
1.6.1 a 1.6.2 B
1.7 Write down the name of the gas formed at:
1.7.1 electrode x
1.7.2 electrode y
1.8 In cell a, the Na+ ions do not form sodium Na. Explain be referring to the strength
of oxidising agents involved.
QuESTION 2
A chemist wants to determine the PERCENTAGE of copper by mass in an IMPURE

copper sample containing platinum and silver as the only impurities.
He first sets up an electrolytic cell to purify copper.

Power
Source
ImPuRE
cOPPER P Q PuRE cOPPER
cuSO4(aq)
P
2.1 Is electrode P the POSITIVE or NEGATIVE electrode? (1)
2.2 Which electrode (P or Q) will show an increase in mass? (1)
128
2.3.1 The SYMBOL or NAME of the product formed at electrode P. (1)
2.3.2 The equation for the half reaction taking place at electrode Q. (2)
2.4 Use relative strengths of reducing agents involved to explain why the metals
platinum and silver do not form ions during this process. (2)
[12]
QuESTION 3
The electrolytic cell below is used for electro refining (purification) an IMPURE
copper sample.
Electrode Q contains copper, which contains 3% IMPURITIES by mass.
Power
Source
Pure Copper IMPURE Copper

P Q
CuCℓ2(aq)
3.1 Write down the observable changes at the:
3.1.1 Anode 3.1.2 Cathode
3.2 Write down the half reaction taking place at the:
3.2.1 Anode 3.2.2 Cathode
3.3 CuCl2 solution is light green.
How will the intensity of the colour of the solution change as the cell is working?
Give a reason.
3.4 Calculate the mass of the IMPURE copper sample if 2 moles of electrons
are transferred when ALL the copper is extracted from the IMPURE sample.
129
3.5 The IMPURE copper sample contains metals like silver. Explain why silver
does undergo oxidation in this cell.
3.6 What happens to the electrolyte when the cell is in operation? Explain.
GaLVaNIc cELLS
Questions on galvanic cells may include:
 dIaGRam OF a GaLVaNIc cELL

 REacTION EQuaTIONS (increase in oxidation number for aNOdE)
 cELL NOTaTION (anode is on the left)
KNOw THE PROPERTIES OF aN aNOdE.
aNOdE
OXIDATION OCCURS (ELECTRONS MOVE AWAY FROM THE ANODE)
SMALLER EO-values
NEGATIVE ELECTRODE (CONNECTED TO NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF
VOLTMETER)
DECREASE IN MASS
[POSITIVE IONS] INCREASE
ANIONS MOVE TOWARDS ANODE
OXIDATION NUMBER INCREASES
(Based on the notes above, you can deduce what happens at the
caTHOdE.
No need to memorise both.)
cOmmON mIScONcEPTION
The CATHODE DOES NOT undergo REDUCTION.
130
What undergoes reduction (i.e. oxidising agent) is an ION in solution
at the CATHODE half cell.
QuESTION 4
STRucTuREd QuESTIONS
The diagram below shows a galvanic cell operating under standard conditions. The
cell reaction taking place when the cell is functioning is:
6Cℓ - (aq) + 2Au3+(aq) → 3Cℓ2(g) + 2Au(s)
With switch S OPEN, the initial reading on the voltmeter is 0,14 V.
Write down the following:
4.1 The NAME or FORMULA of the oxidising agent. (1)
4.2 The half-reaction that takes place at the anode. (2)
4.3 The cell notation for this cell. (3)
4.4 Calculate the standard reduction potential of Au. (4)
4.5 The concentration of the Au3+ is increased. How will this change affect the initial
EMF of the cell. Write down INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE
SAME. (1)
Switch S is now closed and the bulb lights up.
131
4.5 How will the reading on the voltmeter now compare to the INITIAL reading
of 0,14 V? Write down only LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO.
Give a reason for your answer.
QuESTION 5
A learner sets up a galvanic cell as shown below. The cell functions under
standard conditions. Nitrates are used as electrolytes.
5.1 Define the following terms:
5.1.1 Electrolyte (2)
5.1.2 Galvanic cell (2)
5.2 Write down the initial concentration of the Copper (II) nitrate (Cu (NO3)2
Solution. (1)
5.3 Calculate the mass of Copper (II) nitrate needed to prepare the solution if the
volume of the solution is 250 cm3. (4)
5.4 In which direction (a or B) will ANIONS move in the salt bridge? (1)
5.5 Calculate the emf of the above cell under standard conditions. (4)
5.6 Write down the balanced equation for the net cell reaction that takes place in
this cell. (3)
132
5.7 Write down the cell notation for this cell. (3)
QuESTION 6
A standard electrochemical cell is set up using a standard hydrogen half-cell and
a standard X|X2+ half-cell, as shown below. The standard reduction potential of the
X|X2+ half-cell is - 0.74 V.
6.1.1 The function of component Q. (1)

6.1.2 The initial reading on the voltmeter. (1)
6.1.3 The half-reaction that takes place at the cathode of this cell. (2)
6. 2 The hydrogen half-cell is now replaced by a m|m2+ half-cell. The cell notation of
this cell is: X(s)| X2+(aq) || m2+(aq) | m(s). The initial reading on the voltmeter is
now 0.61 V.
6.2.1 Identify metal m. Show how you arrived at the answer. (5)
6.2.2 Is the cell reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)
6.3 The reading on the voltmeter becomes zero after using this cell for several
hours. Give a reason for this reading by referring to the cell reaction. (1)
133
QuESTION 7
Consider the following reaction:
Ce3+ (aq) + Ti(s) Ti3+ (aq) + Ce(s)
Standard electrode potentials are given in the table below.
Redox pair Standard Electrode Potential
Ti3+/Ti -1.63 V
Ce3+/ Ce -2.48 V
7.1 Determine by calculation if the reaction is spontaneous.
7.2 According to the data in the given table, which substance is the strongest
reducing agent?
SOLuTIONS
ELEcTROcHEmISTRy: GaLVaNIc aNd ELEcTROLyTIc cELLS
QuESTION 1
1.1 a. Chemical energy to electrical energy.

b. To ensure the polarities of the anode and cathode do not change.
1.2 Bubbles of chlorine gas at Z (Anode)

Brown coating on Y (Copper)
Intensity of blue colour decreases. (The concentration of Cu2+ decreases as Cu2+
reduced to Cu)
1.3.1 x 1.3.2 z
1.4.1 2Cl- Cl2 + 2e 1.4.2 2 H2O(l) + 2e H2O + OH-
1.5.1 Cl 1.5.2 Cl-
1.6.1 H2O 1.6.2 Cu2+
1.7.1 Chlorine 1.7.2 hydrogen
134
1.8 H2O is a stronger oxidising agent than Na+. Therefore, H2O is reduced.
QuESTION 2
2.1 POSITIVE
2.2 Q
2.3.1 Cu2+ or Copper (II) ions (From oxidation Cu Cu2+ + 2e )
2.3.2 Cu2+ + 2e Cu
2.4 Cu is a stronger reducing agent than both silver and platinum.
QuESTION 3
3.1.1 Mass decreases (ANODE) 3.1.2 Mass increases (CATHODE)
3.2.1 Cu Cu2+ + 2e 3.2.2 Cu2+ + 2e Cu
3.3 nCu = ½ x 2 = 1 mol (Ratio of mol Cu : mol electrons 1:2)
M pure Cu = n .M = 1 x 63.5 = 63.5 g
Therefore: 97/100 x IMPURE Copper = Pure Copper (3% impurities; therefore
100% - 3% = 97% is pure copper)
3.4 Cu is a stronger reducing agent than Ag.
QuESTION 4
4.1 Au3+
(From oxidation numbers Oxidation number of Au DECREASES from +3 to 0)
4.2 2 Cl- Cl2 + 2e
4.3 Pt Cl- Cl2 Au3+ Au
4.4 INCREASE
4.5 SMALLER THAN
Lost volts due to internal resistance (when current flows through the cell).
QuESTION 5
5.1.1 Electrolyte – a solution or liquid that conducts electricity because it contains
ions.
135
5.1.2 Galvanic cell: converts chemical energy to electrical energy.
5.2 c = 1 mol.dm-3 (standard conditions)
5.3 mCu = ?
nCu = c.V = 1 x 250/1000 = 0,25 mol
mCu = n.M= 0.25 x 63.5 = 15.88 g (15.875 g)
5.4 a
5.5 Eocell = Eocathode - Eo anode (Formula)
= 0.80 – 0.34 (Substitution)
= 0.46 V (Answer with UNIT)
5.6 Cu Cu2+ + 2e
Ag+ + e Ag (Multiply by 2 to balance the number of

electrons.)
2 Ag+ + 2 e 2 Ag
5.7 Cu/Cu2+// Ag+/Ag
QuESTION 6
6.1.1 Completes the circuit/ensures electrical neutrality of the solutions.
6.1.2 0,74 V ( an use Eocell = Eocathode - Eo anode = 0 – (- 0.74) = 0.74 V
Remember: Eocell cannot be negative
6.1.3 2 H+ + 2e H2(g)
6.2.1 m is the cathode (M is on the right-hand side in cell notation.)
Eocell = Eocathode - Eo anode
0.61 = Eocathode - (- 0.74)
0.61 = Eocathode + 0.74
0.61 – 0.74 = Eocathode
- 0.31 V = Eocathode m is Pb
136
QuESTION 7
7.1 According to the equation, Ce is the CATHODE
(Reason: Oxidation number decreases from +3 to 0; OR
Ti is the ANODE - Oxidation number increases from 0 to +3.)
Approach:
Calculate EMF. If EmF is POSITIVE it means Reaction is SPONTaNEOuS
Eocell = Eocathode - Eo anode
Eocell = -2.48 – (- 1.63)
= - 0.85 V
Reaction NOT SPONTANEOUS, Eocell is NEGATIVE
7.2 Ce
INdIREcT TRaNSFER OF ELEcTRONS

e. g. A zinc rod is placed in a copper(II) sulphate solution, as shown below.
Zn
CuSO4(aq)
ExamPLE 1
Write down THREE observable changes that will occur.
1.1 Write down the:

1.1.2 reduction half reaction
1.1.3 name of the oxidising agent
1.1.4 name of the reducing agent
1.1 Oxidation half: Zn Zn2+ + 2e
137
1.2 Reduction half reaction: Cu2+ + 2e Cu
1.3 Oxidising agent (on the left of the Reduction half reaction)
Cu2+ + 2e Cu
Oxidising agent: Cu2+
1.4 Reducing agent (on the left of the Oxidation half reaction)
Zn Zn2+ + 2e
Zn is the Reducing agent
NOTE: If the reducing ability of the METAL is lower than that of the metal of the
positive ion in solution, no reaction will occur.
EXAMPLE 2: A piece of silver is placed in magnesium sulphate, e.g.:
Ag
MgSO4
2.1 Will a spontaneous reaction occur?

2.2 Can we store a magnesium sulphate solution in a container made of
silver, without the container leaking? Explain.
138
Approach: Consult the Table of Reduction potentials.
Extract form Table 4B
Li+ + e ⇌ Li Li - strongest reducing agent

………………………
………………………
Ba2+ + 2e ⇌ Ba
………………………
………………………. REDUCING AGENTS
Mg2+ + 2e ⇌ Mg
………………………
………………………
OXIDISING AGENTS
………………………
Cu2+ + 2e ⇌ Cu
…………………….
…………………….
Ag+ + e ⇌ Ag
……………………..
Cl2 (g) + 2e ⇌ 2Cl-
F2(g) + 2e ⇌ 2F-
F2 - strongest oxidising agent
RULE: Top right reduces bottom left.
Consider example 1 above:
Zn + CuSO4
Find Zn and Cu2+ in the table.
Remember Zn is the reducing agent in Example 1.
Zn2+ + 2e ⇌ Zn
Zn is a stronger reducing agent than Cu.
Cu2+ + 2e ⇌ Cu Zn reduces Cu2+ to Cu.
139
Example 2:
If a reaction occurs, Ag will be the reducing agent. (It is the METAL.)
Mg2+ + 2e ⇌ Mg
THIS CAN NOT TAKE PLACE SPONTANEOUSLY.
Ag+ + e ⇌ Ag
In Example 2:
2.1 There will be NO reaction.
Reason: Ag is a weaker reducing agent than Mg.
Ag cannot reduce Mg2+ to Mg
2.2 To be able to store a solution in a container, the SOLUTION AND THE METAL
USED IN THE CONTAINER MUST NOT REACT.
Yes, we can store MgSO4 in Ag container.
Reason:
Reaction will not occur spontaneously, as Ag is a weaker reducing agent than
Mg. Ag cannot reduce Mg2+ to Mg
The table of reduction potentials only gives values of redox reactions under
standard conditions. This means that if the experiment is carried out when the
conditions are not standard, we cannot rely on the usual equation to give us the.
We will need a different type of equation called the Nernst Equation. The Nernst
equation however is not prescribed in our current curriculum. Our calculations
should therefore confine themselves to Standard Conditions only.
140
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
QuESTION 1
An aluminium rod is placed in a copper (II) sulphate solution as shown below.
Al
CuSO4 (aq)
ExamPLE 1
1.1 Write down THREE observable changes that will occur.
1.2.2 reduction half reaction
1.2.3 name of the oxidising agent
1.2.4 name of the reducing agent
ExamPLE 2
2.1 Can we store:
2.1.1 CuSO4 in a container made of silver metal? Explain.
2.1.2 MgSO4 in a container made of zinc? Explain.
2.1.3 AgNO3 in a container made of copper?
141
142
143
144
Published in 2017 by the Department of Basic Education
222 Struben Street
Private Bag X895, Pretoria, 0001
Telephone: 012 357 3000 Fax: 012 323 0601
© Department of Basic Education

website facebook twitter
www.education.gov.za www.facebook.com/BasicEd www.twitter.com/dbe_sa

Physical Science FET PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Science FET PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Further Education and Training

2 How to use this Revision Booklet 6

2.1 For every topic you need to: 6

2.2 General strategy for problem-solving in Physics 6

3 Key Physics Concepts 7

3.1 Newton’s Laws 7

3.2 Momentum and Impulse 8

3.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 9

3.4 Work Energy and Power. Work-Energy Theorem. Law of Conser- 10

3.5 Doppler Effect 11

3.7 Electric Circuits 15

3.9 Photoelectric Effect 18

4 Revision Questions- Set 1 19

4.1 Newton’s Laws 19

4.2 Momentum and Impulse 22

4.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 27

4.4 Work Energy Power 29

4.5 Doppler Effect 34

4.7 Electric Circuits 38

5.1 Newton’s Laws 46

5.2 Momentum and Impulse 47

5.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 48

5.4 Work Energy Power 50

5.5 Doppler Effect 51

5.7 Electric Circuits 52

5.9 Photoelectric Effect 55

6 Check your answers - Set 1

6.1 Newton’s Laws 56

6.2 Solutions: Momentum and Impulse 58

6.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 58

6.4 Work Energy Power 62

6.6 Electric Circuits 67

7 Check your answers - Set 2

7.1 Newton’s Laws 71

7.2 Momentum and Impulse 76

7.3 Vertical Projectile Motion 79

7.1 Work Energy Power 82

7.4 Electric Circuits 85

7.6 Photoelectric Effect 88

1 How to use this book 89

2 Key subject Concepts 89

3 The Representation Model 89

4 Tips on specific topics 90

5 Study and examination tips 90

6 Message to Grade 12 learners from the writers 90

7 The Mole Concept 91

8.1 Excess and Limiting Reagents 92

9 Practice activities from Grade 10 93

10 Dynamic Chemical Equilibrium Graphs 93

13 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 101

13.1 BASIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 101

13.2 NOMENCLATURE OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 102

Message to Grade 12 Learners from the Minister of Basic Education

Matric (Grade12) is perhaps the most important examination you will

MINISTER OF BASIC EDUCATION

• Learn the content.

• Do the exercises without looking at the solutions.

• Go back to your answer and correct any errors.

2.2 General strategy for problem-solving in Physics

• the numerical value is reasonable

• the correct units are used

• magnitude and direction (if it is a vector quantity)

resultant/net velocity force unless force